Agriculture and farming Books

Book SynopsisHealthy seeds and propagules are the basic requirement for producing good grains, fruits and vegetables needed for human survival and perpetuation. Dispersal of microbial plant pathogens via seeds and propagules has assumed more importance than other modes of dispersal, as infected seeds and propagules have the potential to become the primary sources of carrying pathogen inoculum for subsequent crops. Several diseases transmitted through seeds and propagules have been shown to have the potential to damage economies as a result of huge quantitative and qualitative losses in numerous crops. Hence, it is essential to rapidly detect, identify and differentiate the microbial plant pathogens present in seeds and propagules precisely and reliably, using sensitive techniques. Microbial Plant Pathogens: Detection and Management in Seeds and Propagules provides a comprehensive resource on seed-borne and propagule-borne pathogens. Information on the biology of microbial pathogensTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgement xvii Volume 1 Pathogen Detection and Identification 1 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Concepts and Implications of Pathogen Infection of Seeds and Propagules 3 1.2 Economic Importance of Seed] and Propagule]Borne Microbial Pathogens 4 1.3 Nature of Seed] and Propagule]Borne Microbial Pathogens 6 1.4 Development of Crop Disease Management Systems 8 References 9 2 Detection and Identification of Fungal Pathogens 12 2.1 Detection and Differentiation of Fungal Pathogens in Seeds 12 2.2 Detection and Differentiation of Fungal Pathogens in Propagules 86 2.3 Appendix 104 References 112 3 Biology of Fungal Pathogens 134 3.1 Biological Characteristics 135 3.2 Physiological Characteristics of Fungal Pathogens 144 3.3 Genotypic Characteristics of Fungal Pathogens 147 3.4 Influence of Storage Conditions 165 3.5 Appendix 166 References 166 4 Process of Infection by Fungal Pathogens 174 4.1 Invasion Paths of Seedborne Fungal Pathogens 174 4.2 Invasion Paths of Propagule]Borne Fungal Pathogens 207 References 210 5 Detection and Identification of Bacterial and Phytoplasmal Pathogens 220 5.1 Detection and Identification of Bacterial Pathogens 220 5.2 Detection of Bacterial Pathogens in Propagules 273 5.3 Detection of Phytoplasmal Pathogens 326 5.4 Appendix 343 References 352 6 Biology and Infection Process of Bacterial and Phytoplasmal Pathogens 375 6.1 Biology of Bacterial Pathogens 375 6.2 Disease Cycles of Seedborne Bacterial Pathogens 377 6.3 Disease Cycles of Propagule]Borne Bacterial Pathogens 409 6.4 Biology of Phytoplasmal Pathogens 429 6.5 Disease Cycles of Phytoplasmal Pathogens 431 6.6 Appendix 437 References 437 7 Detection and Identification of Viruses and Viroids 457 7.1 Detection of Viruses in Seeds 457 7.2 Detection of Viruses in Propagules 493 7.3 Detection of Viroids in Seeds 572 7.4 Detection of Viroids in Propagules 577 7.5 Appendix 590 References 594 8 Biology and Infection Process of Viruses and Viroids 619 8.1 Characteristics of Plant Viruses 619 8.2 Biological Properties of Viruses 620 8.3 Infection Process of Plant Viruses 632 8.4 Characteristics of Viroids 646 8.5 Infection Process of Viroids 651 References 656 Index 669 Volume 2 Epidemiology and Management of Crop Diseases 1 9 Epidemiology of Seed] and Propagule]Borne Diseases 3 9.1 Epidemiology of Fungal Diseases 4 9.2 Epidemiology of Bacterial Diseases 27 9.3 Epidemioloy of Virus Diseases 37 References 42 10 Crop Disease Management: Exclusion of Pathogens 52 10.1 Health Status of Seeds and Propagules 52 10.2 Plant Quarantines for Preventing Entry of Microbial Pathogens 63 10.3 Production of Disease]Free Seeds and Propagules 72 10.4 Appendix 89 References 91 11 Crop Disease Management: Reduction of Pathogen Inoculum 100 11.1 Reduction of Pathogen Inoculum by Cultural Practices 100 11.2 Reduction of Pathogen Inoculum by Physical Techniques 123 11.3 Reduction of Pathogen Inoculum by Chemical Techniques 132 References 133 12 Crop Disease Management: Enhancement of Genetic Resistance of Crop Plants 142 12.1 Types of Disease Resistance 142 12.2 Identfication of Sources of Resistance to Crop Diseases 145 12.3 Improvement of Disease Resistance Through Biotechnological Approaches 188 References 205 13 Crop Disease Management: Biological Management Strategies 224 13.1 Evaluation of Biotic Agents for Biological Control Potential 225 13.2 Evaluation of Abiotic Agents for Biological Control Potential 262 13.3 Methods of Application of Formulated Products of Biological Control Agents 283 13.4 Integration of Biological Control with Other Management Practices 289 References 290 14 Crop Disease Management: Chemical Application 306 14.1 Application of Fungicides 307 14.2 Application of Chemicals Against Bacterial Diseases 341 14.3 Application of Chemicals Against Virus Diseases 348 References 351 15 Crop Disease Management: Integration of Strategies 361 15.1 Development of Integrated Disease Management Systems 361 15.2 Management of Fungal Diseases 364 15.3 Management of Bacterial Diseases 369 15.4 Management of Virus Diseases 373 References 377 Index 383

Read more less

Book SynopsisBrown Trout is an iconic species inhabiting a diversity of habitats from mountain streams of transparent waters to lakes and oceans and is sought after by thousands of passionate anglers worldwide. This book summarizes the important aspects of brown trout s biology and ecology.Table of ContentsList of Contributors ix Foreword xiii Preface xv Malcolm Elliott 1 Introduction 1 Javier Lobón‐cerviá ix Section 1 Phylogeography and Genetic Structure 15 2 Phylogeographic History of Brown Trout: A Review 17 Nuria Sanz 3 Genetics of the Genus Salmo in Italy: Evolutionary History, Population Structure, Molecular Ecology and Conservation 65 Andreas Meraner and Andrea Gandolfi 4 Understanding the Brown Trout Population Genetic Structure in the Iberian Peninsula 103 J.L. García‐Marín, R.M. Araguas, M. Vera, and Nuria Sanz 5 Understanding Brown Trout Population Genetic Structure: A Northern‐European Perspective 127 L. Asbjørn Vøllestad Section 2 Reproductive Traits and Early Ontogeny 145 6 The Velocity of Love. The Role of Female Choice in Salmonine Reproduction 147 Manu Esteve 7 Observations of Male Choice in Brown Trout (Salmo trutta) from Lar National Park, Iran 165 Manu Esteve, Asghar Abdoli, Iraj Hashemzadeh Segherloo, Kiavash Golzarianpour, and Amir Abbas Ahmadi 8 Energetic Trade‐Offs Faced by Brown Trout During Ontogeny and Reproduction 179 Ole Kristian Berg and Ian A. Fleming 9 Impact of Embeddedness on Salmo trutta at Different Periods of their Early Ontogenesis 201 V. Bolliet and A. Bardonnet Section 3 Life‐History 227 10 Habitat as Template for Life‐Histories 229 Bror Jonsson and Nina Jonsson 11 Life‐history Plasticity in Anadromous Brown Trout: A Norwegian Perspective 251 Jan Henning L’Abée‐Lund and L. Asbjørn Vøllestad 12 Life‐History of the Adfluvial Brown Trout (Salmo trutta L.) in Eastern Fennoscandia 267 A. Huusko, A. Vainikka, J.T. Syrjänen, P. Orell, P. Louhi, and T. Vehanen Section 4 Population Dynamics 297 13 Discharge‐Dependent Recruitment in Stream‐Spawning Brown Trout 299 Javier Lobón‐Cerviá, Gorm Heilskov Rasmussen, and Erik Mortensen 14 Population Dynamics of Juvenile Brown Trout (Salmo trutta L.), Recruitment, Mortality, Biological Production and Smolt Yield in Two Danish Baecks 319 Gorm Heilskov Rasmussen 15 Foraging Behaviour of Brown Trout: A Model Species For Linking Individual Ecology to Population Dynamics? 369 John J. Piccolo and Johan Watz 16 Competition Within and Between Year Classes in Brown Trout; Implications of Habitat Complexity on Habitat Use and Fitness 383 J. Höjesjö 17 Brown Trout on the Move – Migration Ecology and Methodology 401 Kim Aarestrup, Niels Jepsen, and Eva B. Thorstad 18 Sea Trout (Salmo trutta) in Galicia (NW Spain) 445 Pablo Caballero Javierre, Rufino Vieira‐Lanero, and Fernando Cobo Gradín 19 Sea Trout (Salmo trutta L.) in Denmark 483 Gorm Heilskov Rasmussen and Stig Pedersen Section 5 Brown Trout as a Global Invader 523 20 Brown Trout as an Invader: A Synthesis of Problems and Perspectives in North America 525 Phaedra Budy and Jereme W. Gaeta 21 The Introduction of Brown Trout to New Zealand and their Impact on Native Fish Communities 545 Peter Jones and Gerard Closs 22 The Effects of Brown Trout on the Trophic Webs of New Zealand Streams 569 Phillip G. Jellyman, Peter A. McHugh, Kevin S. Simon, Ross M. Thompson, and Angus R. McIntosh 23 Brown Trout in Argentina: History, Interactions and Perspectives 599 Miguel A. Casalinuovo, Marcelo F. Alonso, Patricio J. Macchi , and Jorge A. Kuroda 24 Africa: Brown Trout Introductions, Establishment, Current Status, Impacts and Conflicts 623 Olaf L.F. Weyl, Bruce R. Ellender, Phillip Ivey, Michelle C. Jackson, Denis Tweddle, Ryan J. Wasserman, Darragh J. Woodford, and Tsungai A. Zengeya Section 6 Conservation and Management 641 25 Why Conserve Native Brown Trout? 643 John J. Piccolo, Günther Unfer, and Javier Lobón‐Cerviá 26 Fisheries Management of Stream‐Resident Brown Trout Populations – Possibilities and Restrictions 649 Günther Unfer and Kurt Pinter 27 Ecology and Management of Stream‐Resident Brown Trout in Michigan (USA) 667 Troy G. Zorn 28 History, Conservation and Management of Adfluvial Brown Trout Stocks in Finland 697 J.T. Syrjänen, A. Vainikka, P. Louhi, A. Huusko, P. Orell, and T. Vehanen 29 Brown Trout Management for the 21st Century 735 Kyle A. Young, P. Gaskell, T. Jacklin, and J.E. Williams Index 771

Read more less

Book SynopsisAlthough bioenergy is a renewable energy source, it is not without impact on the environment. Both the cultivation of crops specifically for use as biofuels and the use of agricultural byproducts to generate energy changes the landscape, affects ecosystems, and impacts the climate. Bioenergy and Land Use Change focuses on regional and global assessments of land use change related to bioenergy and the environmental impacts. This interdisciplinary volume provides both high level reviews and in-depth analyses on specific topics. Volume highlights include: Land use change concepts, economics, and modelingRelationships between bioenergy and land use changeImpacts on soil carbon, soil health, water quality, and the hydrologic cycleImpacts on natural capital and ecosystem servicesEffects of bioenergy on direct and indirect greenhouse gas emissionsBiogeochemical and biogeophysical climate regulationUncertainties and challenges associated with land use change quantification and environmentalTable of ContentsPart I: Bioenergy and Land Use Change 1 Bioenergy and Land Use Change: An OverviewPankaj Lal, Aditi Ranjan, Bernabas Wolde, Pralhad Burli, Renata Blumberg 2 An Exploration of Agricultural Land Use Change at the Intensive and Extensive Margins: Implications for Biofuels Induced Land Use Change ModelingFarzad Taheripour, Hao Cui, Wallace E. Tyner 3 Effects of Sugarcane Ethanol Expansion in The Brazilian Cerrado: Land Use Response in the New FrontierMarcellus M. Caldas, Gabriel Granco, Christopher Bishop, Jude Kastens, J. Brown 4 Biofuel Expansion and the Spatial Economy: Implications for the Amazon Basin in the 21st CenturyEugenio Y. Arima, Peter Richards, Robert T. Walker Part II: Impacts on Natural Capital and Ecosystem Services 5 Towards Life Cycle Analysis on Land Use Change and Climate Impacts from Bioenergy Production: A ReviewZhangcai Qin, Christina E Canter, Hao Cai 6 Bio-energies Impact on Natural Capital and Ecosystem Services Compared to Other Energy TechnologiesAstley Hastings 7 Empirical Evidence of Soil Carbon Changes in Bioenergy Cropping SystemsMarty Schmer, Kathleen Stewart, Virginia Jin 8 Role of crop residues in maintaining soil organic carbon in agroecosystemsDavid E. Clay, Umakant Mishra 9 Incorporating Conservation Practices into the Future Bioenergy Landscape: Water Quality and HydrologyMay Wu, Mi-Ae Ha Part III: Data, Modeling and Uncertainties 10 Uncertainty in Estimates of Bioenergy-induced Land-use Change: The Impact of Inconsistent Land-cover DatasetsNagendra Singh, Keith Kline, Rebecca Efroymson, Budhendra Bhaduri, Bridget O’Banion 11 Challenges in Quantifying and Regulating Indirect Emissions of BiofuelsDeepak Rajagopal 12 Biofuels, Land Use Change, and the Limits of Life Cycle AnalysisRichard. J. Plevin 13 Lost Momentum of Biofuels: What Went Wrong?Govinda Timilsina

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe aim of this new book series (Diatoms: Biology and Applications) is to provide a comprehensive and reliable source of information on diatom biology and applications. The first book of the series, Diatoms Fundamentals & Applications, is wide ranging, starting with the contributions of amateurs and the beauty of diatoms, to details of how their shells are made, how they bend light to their advantage and ours, and major aspects of their biochemistry (photosynthesis and iron metabolism). The book then delves into the ecology of diatoms living in a wide range of habitats, and look at those few that can kill or harm us. The book concludes with a wide range of applications of diatoms, in forensics, manufacturing, medicine, biofuel and agriculture. The contributors are leading international experts on diatoms. This book is for a wide audience researchers, academics, students, and teachers of biology and related disciplines, written to both act as an introduction to diatoms and to Table of ContentsForeword xvii Preface xxiii 1 A Memorial to Frithjof Sterrenburg: The Importance of the Amateur Diatomist 1 Janice L. Pappas 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Background and Interests 3 1.3 The Personality of an Amateur Diatomist 7 1.4 The Amateur Diatomist and the Importance of Collections 11 1.5 The Amateur Diatomist as Expert in the Tools of the Trade 12 1.6 The Amateur Diatomist as Peer-Reviewed Scientific Contributor 15 1.7 Concluding Remarks 20 Acknowledgments 21 References 21 2 Alex Altenbach – In Memoriam of a Friend 29 Wladyslaw Altermann References 31 3 The Beauty of Diatoms 33 Mary Ann Tiffany and Stephen S. Nagy 3.1 Early History of Observations of Diatoms 33 3.2 Live Diatoms 35 3.3 Shapes and Structures 35 3.4 Diatom Beauty at Various Scales 36 3.5 Valves During Morphogenesis 37 3.6 Jamin-Lebedeff Interference Contrast Microscopy 39 3.7 Conclusion 40 Acknowledgments 40 References 41 4 Current Diatom Research in China 43 Yu Xin Zhang 4.1 Diatoms for Energy Conversion and Storage 43 4.1.1 Introduction 43 4.1.2 Diatom Silica: Structure, Properties and Their Optimization 46 4.1.3 Diatoms for Lithium Ion Battery Materials 48 4.1.4 Diatoms for Energy Storage: Supercapacitors 51 4.1.5 Diatoms for Solar Cells 56 4.1.6 Diatoms for Hydrogen Storage 58 4.1.7 Diatoms for Thermal Energy Storage 59 4.2 Diatoms for Water Treatment 61 4.2.1 Support for Preparation of Diatomite-Based Adsorption Composites 61 4.2.2 Catalyst and Template for Preparation of Porous Carbon Materials 63 4.2.3 Modification of Surface and Porous Structure 66 4.2.4 Support for Preparation of Diatomite-Based Metal Oxide Composites 75 4.3 Study of Tribological Performances of Compound Dimples Based on Diatoms Shell Structures 86 References 88 5 Cellular Mechanisms of Diatom Valve Morphogenesis 99 Yekaterina D. Bedoshvili and Yelena V. Likhoshway 5.1 Introduction 99 5.2 Valve Symmetry 100 5.3 Valve Silification Order 102 5.4 Silica Within SDV 103 5.5 Macromorphogenesis Control 104 5.6 Cytoskeletal Control of Morphogenesis 106 5.7 The Role of Vesicles in Morphogenesis 107 5.8 Valve Exocytosis and the SDV Origin 108 5.9 Conclusion 110 References 110 6 Application of Focused Ion Beam Technique in Taxonomy-Oriented Research on Ultrastructure of Diatoms 115 Andrzej Witkowski, Tomasz Płociński, Justyna Grzonka, Izabela Zgłobicka, Małgorzata Bąk, Przemysław Dąbek, Ana I. Gomes and Krzysztof J. Kurzydłowski 6.1 Introduction 116 6.2 Material and Methods 117 6.3 Results 117 6.3.1 Complex Stria Ultrastructure 117 6.3.1.1 Biremis lucens (Hustedt) Sabbe, Witkowski & Vyverman 1995 117 6.3.1.2 Olifantiella mascarenica Riaux-Gobin & Compere 2009 120 6.4 Discussion 123 6.4.1 Cultured Versus Wild Specimens 124 6.5 Conclusions 124 Acknowledgements 126 References 126 7 On Light and Diatoms: A Photonics and Photobiology Review 129Mohamed M. Ghobara, Nirmal Mazumder, Vandana Vinayak, Louisa Reissig, Ille C. Gebeshuber, Mary Ann Tiffany and Richard Gordon 7.1 Introduction 130 7.2 The Unique Multiscale Structure of the Diatom Frustules 130 7.3 Optical Properties of Diatom Frustules 139 7.3.1 The Frustule as a Box with Photonic Crystal Walls 143 7.3.2 Light Focusing Phenomenon 146 7.3.3 Photoluminescence Properties 151 7.3.4 Probable Roles of the Frustule in Diatom Photobiology 152 7.4 Diatom Photobiology 153 7.4.1 Underwater Light Field 153 7.4.2 Cell Cycle Light Regulation 154 7.4.3 The Phototactic Phenomenon in Pennates 154 7.4.4 Chloroplast Migration (Karyostrophy) 156 7.4.5 Blue Light and Its Effects on Microtubules of Cells 157 7.4.6 Strategies for Photoregulation Under High Light Intensity 159 7.4.7 Strategies for Photoregulation Under Ultraviolet Radiation (UV) Exposure 159 7.4.8 Diatoms and Low Light 160 7.4.9 Diatoms and No Light 161 7.4.10 Light Piping and Cellular Vision 161 7.5 Diatom and Light Applications 162 7.5.1 In Photocatalysis 162 7.5.2 Bio-Based UV Filters 164 7.5.3 In Solar Cells 165 7.5.4 Applications Based on Luminescence Properties 167 7.5.5 Cloaking Diatoms 167 7.6 Conclusion 169 Acknowledgement 169 Glossary 169 References 171 8 Photosynthesis in Diatoms 191 Matteo Scarsini, Justine Marchand, Kalina M. Manoylov and Benoît Schoefs 8.1 Introduction 191 8.2 The Chloroplast Structure Reflects the Two Steps Endosymbiosis 194 8.3 Photosynthetic Pigments 196 8.3.1 Chlorophylls 196 8.3.2 Carotenoids 197 8.4 The Organization of the Photosynthetic Apparatus 197 8.5 Non-Photochemical Quenching (NPQ) 200 8.6 Carbon Uptake and Fixation 202 8.7 Conclusions and Perspectives 204 Acknowledgment 205 References 205 9 Iron in Diatoms 213 John A. Raven 9.1 Introduction 213 9.2 Fe Acquisition by Diatoms 214 9.3 Fe-Containing Proteins in Diatoms and Economy of Fe Use 214 9.4 Iron Storage 219 9.5 Conclusions and Prospects 220 Acknowledgements 220 References 220 10 Diatom Symbioses with Other Photoauthotroph 225 Rosalina Stancheva and Rex Lowe 10.1 Introduction 225 10.2 Diatoms with a N2-Fixing Coccoid Cyanobacterial Endosymbiont 226 10.3 Diatoms with N2-Fixing Filamentous Heterocytous Cyanobacterial Endosymbionts 233 10.4 Epiphytic, Endogloeic and Endophytic Diatoms 235 10.5 Diatom Endosymbionts in Dinoflagellates 238 Acknowledgements 239 References 239 11 Diatom Sexual Reproduction and Life Cycles 245 Aloisie Poulíčková and David G. Mann 11.1 Introduction 245 11.2 Centric Diatoms 247 11.2.1 Life Cycle and Reproduction 247 11.2.2 Gametogenesis and Gamete Structure 250 11.2.3 Spawning 251 11.3 Pennate Diatom Life Cycles and Reproduction 252 11.4 Auxospore Development and Structure 257 11.4.1 Incunabula 259 11.4.2 Perizonium 260 11.5 Induction of Sexual Reproduction 261 Acknowledgments 262 References 263 12 Ecophysiology, Cell Biology and Ultrastructure of a Benthic Diatom Isolated in the Arctic 273 Ulf Karsten, Rhena Schumann and Andreas Holzinger 12.1 Introduction 274 12.2 Environmental Settings in the Arctic 274 12.3 Growth as Function of Temperature 275 12.4 Growth After Long-Term Dark Incubation 277 12.5 Cell Biological Traits After Long-Term Dark Incubation 279 12.6 Ultrastructural Traits 282 12.7 Conclusions 283 Acknowledgements 284 References 284 13 Ecology of Freshwater Diatoms – Current Trends and Applications 289 Aloisie Poulíčková and Kalina Manoylov 13.1 Introduction 289 13.2 Diatom Distribution 292 13.3 Diatom Dispersal Ability 292 13.4 Functional Classification in Diatom Ecology 294 13.5 Spatial Ecology and Metacommunities 296 13.6 Aquatic Ecosystems Biomonitoring 299 13.7 Conclusions 301 References 301 14 Diatoms from Hot Springs of the Kamchatka Peninsula (Russia) 311 Tatiana V. Nikulina, E. G. Kalitina, N. A. Kharitonova, G. A. Chelnokov, Elena A. Vakh and O. V. Grishchenko 14.1 Introduction 311 14.2 Materials and Methods 313 14.3 Description of Sampling Sites 313 14.3.1 Malkinsky Geothermal Field 314 14.3.2 Nachikinsky Geothermal Field 317 14.3.3 Verkhnaya-Paratunka Geothermal Field 317 14.3.3.1 Goryachaya Sopka Hot Spring 318 14.3.3.2 Karimshinsky Hot Spring 318 14.3.4 Mutnovsky Geothermal Field 318 14.3.4.1 Dachny Hot Springs 319 14.3.4.2 Verkhne-Vilyuchinsky Hot Spring 319 14.4 Results 320 14.4.1 Malkinsky Geothermal Field 320 14.4.2 Nachikinsky Geothermal Field 320 14.4.3 Verkhnaya-Paratunka Geothermal Field 326 14.4.3.1 Goryachaya Sopka Hot Spring 326 14.4.3.2 Karimshinsky Hot Spring 326 14.4.4 Mutnovsky Geothermal Field 326 14.4.4.1 Dachny Hot Springs 326 14.4.4.2 Verkhne-Vilyuchinsky Hot Spring 327 14.5 Summary 330 References 331 15 Biodiversity of High Mountain Lakes in Europe with Special Regards to Rila Mountains (Bulgaria) and Tatra Mountains (Poland) 335 Nadja Ognjanova-Rumenova, Agata Z. Wojtal, Elwira Sienkiewicz, Ivan Botev and Teodora Trichkova 15.1 Introduction 335 15.1.1 Factors Which Control the Diatom Distribution 336 15.1.2 Biodiversity Assessment 337 15.2 Recent Datom Biodiversity in High Mountain Lakes in bulgaria and Poland 338 15.2.1 The Rila Lakes, Bulgaria 338 15.2.2 The Tatra Lakes, Poland 339 15.3 Diatom Community Changes in High-Mountain Lakes in Bulgaria and Poland from Pre-Industrial Times to Present Day 340 15.3.1 The Rila Mts. 340 15.3.2 Tatra Mts. 342 15.4 Monitoring Data ‘2015’ and Correlations Between the Data Sets of the Rila Mts. and the Tatra Mts. 344 15.4.1 The Rila Lakes 344 15.4.2 The Tatra Lakes 346 15.5 Red-List Data: Cirque “Sedemte Ezera”, Rila Mts. and Tatra Mts. 349 15.5.1 Cirque “Sedemte Ezera”, Rila Mts. 349 15.5.2 Tatra Mts. 349 15.6 Summary 349 Acknowledgements 351 References 351 16 Diatoms of the Southern Part of the Russian Far East 355 Tatiana V. Nikulina and Lubov A. Medvedeva 16.1 History of the Study of Freshwater Algae of the Southern Part of the Russian Far East 355 16.1.1 The Primorye Territory 357 16.1.1.1 Lakes and Reservoirs 357 16.1.1.2 Rivers and Streams 358 16.1.2 The Amur Region 360 16.1.2.1 The Upper Amur 360 16.1.2.2 The Middle Amur 360 16.1.3 The Jewish Autonomous Region 361 16.1.4 The Khabarovsk Territory 361 16.1.4.1 The Middle Amur 361 16.1.4.2 The Lower Amur 361 16.1.5 The Sakhalin Region 362 16.1.5.1 Sakhalin Island 362 16.1.5.2 Moneron Island 363 16.1.5.3 The Kuril Islands 363 16.2 Diatom Flora of the Southern Part of the Russian Far East 363 References 377 17 Toxic and Harmful Marine Diatoms 389 Stephen S. Bates, Nina Lundholm, Katherine A. Hubbard, Marina Montresor and Chui Pin Leaw 17.1 Introduction 390 17.2 Harmful Diatoms 391 17.2.1 How Diatoms May Cause Harm 391 17.2.2 Diatom Oxylipins 391 17.2.2.1 Polyunsaturated Aldehydes (PUAs) 391 17.2.2.2 Oxylipin Production by Pseudo-nitzschia 396 17.3 Toxic Diatoms 397 17.3.1 Diatoms That Produce Β-N-Methylamino-L-Alanine (BMAA) 397 17.3.2 Nitzschia navis-varingica 400 17.3.3 Nitzschia bizertensis 400 17.3.4 Pseudo-nitzschia spp 401 17.3.4.1 New Species 401 17.3.4.2 Distribution 401 17.3.4.3 Sexual Reproduction 401 17.3.4.4 Genomic Insights Into Pseudo-nitzschia and Its Population Genetic Structure 410 17.3.4.5 New Knowledge of Pseudo-nitzschia 411 17.3.5 Identification of Toxic Diatoms 414 17.3.5.1 Classical Methods 414 17.3.5.2 Molecular Approaches 415 17.4 Gaps in Knowledge and Thoughts for Future Directions 417 References 418 18 Diatoms in Forensics: A Molecular Approach to Diatom Testing in Forensic Science 435 Vandana Vinayak and S. Gautam 18.1 Introduction 435 18.2 Postmortem Forensic Counter Measures 438 18.3 Differences in Drowned Victims vs Those that Die of Other Causes 439 18.4 Techniques to Identify Diatoms in Biological Sample 440 18.4.1 Morphological Analysis of Water Samples 441 18.4.2 Role of Site Specific Diatoms 442 18.5 Case Studies 443 18.5.1 Case 1 443 18.5.2 Case 2 443 18.5.3 Case 3 444 18.6 Identification of Diatom Using Molecular Tools in Tissue and Water Samples 446 18.7 Differentiation of Diatom DNA in the Tissue of a Drowned Victim 447 18.8 Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR) 448 18.9 Diatom DNA Extraction from Biological Samples of a Drowned Victim 448 18.9.1 Biological Samples 448 18.9.2 Plankton/Diatom Isolation from Tissues Using Colloidal Silica Gradient and Phenol Chloroform Method for DNA Extraction 454 18.10 Best Barcode Markers for Diatoms to Diagnose Drowning 454 18.10.1 Cytochrome C Oxidase Subunit 1 (COI) 455 18.10.2 Nuclear rDNA ITS Region 456 18.10.3 Nuclear Small Subunit rRNA Gene 457 18.11 DNA Sequencing 457 18.12 Advancement in Sequencing Leads to Advancement of Data Interpretation 458 18.13 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 459 Acknowledgements 459 List of Abbreviations Used 460 References 460 19 Diatomite in Use: Nature, Modifications, Commercial Applications and Prospective Trends 471 Mohamed M. Ghobara and Asmaa Mohamed 19.1 The Nature of Diatomite 471 19.1.1 Diatomite Formation 472 19.1.2 Diatom Frustule’s Resistance Against Dissolution (The Reason for Their Preservation Over Millions of Years) 473 19.2 The History of Discovery and Ancient Applications 475 19.3 Diatomite Occurrence and Distribution 476 19.4 Diatomite Mining and Processing 477 19.5 Diatomite Characterization 479 19.6 Diatom Frustules Modifications 480 19.7 Diatomite in Use 481 19.7.1 Diatomite-Based Filtration 482 19.7.1.1 Water Filtration 483 19.7.1.2 Beer Filtration 484 19.7.1.3 Recent Trends in Diatomite-Based Separation Techniques 485 19.7.1.4 Reuse of Spent DE Filter Media 485 19.7.2 Diatomite for Thermal Insulation 485 19.7.3 Diatomite-Based Building Materials 487 19.7.4 Diatomaceous Earth as an Insecticide 488 19.7.5 Diatomaceous Earth as a soil amendment 488 19.7.6 Diatomaceous Earth as a Filler 489 19.7.7 Diatomaceous Earth as Abrasive Material 490 19.7.8 Diatomaceous Earth as Animals’ and Human’s Food Additives 490 19.7.9 Diatomaceous Earth and Nanotechnology 491 19.7.9.1 Diatomaceous Earth in Solar Energy Harvesting Systems 491 19.7.9.2 Diatomaceous Earth-Based Superhydrophobic Surfaces 491 19.7.9.3 Diatomaceous Earth Composites as Catalysts 492 19.7.9.4 Diatomaceous Earth-Based Supercapacitors 492 19.7.9.5 Diatomaceous Earth-Based Pharmaceutical and Biomedical Applications 492 19.7.9.6 Diatomaceous Earth-Based Lab-on-a-Chip 494 19.7.10 Non-Industrial Applications 494 19.8 Diatomite Fabrication and Future Aspects 495 19.9 Conclusion 495 Acknowledgements 496 References 496 20 Diatom Silica for Biomedical Applications 511 Shaheer Maher, Moom Sin Aw and Dusan Losic 20.1 Introduction 511 20.2 Diatoms: Natural Silica Microcapsules for Therapeutics Delivery 513 20.2.1 Structure 513 20.2.2 Surface Modification of Diatoms 514 20.2.3 Diatoms Applications as Drug Carriers 516 20.2.4 Diatoms as a Source of Biodegradable Carriers for Drug Delivery Applications 522 20.2.4.1 Diatoms as a Source of Biodegradable Silicon Micro and Nano Carriers for Drug Delivery 525 20.2.5 Diatom Silica for Other Biomedical Applications 527 20.2.5.1 Tissue Engineering 527 20.2.5.2 Haemorrhage Control 528 20.3 Conclusions 530 Acknowledgements 531 References 531 21 Diafuel™(Diatom Biofuel) vs Electric Vehicles, a Basic Comparison: A High Potential Renewable Energy Source to Make India Energy Independent 537 Vandana Vinayak, Khashti Ballabh Joshi and Priyangshu Manab Sarma 21.1 Introduction 538 21.2 Debate on Relation of Green House Gas Emissions (GHG) with CO2 and Temperature 539 21.3 Outcomes of Paris Agreement 2015 541 21.4 Energy Demands for India 542 21.5 Critics Talking About Entry of EV in Market 545 21.6 Comparison Between Electric Vehicles vs Vehicles with Diafuel™ at Large 546 21.6.1 Electric Vehicles 546 21.6.1.1 Status of EV in India 548 21.6.1.2 Predicted Impact of EV on Global and Indian Network Versus Their Energy Sources 549 21.6.2 Diafuel™ 550 21.6.2.1 Diafuel™ Industrial Production 552 21.6.2.2 Designing an Energy Self-Sufficient Indian House Producing Diafuel™ 554 21.6.2.3 Working Prototype of Diatom Panels for the Indian House 555 21.6.2.4 Advantages of Diafuel™ 556 21.7 Source for Generation of Electricity to Drive EVs 557 21.7.1 Resources with Zero Carbon Emission 558 21.7.1.1 Nuclear Power 559 21.7.1.2 Solar Energy for Faster Adoption and Manufacturing of Electric & Hybrid Vehicles in India 559 21.7.1.3 Wind Power 560 21.7.1.4 Barriers for Wind and Solar Energy 561 21.8 CO2 Emissions by Electric Vehicle vs Gasoline Driven Vehicles 562 21.9 Depletion of Earth Metals to Run EV’s vs Abundant Resources for Diafuel™ 564 21.9.1 Can Diafuel™ be the Answer 566 21.9.2 Harvesting Diafuel™ from Diatoms 566 21.10 Current Status 567 21.10.1 Data Analysis and Comparison Between EV and Diafuel™ 569 21.11 Conclusions 569 Acknowledgement 574 List of Abbreviations Used 574 References 574 22 Bubble Farming: Scalable Microcosms for Diatom Biofuel and the Next Green Revolution 583 Richard Gordon, Clifford R Merz, Shawn Gurke and Benoît Schoefs 22.1 Introduction 584 22.1.1 The Bubble Farming Concept 588 22.1.2 Bubble Injection, Sampling, Harvesting and Sealing, Maybe by Drones 592 22.1.3 Approach 594 22.2 Mechanical Properties 594 22.2.1 Optimal Bubble Size 596 22.3 Optical Properties 597 22.4 Surface Properties 599 22.4.1 Gas Exchange Properties 599 22.5 Toxicity Restrictions 609 22.5.1 Algal Oil Droplet Properties 611 22.6 Biofilms 611 22.7 Bacterial Symbionts 612 22.7.1 Soil as a Source of CO2 613 22.8 Demand 614 22.8.1 The Choice of Diatoms vs Other Algae 614 22.9 Exponential Growth vs Stationary Phase 617 22.10 Carbon Recycling 619 22.11 Packaging 619 22.11.1 Crop Choice by Farmers 620 22.11.2 Bubble Farming vs Photobioreactors and Raceways 620 22.12 Summary 620 Acknowledgements 626 References 626 Index 655

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive review of the impact of dietary nutraceuticals on platelet function and its relationship to cardiovascular disease Nutraceuticals and Human Blood Platelet Function offers a summary of the most current evidence on the effects of anti-platelet factors isolated mainly from food and natural sources, their structure function relationship, bioavailability, mechanisms of actions, and also information on human trials data. The authora noted expert in the field explores platelet function and their roles in development of CVD, functional foods and bioactive compounds in CVD risk factors. The author highlights platelets, their mechanisms of actions, data from epidemiological studies, structure-function relationship clinical trial data, ex vivo and in vitro data. This important resource will focus primarily on human studies and emphasize functional and physiological implications of the nutritional impact on platelet function and CVD that could Table of Contents1 Human Blood Platelets and Their Role in the Development of Cardiovascular Disease 1 Abbreviations Used in This Chapter 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Human Blood Platelets: Structure and Function 4 1.3 Platelet Activation Pathways 10 1.4 Platelets and Vessel Wall Interactions 12 1.5 Roles of Platelets in Atherosclerosis and Inflammatory Processes 13 1.6 Platelets and Their Role in the Development of Cardiovascular Disease 17 1.7 Conclusions 22 References 22 2 Epidemiology of Cardiovascular Disease 29 Abbreviations Used in This Chapter 29 2.1 Introduction 29 2.2 Dietary Lipids and Cardiovascular Disease 32 2.3 Environmental Factors and Cardiovascular Disease 34 2.4 Genetic Basis of Cardiovascular Disease Incidence 35 2.5 Fruits and Vegetables Consumption and Cardiovascular Disease Risk Reduction 37 2.6 Conclusions 40 References 40 3 n‐3 Fatty Acids and Human Platelets 47 Abbreviations Used in This Chapter 47 3.1 Introduction 47 3.2 Epidemiology of n‐3 Fatty Acids Intake and Cardiovascular Disease 51 3.3 n‐3 Fatty Acids and Platelet Function 52 3.4 Platelet Function and Eicosanoids 56 3.5 Clinical Trials with n‐3 Fatty Acids 59 3.6 Dietary Recommendation and Sources of n‐3 Fatty Acids 61 3.7 Conclusions 62 References 62 4 Effects of Garlic, Onion, Ginger, and Turmeric on Platelet Function 69 Abbreviations 69 4.1 Introduction 69 4.2 Effects of Garlic (Allium Sativum) on Platelet Function 71 4.3 Effects of Onion (Allium Cepa L.) on Platelet Function 74 4.4 Effects of Ginger (Zingiber Officinale) on Platelet Function 75 4.5 Effects of Turmeric (Curcuma Longa) on Platelets 76 4.6 Conclusions 78 References 79 5 Herbs and Platelet Function 83 Abbreviations Used in This Chapter 83 5.1 Introduction 83 5.2 In Vitro Platelet Aggregation Studies: Effects of Different Herb Extracts 87 5.2.1 Andrographis (Andrographis Paniculata) 89 5.2.2 Cranberry (Vaccinium Macrocarpon) 90 5.2.3 Feverfew (Tanacetum Parthenium) 90 5.2.4 Green Tea (Camellia Sinensis) 91 5.2.5 Hawthorn (Crataegus Oxyacantha) 92 5.2.6 Horse Chestnut (Aesculus Hippocastanum) 92 5.2.7 Motherwort (Leonurus Japonicus) 93 5.2.8 St John’s Wort (Hypericum Perforatum) 93 5.2.9 Willow Bark (Salix Alba) 94 5.3 Effects of Herbs on Signaling Molecules in Human Platelets 95 5.4 Conclusions 97 References 98 6 Tomato Extract and Human Platelet Functions 101 Abbreviations Used in This Chapter 101 6.1 Introduction 101 6.2 Epidemiology of Tomato Consumption and Cardiovascular Disease Risk Reduction 104 6.3 In Vitro Studies with Water‐Soluble Tomato Extract on Human Blood Platelet Aggregation 105 6.4 Fruitflow®: Compositional and Structural Aspects 111 6.5 Human Trials 112 6.6 Comparing the Dietary Anti‐Platelet Fruitflow® with the Anti‐Platelet Drug Aspirin 115 6.8 EFSA Approval of Fruitflow® 117 6.8 Conclusions 117 References 118 7 Dietary Nitrates and Their Anti‐Platelet Effects 125 Abbreviations Used in This Chapter 125 7.1 Introduction 125 7.2 Nitrate and Cardiovascular Health 129 7.3 Effects of Nitrates on Human Blood Platelet Function In Vitro 131 7.4 Clinical Studies with Dietary Nitrate: Effects on Ex Vivo Platelet Function 133 7.5 Conclusions 134 References 135 8 Kiwifruit and Human Platelet Function 139 Abbreviations Used in This Chapter 139 8.1 Introduction 139 8.2 Kiwifruit and Its Bioactive Phytochemicals 140 8.3 Kiwifruits and Human Blood Platelet Function 141 8.4 Human Trials Using Kiwifruit and Kiwifruit Extract 147 8.5 Conclusions 150 References 151 9 Polyphenols and Human Platelets 155 Abbreviations Used in This Chapter 155 9.1 Introduction 155 9.2 Polyphenols: Structure and Activity 157 9.3 Sources of Polyphenols 159 9.4 Dietary Intakes and Bioavailability of Polyphenols 160 9.5 Roles of Polyphenols in Platelet Function 161 9.6 Conclusions 167 References 168 10 Effects of Ginkgo Biloba, Ginseng, Green Tea, and Dark Chocolate on Human Blood Platelet Function 171 Abbreviations Used in This Chapter 171 10.1 Introduction 171 10.2 Ginkgo Biloba Extract and Platelet Function 172 10.3 Clinical Trial with EGB761 175 10.4 Ginseng and Platelet Function 177 10.5 Green Tea (Camellia Sinensis) and its Effects on Platelet Function 181 10.6 Dark Chocolate and Platelet Function 183 10.7 Conclusions 185 References 187 11 Plant Alkaloids and Platelet Function 191 Abbreviations Used in This Chapter 191 11.1 Introduction 191 11.2 Alkaloids as Anti‐Platelet Agents 193 11.3 Mechanism of Actions of Alkaloids 197 11.4 Conclusions 198 References 199 12 Strawberries and Human Platelet Function 203 Abbreviations Used in This Chapter 203 12.1 Introduction 203 12.2 Polyphenols in Strawberries 204 12.3 Strawberry and its Cardio‐Protective Effects 206 12.4 Anti‐Platelet Factors in Strawberry 207 12.5 Discussion 209 References 211 13 Effects of Metal Ions on Platelet Function 215 Abbreviations Used in This Chapter 215 13.1 Introduction 215 13.2 Zinc and Human Blood Platelet Function 216 13.3 Calcium and its Regulation of Platelet Function 218 13.4 Chromium and Platelet Function 221 13.5 Iron (Fe) and Platelet Function 221 13.6 Magnesium and Platelet Function 222 13.7 Platelet Function and Selenium 223 13.8 Conclusions 225 References 226 14 Individual Compounds with Anti‐Platelet Activity Isolated from Plant Sources 231 Abbreviations Used in This Chapter 231 14.1 Introduction 231 14.2 Effects of Taurine and Glycine on Human Platelets 233 14.3 Anthocyanins and Human Platelets 234 14.4 Coumarins and Their Anti‐Platelet Effects 235 14.5 Atractylenolides and Their Anti‐Platelet Effects 236 14.6 Flavonolignans and Blood Platelet Function 238 14.7 Protocatechuic Acid on Human Platelet Aggregation 238 14.8 KOK and Platelet Function 240 14.9 Inhibitors of Platelet Granules Secretion 241 14.10 Hydroxychavicol and Platelet Function 243 14.11 Compounds Isolated from Guttiferae Species with Anti‐Platelet Activity 243 14.12 Conclusions 244 References 244 Index 247

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn updated guide to the production, science, and uses of vanilla Vanilla is a flavor and fragrance in foods, cosmetics, pharmaceuticals, and a wealth of other products. Now in its second edition, theHandbook of Vanilla Science and Technologyprovides a comprehensive and updated review of the science and technology used in these items' production and supply. Featuring contributions from an international range of experts, this revised edition covers a multitude of topics, including agricultural production, global markets, analytical methods, sensory analysis, food and fragrance applications, organic farming and fair trade, botanical diseases, and novel uses. The Handbook of Vanilla Science and Technology, Second Edition is a vital resource for producers, distributors, and scientists involved in vanilla's growth and utilization, and offers readers: A guide to the cultivation, extraction, analysis, DNA sequencing, and marketinTable of ContentsList of Contributors xix Preface xxiii Part I Production of Vanilla – Agricultural Systems and Curing 1 1 Mexican Vanilla Production 3Juan Hernandez‐Hernández 1.1 Introduction 3 1.1.1 The Mexican Vanilla Legend 4 1.2 Cultivation Methods 5 1.2.1 “Traditional”/Acahual 5 1.2.2 Intensive System (Monoculture) 6 1.2.3 Vanilla Cultivation in Existing Orange Groves 6 1.2.4 Shade Houses 7 1.3 Vanilla Propagation Techniques 8 1.3.1 Preparation and Disinfection of Cuttings 8 1.3.2 Establishing Cuttings – Timing 8 1.3.3 Establishing Cuttings – Planting 9 1.3.4 New Bud Formation and Root Growth 9 1.4 Irrigation 9 1.5 Nutrition 10 1.5.1 Mulch 10 1.5.2 Building Compost 10 1.6 Weed Control 11 1.7 Shade Management (Pruning of Support Trees) 11 1.8 Shoot Management – Looping 12 1.9 Shoot Management – Rooting 12 1.10 Main Vanilla Insect Pest 12 1.11 Main Vanilla Diseases 13 1.11.1 Anthracnose 14 1.11.2 Rust 14 1.11.3 Yellowing and Pre‐mature Fruit Drop 14 1.12 Flowering and Pollination 14 1.12.1 Percent of Flowering Plants 15 1.12.2 Natural Pollination 15 1.12.3 Hand Pollination 15 1.12.4 Quantity of Flowers to be Pollinated 17 1.12.5 Fruit Development 17 1.13 Harvesting 17 1.13.1 Harvesting Practices 18 1.13.2 Preventing Theft 18 1.14 Green Vanilla Commercialization 19 1.14.1 Prices 19 1.15 Curing 19 1.15.1 Yield Ratio of Green/Cured Vanilla 21 1.16 Grading 21 1.16.1 Packing 22 1.17 Buyers 23 1.18 Export Volume 23 1.19 Prices 23 1.20 Aromatic Profile 23 1.21 Summary 24 References 24 2 Vanilla Diseases 27Juan Hernandez‐Hernández 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Root and Stem Rot (Fusarium oxysporum f. Sp. Vanillae) 27 2.2.1 Description 27 2.2.2 Damage 28 2.2.3 Control 28 2.3 Black Rot (Phytophtora Sp.) 29 2.3.1 Description 29 2.3.2 Damage 29 2.3.3 Control 29 2.4 Anthracnose (Colletotrichum Sp.) 30 2.4.1 Description 30 2.4.2 Damage 31 2.4.3 Control 31 2.5 Rust (Uromyces Sp.) 31 2.5.1 Description 31 2.5.2 Damage 2.5.3 Control 32 2.6 Rotting of Recently Planted Cuttings 32 2.6.1 Description 32 2.6.2 Damage 32 2.6.3 Control 33 2.7 Yellowing and Shedding of Young Fruits 33 2.7.1 Description 33 2.7.2 Damage 34 2.7.3 Control 34 2.8 Viral Diseases 35 2.8.1 Cymbidium Mosaic Virus (CYMV) 35 2.8.2 Vanilla Mosaic Virus (VMV) 35 2.8.3 Vanilla Necrosis Potyvirus (VNPV) 35 2.8.4 Odontoglossum Ringspot Virus (ORSV) 35 2.8.5 Prevention of Viral Diseases 36 2.9 Damage by Adverse Climatic Factors 36 2.9.1 Natural Pruning of the Apical Buds 36 2.9.1.1 Description 36 2.9.1.2 Damage 37 2.9.1.3 Control 37 2.10 Damage from Sunburn 37 2.10.1 Description 37 2.10.2 Damage 37 2.10.3 Control 38 2.11 Hurricanes 38 References 39 3 Vanilla Production in Costa Rica 41Elida Varela Quirós 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 History of Vanilla Production in Costa Rica 42 3.2.1 The First Phase of Large‐scale Cultivation in Costa Rica 42 3.2.2 The Second Phase of Vanilla Cultivation in Costa Rica 42 3.2.3 The Third Phase 43 3.3 Vanilla Production – The Traditional System 45 3.4 Vanilla Production – The Intensive System 47 3.5 Propagation 48 3.6 Diseases and Pests 49 3.7 Vanilla Bean Processing 50 3.8 Conclusions 50 References 51 4 Atypical Flowering of Vanilla planifolia in the Region of Junín, Peru 53Juan Hernández-Hernández 4.1 Preparation of the “Mother” Plant (Cuttings) 54 4.2 Planting Method 54 4.2.1 Weed Control 55 4.2.2 Shoot Management – Looping 55 4.2.3 Shoot Management – Rooting 55 4.3 Nutrition 55 4.4 Irrigation 55 4.5 Pests, Disorders, and Diseases 57 4.5.1 Vanilla Pest 57 4.5.2 Diseases 57 4.5.3 Intense Solar Radiation 57 4.5.4 New Pest 57 4.5.5 New Disease 58 4.6 Flowering Period 59 4.6.1 Atypical Vanilla Bloom in Peru 59 4.7 Hand Pollination 60 4.8 Harvesting 61 4.9 Vanilla Curing 62 4.10 Final Comments 62 References 63 5 Vanilla Production in the Context of Culture, Economics, and Ecology of Belize 65Nelle Gretzinger and Dawn Dean 5.1 Introduction 65 5.1.1 Toledo Agriculture and Socio‐demographics Today 66 5.1.2 Maya Mountain Research Farm 66 5.1.3 Agro‐ecological Systems 67 5.1.4 Maya Mountain Research Farm Vanilla Cultivation and Introduction Project 68 5.1.5 The Belize Organic Vanilla Association 69 5.1.6 OVA Description and Goals 69 5.1.7 Innovative Vanilla Plantation Establishment Method Pioneered by OVA Members Nicasio and Ophelia Chee Sanchez 71 5.1.8 Wild/Relic Vanilla Stands in Toledo District 72 5.1.9 Possibility of Wild Superior or Useful Genotypes/Species 74 5.1.10 Dr Pesach Lubinsky’s Research in Belize and Regarding Vanilla tahitensis 74 5.1.11 Manche Chol 76 5.2 Discussion 78 Acknowledgments 79 References 82 6 Conservation and Sustainable Use of Vanilla Crop Wild Relatives in Colombia 85Nicola S. Flanagan, Paul Chavarriaga, and Ana Teresa Mosquera‐Espinosa 6.1 Introduction 85 6.1.1 Low Genetic Diversity in the Vanilla Crop 85 6.1.2 The Importance of Crop Wild Relatives for Agriculture 85 6.2 Vanilla Crop Wild Relatives 86 6.2.1 Phylogenetic Diversity Within the Genus Vanilla 86 6.2.2 The Secondary Gene Pool for Vanilla 86 6.2.3 Vanilla Diversity in Colombia 87 6.3 Vanilla Species in the Wild 89 6.3.1 Vanilla Species are Rare in the Wild 89 6.3.2 Reproductive Biology of Vanilla Wild Species 91 6.3.2.1 Pollinators 91 6.3.2.2 Autogamy 91 6.3.3 Mycorrhizal Interactions 92 6.3.4 Further Interactions with the Microbiome 93 6.3.5 Bioclimatic and Biophysical Adaptations 94 6.4 Conservation of Vanilla Crop Wild Relatives 95 6.4.1 Threats to Conservation 95 6.4.2 Conservation In situ 96 6.4.3 Conservation Ex situ 96 6.4.4 Conservation Ex situ of the Vanilla Microbiome 98 6.4.5 Conservation of Circa situm and Sustainable Use 98 6.5 Biotechnological Approaches for Vanilla Genetic Resource Conservation and Utilization 100 6.5.1 Characterization and Utilization of Genetic Diversity 100 6.5.1.1 DNA Barcoding 100 6.5.1.2 Genomic Characterization of Vanilla 100 6.5.2 Application of Microorganisms in Vanilla Cultivation 101 6.6 An Integrated Strategy for Conservation and Sustainable Use of Vanilla Crop Wild Relatives 101 6.6.1 A Colombian National Strategy for Vanilla CWR 101 6.6.2 International Strategy for Conservation of Vanilla CWR 102 References 102 7 The History of Vanilla in Puerto Rico: Diversity, Rise, Fall, and Future Prospects 111Paul Bayman 7.1 Introduction 111 7.2 Diversity of Wild Vanilla in Puerto Rico 111 7.2.1 Species and Distributions 111 7.2.2 Flowering, Pollination, and Fruit Set 112 7.3 Rise and Fall: The History of Vanilla Cultivation in Puerto Rico 112 7.4 Socioeconomic Factors Contributing to the Decline of Vanilla 114 7.5 Diseases and Decline 114 7.5.1 Fusarium Root and Stem Rot (RSR) 115 7.5.1.1 The Pathogen 115 7.5.1.2 Symptoms of RSR 116 7.5.1.3 Other Fusarium Species 116 7.5.2 Other Diseases and Pests 116 7.5.3 Possible Solutions to RSR 116 7.5.3.1 Biological Control 116 7.5.3.2 Mycorrhiza 117 7.5.3.3 Chemical Control 117 7.5.3.4 Breeding 117 7.5.3.5 Cultural Control 117 7.6 Future Prospects 118 Acknowledgments 118 References 118 8 Origins and Patterns of Vanilla Cultivation in Tropical America (1500–1900): No Support for an Independent Domestication of Vanilla in South America 121Pesach Lubinsky, Gustavo A. Romero‐González, Sylvia M. Heredia, and Stephanie Zabel 8.1 Introduction 121 8.1.1 I. Pre‐Cultivation, ca. 1500–1750s 127 8.1.2 II. Papantla Monopoly, 1760s–1840s 131 8.1.3 III. The Vanilla Revolution, 1850s–1900, “… and we’ve never looked back” 135 8.2 The Vanilla Necklace 136 8.3 Summary 138 Acknowledgments 139 References 139 9 Vanilla Production in Australia 147Richard Exley 9.1 Introduction 147 9.2 History 147 9.3 Species 148 9.4 Climatic Regions of Australia Suitable for Vanilla 148 9.5 Climatic Conditions in the Vanilla Growing Regions 149 9.6 Soil and Nutrients 150 9.7 Watering 150 9.8 Fertilizing 150 9.9 Propagation 150 9.10 Support 151 9.11 Light/Shade 152 9.12 Spacing 153 9.13 Training 154 9.14 Flowering, Fruit Set, Growth, and Maturation 154 9.14.1 Flowering 154 9.14.2 Fruit Set (Pollination) 154 9.14.3 Growth and Maturation 155 9.15 Harvesting 155 9.16 Curing 155 9.16.1 Overview 155 References 156 10 Vanilla in Dutch Greenhouses: A Discovery – From Research to Production 157Filip van Noort 10.1 Introduction 157 10.1.1 Start of Research 157 10.2 Review of Literature 157 10.3 Flowering 159 10.3.1 Greenhouse 160 10.3.2 Sustainability 160 10.4 Varieties 161 10.5 Propagation 161 10.5.1 Cultivation 161 10.5.2 Growing Systems 162 10.6 Feasibility and Conclusions 162 References 163 11 Establishing Vanilla Production and a Vanilla Breeding Program in the Southern United States 165Alan H. Chambers 11.1 Introduction 165 11.2 Southern Florida Climate 165 11.2.1 Average Temperatures 166 11.2.2 Average Rainfall 166 11.2.3 Average Solar Radiation 166 11.2.4 Major Weather Events 168 11.3 Native and Naturalized Vanilla Species of South Florida 169 11.3.1 V. dilloniana 169 11.3.2 V. mexicana 169 11.3.3 V. barbellata 169 11.3.4 V. phaeantha 169 11.3.5 V. planifolia 171 11.4 Establishing Vanilla Production in Southern Florida 173 11.4.1 Shade House Cultivation 173 11.4.2 Tutor Tree Cultivation 173 11.4.3 Substrate Considerations 174 11.4.4 Local Economics and Niche Opportunities 174 11.5 Vanilla Breeding 175 11.5.1 Establishing a Vanilla Breeding Program in the United States 175 11.5.2 Acquiring Diverse Vanilla Accessions 176 11.5.3 Creating Diversity in Vanilla 176 11.5.4 Identifying the Primary Gene Pool 177 11.5.5 Target Traits 177 11.5.6 A Case for a Publically Available Vanilla Genome 178 11.6 Conclusions 178 References 178 12 In vitro Propagation of Vanilla 181Rebeca Alicia Menchaca García 12.1 Methods 182 12.1.1 In vitro Germination 182 12.1.2 Tissue Culture 182 12.2 Results and Discussion 183 12.2.1 Germination 183 12.2.2 Seed Maturity 183 12.2.3 Time for Germination 183 12.2.4 Scarification 183 12.2.5 Tissue Culture 183 12.2.6 Hybridization 184 12.2.7 In vitro Germplasm Bank 185 12.2.8 Repatriation and Recovery of Mexican Species 185 12.2.9 Method of Ex vitro Adaptation 186 12.2.10 Greenhouse Collection 186 12.2.11 Social Linkage 186 12.2.12 Human Resource Training and International Interaction 187 12.3 Conclusions 187 References 188 13 Curing of Vanilla 191Chaim Frenkel, Arvind S. Ranadive, Javier Tochihuitl Vázquez, and Daphna Havkin‐Frenkel 13.1 Introduction 191 13.2 Botany of the Vanilla Pod 192 13.2.1 Two Fruit Regions 192 13.2.2 Fruit Components 192 13.2.3 Fruit Anatomy 193 13.2.4 Pollination Initiates Ovary and Fruit Development 193 13.2.5 Mature Fruit 194 13.3 On‐the‐vine Curing Process in a Vanilla Pod 195 13.4 Off‐the‐vine Curing Process of Vanilla Beans 196 13.4.1 Purpose of Curing 198 13.4.2 Traditional Methods of Curing 199 13.4.2.1 Killing 199 13.4.2.2 Sweating 200 13.4.2.3 Drying and Conditioning 201 13.5 Activity of Hydrolytic Enzymes Occurring in a Curing Vanilla Pod 202 13.5.1 Protease Activity 202 13.5.2 Cell Wall Hydrolyzing Enzymes 204 13.5.3 Glycosyl Hydrolases 204 13.6 Activity of Oxidative Enzymes Occurring in a Curing Vanilla Pod 209 13.7 Vanilla Products 212 13.8 Summary and Conclusions 212 13.9 Addendum: Commercial Curing Methods of Green Vanilla Bean 213 13.9.1 Traditional Methods 213 13.9.1.1 Mexican Curing Method 213 13.9.1.2 The Bourbon Curing Method 214 13.9.1.3 The Tahitian Curing Method 214 13.9.1.4 Other Traditional Curing Methods 214 13.9.1.5 Indonesian Curing of Vanilla Bean 215 13.9.2 Refinement of Traditional Curing Methods 215 13.9.3 Novel Curing Methods 215 References 216 14 Fair Trade – The Future of Vanilla? 223Richard J. Brownell Jr 14.1 The Crisis 223 14.2 The Farmer 224 14.3 Fast Forward 226 14.4 Fair Trade – Background 226 14.4.1 Fair Trade Principles 227 14.4.2 Vanilla and Fair Trade 228 14.5 Commodity Cycles 229 14.6 Issues 230 14.6.1 The Price Differential 230 14.6.2 Vanilla Quality 231 14.6.3 Limited Availability 231 14.6.4 Ensuring that Farmers are Paid the FT Price 232 14.6.5 Consumer Acceptance 232 14.7 Conclusions 233 14.7.1 Update 2017 – Fair Trade Vanilla: Today 233 14.7.2 Update 2017 – Fair Trade Vanilla: The Future 234 Part II Authentication and Flavor Analysis 237 15 Quality Control of Vanilla Beans and Extracts 239Arvind S. Ranadive 15.1 Introduction 239 15.2 Quality Control of Vanilla Beans 239 15.2.1 Grading of Vanilla Beans 240 15.2.1.1 Vanilla Grading in Mexico 241 15.2.1.2 Vanilla Grading in Madagascar 241 15.2.1.3 Vanilla Grading in Indonesia 241 15.2.1.4 Vanilla Grading in Uganda 241 15.2.1.5 Vanilla Grading in Tahiti 242 15.2.2 Aroma of Vanilla Beans 243 15.2.3 Moisture Content of Vanilla Beans 246 15.2.4 Vanillin Content 246 15.2.4.1 Vanilla Bean Extraction 247 15.2.4.2 Vanillin Determination 247 15.2.4.3 Vanillin Determination in Vanilla Extracts and Other Vanilla Products 248 15.2.4.4 HPLC Method 248 15.2.5 Microbial Contaminant Limits 249 15.3 Quality Control of Commercial Vanilla Products 249 15.3.1 Definition of Vanilla Products 249 15.3.1.1 Vanilla Extracts 249 15.3.1.2 Vanilla Flavoring 250 15.3.1.3 Vanilla‐Vanillin Extract and Flavoring 250 15.3.1.4 Concentrated Vanilla Extract and Flavoring 250 15.3.1.5 Vanilla Oleoresin 250 15.3.1.6 Vanilla Absolute 250 15.3.1.7 Vanilla Powder And Vanilla‐Vanillin Powder 251 15.3.1.8 Vanilla Tincture for Perfumery 251 15.3.2 Vanilla Extract Quality Parameters 251 15.3.2.1 Appearance: Color and Clarity 251 15.3.2.2 Flavor 251 15.3.2.3 Soluble Solids Content 252 15.3.2.4 Vanillin Content 252 15.3.2.5 Organic Acids – (Wichmann) Lead Number 253 15.3.2.6 Resin Content 253 15.3.2.7 Microbial Limits 253 15.4 Determination of Authenticity of Vanilla Extracts 254 15.4.1 Guidelines for Determination of Authenticity 254 15.4.1.1 Evaluation of the Ratios Between Specific Components 255 15.4.1.2 Isotope‐ratios Mass Spectrometry 255 15.4.1.3 Site‐specific Quantitative Deuterium NmR 255 15.4.2 Other Methods to Determine Authenticity 256 15.4.2.1 Stable Isotope Ratio Analysis (SIRA) 256 15.4.2.2 SNIF‐NMR Technique 258 15.5 Summary 259 Acknowledgment 259 References 259 16 Flavor, Quality, and Authentication 261Patrick G. Hoffman and Charles M. Zapf 16.1 Introduction 261 16.2 Vanilla Flavor Analyses 262 16.3 Biochemistry and Genetic Research on Vanilla 266 16.4 Vanilla Quality and Authentication Analyses 267 16.4.1 Liquid Chromatographic Methods 268 16.4.2 Isotopic Techniques 272 16.4.3 Radiometric and Stable Isotope Ratio Analysis 272 16.4.4 Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) 274 16.4.5 Isotopic Techniques Summary 274 16.4.6 Integrated and Miscellaneous Methodologies 275 16.5 Conclusion 277 References 279 17 Volatile Compounds in Vanilla 285Stephen Toth, Keun Joong Lee, Daphna Havkin‐Frenkel, Faith C. Belanger, and Thomas G. Hartman 17.1 Lexicon of Vanilla Aroma/Flavor Descriptors 285 References 345 18 A Comprehensive Study of Composition and Evaluation of Vanilla Extracts in US Retail Stores 349Daphna Havkin‐Frenkel, Faith C. Belanger, Debra Y.J. Booth, Kathryn E. Galasso, Francis P. Tangel, and Carlos Javier Hernández Gayosso 18.1 History 349 18.2 Uses of Vanilla in the Industry 349 18.2.1 Household Products 350 18.2.2 Dairy Products 350 18.2.3 Ice Cream (Frozen Dairy Products) 350 18.2.4 Yogurt 350 18.2.5 Puddings 351 18.2.6 Chocolate 351 18.2.7 Confections 351 18.2.8 Baked Goods 351 18.2.9 Beverages 351 18.2.10 Pet Products 352 18.2.11 Pharmaceutical Products 352 18.2.12 Oral Care 352 18.2.13 Perfume 352 18.2.14 Toys 352 18.3 Major US Vanilla Companies 353 18.4 Introduction to the Study 353 18.5 Materials and Methods 353 18.6 Results and Discussion 354 18.6.1 Labeling of Retail Vanilla Extracts 354 18.6.2 Flavor Components in the Retail Vanilla Extracts 359 18.6.3 Total Phenol Content of the Retail Vanilla Extracts 363 18.7 Conclusion and Recommendation 363 References 365 19 Vanilla in Perfumery and Beverage Flavors 367Felix Buccellato 19.1 Earliest Recorded Use of Vanilla 367 Reference 373 Part III Biology of Vanilla 375 20 Vanilla Phylogeny and Classification 377Kenneth M. Cameron 20.1 Vanilloideae Among Orchids 381 20.2 Diversity Within Vanilloideae 381 20.2.1 Tribe Pogonieae 382 20.2.2 Tribe Vanilleae 383 20.3 Origins and Age of Vanilloideae 384 20.4 Diversity Within Vanilla 385 20.5 Systematic Conclusions and Implications 388 References 389 21 Molecular Analysis of a Vanilla Hybrid Cultivated in Costa Rica 391Faith C. Belanger and Daphna Havkin‐Frenkel 21.1 Methods 392 21.1.1 PCR Amplification, Cloning, and DNA Sequencing 392 21.1.2 Phylogenetic Analysis 393 21.1.3 Preparation of Vanilla Extracts 393 21.2 Results and Discussion 393 References 399 22 Root Cause: Mycorrhizal Fungi of Vanilla and Prospects for Biological Control of Root Rots 403Paul Bayman, María del Carmen A. Gonzalez‐Chávez, Ana T. Mosquera‐Espinosa, and Andrea Porras‐Alfaro 22.1 Introduction 403 22.1.1 Orchids and Their Mycorrhiza 403 22.1.2 The Fungi: Rhizoctonia and Related Taxa 404 22.2 Phylogenetic Diversity of Mycorrhizal Fungi of Vanilla 406 22.2.1 Methods 406 22.2.2 Diversity of Mycorrhizal Fungi 408 22.2.3 Fusarium 409 22.2.4 Distribution of Mycorrhiza and Colonization of Roots 409 22.2.5 Roots in Soil vs. Roots on Bark 410 22.2.6 Differences in Mycorrhiza Among Agrosystems 410 22.2.7 Limitations of Methods and Sources of Bias 410 22.3 Mycorrhizal Fungi of Vanilla Stimulate Seed Germination and Seedling Growth 411 22.3.1 Seedling Germination Experiments 411 22.3.2 Seedling Growth and Survival Experiments 411 22.4 Can Mycorrhizal Fungi Protect Vanilla Plants from Pathogens? 414 22.4.1 Biocontrol of Plant Diseases Using Arbuscular Mycorrhizal Fungi 414 22.4.2 Biocontrol of Plant Diseases Using Ceratobasidium 415 22.4.3 Are Rhizoctonia Strains Used for Biocontrol also Potential Pathogens? 416 22.4.4 Fusarium Species as Potential Biocontrol Agents to Protect Vanilla from Fusarium oxysporum Root Rots 417 22.5 Conclusions 417 References 418 23 Enzymes Characterized From Vanilla 423Andrzej Podstolski 23.1 L‐Phenylalanine Ammonia‐Lyse (Pal) and Cinnamate‐4‐Hydroxylase (C4h) 423 23.2 Chain-shortening Enzymes 424 23.3 4‐Coumaric Acid 3‐Hydroxylase (C3H) 427 23.4 O‐Methyltransferase (OMT) 428 23.5 Benzyl Alcohol Dehydrogenase (Bad) 428 23.6 Glycosyltransferases (GTS) 429 23.7 β‐Glycosyl Hydrolases and Curing 430 References 431 24 Vanillin Biosynthesis – Still not as Simple as it Seems? 435Richard A. Dixon 24.1 Introduction 435 24.2 Multiple Pathways to Vanillin Based on Biochemistry? 438 24.3 Elucidation of Vanillin Biosynthesis via Molecular Biology? 440 References 442 25 Vanilla planifolia – The Source of the Unexpected Discovery of a New Lignin 447Fang Chen and Richard A. Dixon 25.1 Introduction 447 25.2 Identification of C‐lignin in V. planifolia 449 25.3 Identification of Genes Potentially Involved in Lignin and Vanillin Biosynthesis 451 25.4 C‐Lignin Biosynthesis in Other Plants 452 25.5 Commercial Value of C‐Lignin as a Novel Natural Polymer 453 References 454 Part IV Biotechnological Production of Vanillin 457 26 Biotechnology of Vanillin: Vanillin from Microbial Sources 459Ivica Labuda 26.1 Introduction 459 26.1.1 Why? 459 26.1.2 How? 460 26.2 Substrates 460 26.2.1 Ferulic Acid (4‐Hydroxy 3‐Methoxy Cinnamic Acid) 460 26.2.1.1 Non‐β‐oxidative Deacetylation (CoA‐dependent) 462 26.2.1.2 β‐Oxidative Deacetylation (CoA‐Dependent) 463 26.2.1.3 Non‐Oxidative Decarboxylation 464 26.2.1.4 CoA‐Independent Deacetylation 465 26.2.1.5 Side‐Chain Reductive Pathway 466 26.2.2 Eugenol and Isoeugenol 467 26.2.3 Lignin 468 26.2.4 Sugars 469 26.3 Microorganisms 470 26.3.1 Bacteria 470 26.3.1.1 Pseudomonas 470 26.3.1.2 Streptomyces 470 26.3.1.3 Bacillus 471 26.3.1.4 Corynebacterium 472 26.3.1.5 Escherichia coli 472 26.3.1.6 Amycolatopsis sp. 473 26.3.1.7 Lactic Acid Bacteria (LAB) 473 26.3.1.8 Clostridium 474 26.3.2 Fungi and Yeasts 474 26.4 Processes 477 26.4.1 Direct Bioconversion Process 477 26.4.2 Bi‐Phasic Fermentation 480 26.4.3 Mixed Culture Fermentation 480 26.4.4 Continuous Fermentation with Immobilized Cells 481 26.4.5 Enzymes 481 26.4.6 Cofactors 482 26.5 Downstream Processing and Recovery 482 26.6 Conclusions 482 References 483 Index 489

Read more less

Book SynopsisA new study of the challenges presented by manufacturing bakery products in a health-conscious world The impact of bakery products upon human nutrition is an increasingly pressing concern among consumers and manufacturers alike. With obesity and other diet-related conditions on the rise, the levels of salt, fat, and sugar found in many baked goods can no longer be overlooked. Those working in the baking industry are consequently turning more and more to science and technology to provide routes toward healthier alternatives to classic cake, bread, and pastry recipes. With Baking Technology and Nutrition, renowned food scientist Stanley P. Cauvain and co-author Rosie H. Clark present an innovative and much-needed study of the changes taking place in the world of baking. Their discussion focuses on the new avenues open to bakers looking to improve the nutritional value of their products and encompasses all related issues, from consumer preferences to the efTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 An Introduction to the History of the Manufacture of Bakery Products and Relevant Studies in Human Nutrition 1 1.1 The Historical Development of Bakery Products 1 1.2 Historical Links Between Baked Products, Nutrition and Health 8 1.3 A Brief History of Concerns Over Fibre, Fat, Sugar and Salt in Baked Products 11 1.4 Current Nutrition and Health Concerns 15 1.5 Improving the Micronutrient Content of Wheat‐Based Products 17 1.6 Conclusions 19 References 21 2 Summary of the Manufacture of Bakery Products and Their Key Characteristics 23 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 A Synopsis of Common Bread and Fermented Product Types, and Their Manufacturing Processes 25 2.3 The Bread Manufacturing Processes 27 2.3.1 Sour‐Dough Processes 28 2.3.2 Straight Dough Bulk Fermentation 28 2.3.3 Sponge and Dough 29 2.3.4 Rapid Processing (No‐Time Dough) 30 2.3.5 Mechanical Dough Development 30 2.3.6 Dough Processing from Divider to Prover 31 2.3.7 Expansion in the Prover and Structure Setting in the Oven 32 2.4 A Synopsis of Biscuit, Cookie and Cracker Types and Their Manufacturing Processes 32 2.5 A Synopsis of Pastry Types and Manufacturing Processes 35 2.6 A Synopsis of Cake and Sponge Types and Manufacturing Processes 37 2.7 The Key Sensory Properties of Bakery Products 39 2.8 Shelf‐Life of Bakery Products 43 2.9 Nutritional Profiles of Common Bakery Products 46 2.10 Conclusion 48 References 49 3 Delivering Health Benefits via Bakery Products 51 3.1 Micronutrients 51 3.2 Vitamins and Antioxidants 52 3.3 Minerals 55 3.4 Fortification of Flour and Bakery Products 55 3.5 Ancient Grains 58 3.6 Functional Foods 60 3.7 Prebiotics and Probiotics 61 3.8 ‘Botanicals’ 62 3.9 Allergens and Special Diets 63 3.10 Anti‐nutrients and Undesirable Compounds in Raw Materials 65 3.11 Undesirable Compounds Which May Form During Processing and Baking 68 3.12 Conclusions 70 References 71 4 Drivers for Improved Health and Nutrition via Bakery Products 75 4.1 Introduction 75 4.2 Dietary Contributions and Potential Health Impacts 77 4.2.1 Salt 77 4.2.2 Fats 78 4.2.3 Carbohydrates 81 4.2.4 Sugars 82 4.2.5 Fibre 83 4.2.6 Satiety 86 4.2.7 Glycaemic Index and Glycaemic Load 86 4.2.8 Protein 87 4.2.9 Total Energy 88 4.3 Lifestyle Choices and Bakery Products 90 4.3.1 Organic 90 4.3.2 Vegetarian and Vegan 91 4.4 The Role of Legislation 92 4.5 The Role of Food Retailers 94 4.6 The Food Manufacturer 94 4.7 Conclusions 95 References 96 5 Barriers to the Acceptance of Bakery Products with Improved Nutrition 99 5.1 The Nature of the Barriers 99 5.2 Government‐ Led Interventions on Fortification 101 5.3 Legislative Barriers 102 5.4 Consumer Expectations and Preferences 104 5.5 Consumer and Social Barriers 109 5.6 Economic and Commercial Barriers 111 5.7 Technology Barriers 114 5.8 Sustainability Barriers 115 5.9 Media Generated Barriers 116 5.10 Conclusions 116 References 117 6 The Opportunities for Developing Improved Nutrition via Bakery Products 119 6.1 Introduction 119 6.2 Ingredient Declarations and Analytical Considerations 120 6.3 The Reformulation Conundrum 123 6.4 Impacts on Product Microbial Shelf‐Life 126 6.5 Reducing Fat and Changing Type 128 6.5.1 Recipe Fat Reduction 128 6.5.2 Changing Fat Type 129 6.5.3 Fat Replacement 131 6.5.4 Lipase Enzymes 132 6.5.5 Emulsifiers 132 6.5.6 Carbohydrate‐Based Replacers 134 6.5.7 Protein‐Based Replacers 135 6.5.8 Fat/Lipid‐Based Replacers 136 6.5.9 ‘Fat‐Free’ 136 6.6 Reducing Sugar and Changing Sugar Type 136 6.6.1 Recipe Sugar Reduction 137 6.6.2 Changing Sugar Type 139 6.6.3 Alternatives to Sugars 142 6.6.4 ‘Sugar‐Free’, No Added Sugar and No Refined Sugar 143 6.7 Reducing Energy (Calories) 144 6.8 Reducing Salt (Sodium) 145 6.9 Increasing Dietary Fibre 148 6.10 Fortification for Health Benefits 149 6.11 Conclusions 150 References 151 7 Approaches to Development of Nutritionally Enhanced Bakery Products 153 7.1 Introduction 153 7.2 Empirical Rules and Product Development 154 7.3 Mathematics and Product Development 156 7.4 Visualisation and Simulation Techniques for Product Development 159 7.5 The Role of Product Evaluation in the Development of Nutritionally Enhanced Bakery Products 163 7.6 Examples of Linking Sensory and Objectively Measured Qualities with Bakery Products 166 7.7 Strategies for Developing Product and Process Developments to Deliver Enhanced Nutrition 170 7.8 Finding a ‘Starting Point’ 173 7.9 Continuing the Development Process 176 7.10 Identifying Processing Options 178 7.11 Verifying Nutritional Targets 180 7.12 Conclusions 182 References 183 8 Communicating Relevant Messages 185 8.1 Introduction 185 8.2 Communicating Nutrition and Health Information on Relevant Food Sources 187 8.3 Communication of Basic Dietary Information by Food Manufacturers 189 8.4 Macronutrient Claims and Product Composition 192 8.5 Micronutrient Claims 194 8.6 Communication of Non‐specific Health and Dietary Benefits by Food Manufacturers 195 8.7 Communications Between Health Specialists and the Baking Industry 198 8.8 Communications and Consumers 201 8.9 Media Communicated Information and Disinformation 203 8.10 Conclusions 204 References 205 Glossary 207 Index 213

Read more less

Book SynopsisA guide to the diversity of pesticides used in modern agricultural practices, and the relevant social and environmental issues Pesticides in Crop Productionoffers an important resource that explores pesticide action in plants; pesticide metabolism in soil microbes, plants and animals; bioaccumulation of pesticides and sensitiveness of microbiome towards pesticides. The authors explore pesticide risk assessment, the development of pesticide resistance in pests, microbial remediation of pesticide intoxicated legumes and pesticide toxicity amelioration in plants by plant hormones. The authors include information on eco-friendly pest management. They review the impact of pesticides on soil microorganism, crops and other plants along with the impact on other organisms like aquatic fauna and terrestrial animals including human beings. The book also contains an analysis of pesticide by GC-MS/MS (Gas Chromatography tandem Mass Spectrometry) a reliable method for Table of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Preface xix 1 Development of Pesticide Resistance in Pests: A Key Challenge to the Crop Protection and Environmental Safety 1Subramani Pandian and Manikandan Ramesh 1.1 Resistance: The Introduction 1 1.2 Pesticide Resistance: A Global Analysis 2 1.3 Molecular Genetics and Biochemical Basis of Pesticide Resistance 2 1.4 Changes in Pesticide Binding Sites 2 1.5 Nicotinic Acetylcholine Receptors 3 1.6 GABA Receptors and Other Ligand-gated Chloride Channels 4 1.7 Voltage-Dependent Sodium Channels 4 1.8 Insecticidal Microbial Toxins 5 1.9 Biotransformation 6 1.10 Acetylcholinesterase 6 1.11 Esterases 7 1.12 Carboxylesterases (B-Esterases) 7 1.13 Cytochrome P450 Monooxygenases 8 1.14 Glutathione S-Transferases 8 1.15 Other Resistance Mechanisms 9 References 9 2 Fungicide Toxicity to Legumes and Its Microbial Remediation: A Current Perspective 15Mohammad Shahid, Mohammad Saghir Khan and Almas Zaidi 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 Nutritional Importance of Legumes 16 2.3 Fungal Diseases of Legumes: A General Perspective 17 2.4 Types of Fungicides and Their Mode of Action 17 2.5 Fungicides Uptake, Metabolism and Their Persistence 20 2.6 Phytotoxicity of Fungicides to Legumes: A General Perspective 21 2.7 Impact of Fungicides on Plant Growth 21 2.8 Effect on Symbiosis and Yield 23 2.9 Effect on Chlorophyll Content and Photosynthetic Rates 24 2.10 Fungicide Toxicity to Legume Rhizobium Symbiosis 25 2.10.1 Effect on Nodulation 25 2.10.2 Effect of Fungicides on Nitrogenase and Leghaemoglobin 25 2.10.3 Effect on Dry Biomass 26 2.11 Microbial Remediation of Fungicide Toxicity 26 2.12 Concluding Remarks 28 References 28 3 Pesticide Metabolism in Plants, Insects, Soil Microbes and Fishes: An Overview 35Anket Sharma, Vinod Kumar, Sukhmeen Kaur Kohli, Ravdeep Kaur, Tajinder Kaur, Saroj Arora, Ashwani Kumar Thukral and Renu Bhardwaj 3.1 Introduction 35 3.2 Metabolism of Pesticides in Plants 36 3.3 Metabolism of Pesticides in Insects 39 3.4 Metabolism of Pesticides in Soil Microbes 41 3.5 Metabolism of Pesticides in Fishes 43 3.6 Conclusion 45 References 45 4 Bioaccumulation of Pesticides and Its Impact on Biological Systems 55Shubhra Gupta and Kapil Gupta 4.1 Introduction 55 4.2 Dispersion of Pesticides into the Environment 56 4.3 Behavior of Pesticides in Soil 57 4.4 Bioaccumulation and Biomagnifications of Pesticide 58 4.4.1 Bioaccumulation of Pesticides in Plants 59 4.4.2 Bioaccumulation of Pesticides in Animals 60 4.4.3 Bioaccumulation of Pesticides in Human and Toxicity 61 4.5 Regulatory Activity 62 4.6 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 62 References 63 5 Impact of Pesticide Exposure and Associated Health Effects 69Jyoti Upadhayay, Mahendra Rana, Vijay Juyal, Satpal Singh Bisht and Rohit Joshi 5.1 Introduction 69 5.2 History of Evolution of Pesticides 70 5.3 Pesticides Regulations 70 5.4 Impact on Environment 71 5.5 Impact on Human Health 72 5.5.1 Pesticide Exposure 72 5.5.1.1 Pesticide Exposure Routes in Humans 72 5.5.1.2 Acute Toxicity of Pesticides 72 5.5.1.3 Neurobehavioral Effects After Acute Toxicity 74 5.5.1.4 Chronic Toxicity of Pesticides 74 5.5.1.5 Disruption of Endocrine System 74 5.5.2 Carcinogenicity 76 5.5.2.1 Neurological and Neuro-developmental Effects 78 5.5.2.2 Parkinson’s Disease (PD) 78 5.5.2.3 Immunologic Effects 78 5.5.2.4 Reproductive Effects 78 5.5.2.5 Estrogenic Effects of Pesticides on Human Estrogen-Sensitive Cells 79 5.5.2.6 Diethyl Stilbestrol (DES) Syndrome (Model for Estrogenic Chemicals Exposure in the Environment) 79 5.5.2.7 Developmental Effects 79 5.6 Other Health Problems 80 5.6.1 Eye Problems 80 5.6.2 Respiratory Problems 80 5.6.3 Determination of Pollution Potential of Pesticides 80 5.7 Conclusion 81 References 82 6 Microbiome as Sensitive Markers for Risk Assessment of Pesticides 89Upma Singh, Varsha Ashok Walvekar and Shilpi Sharma 6.1 Introduction 89 6.2 The Rhizosphere 90 6.3 Effect of Chemical Pesticides on Soil Microbial Communities 91 6.4 Effect of Pesticides on Plant Growth Parameters as a Result of Impact on Microbiome 95 6.5 Impact of Safer Alternatives, Biological Pesticides 96 6.6 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 102 Acknowledgment 102 References 102 7 Arms Race between Insecticide and Insecticide Resistance and Evolution of Insect Management Strategies 109Pritam Chattopadhyay and Goutam Banerjee 7.1 Introduction 109 7.2 Different Types of Insecticide 110 7.3 Different Types of Insecticide Resistance 116 7.3.1 Cross Insecticide Resistance 116 7.3.2 Multiple Insecticide Resistance 116 7.3.3 Stable Insecticide Resistance 116 7.3.4 Unstable Insecticide Resistance 116 7.4 Reasons for Insecticide Resistance 117 7.5 Mechanisms of Insecticide Resistance 118 7.5.1 Alterations in Insecticide Detoxification Capacity 118 7.5.2 Alteration of Toxin-Receptor Interactions 118 7.5.3 Alterations in Detoxification Metabolism 119 7.5.4 Alterations in Insecticide Penetration 119 7.5.5 Other Potential Mechanisms of Resistance 119 7.5.5.1 Induced Resistance 119 7.5.5.2 Behavioral Resistance 119 7.6 Factors Influencing Insecticide Resistance 119 7.6.1 Biological and Ecological Factors 120 7.6.2 Genetic Factors 121 7.6.3 Operational Factors 122 7.7 Managing Pesticide Resistance 122 7.7.1 Insecticide Resistance Database 122 7.7.2 Chemical Use Strategies for Resistance Management 122 7.7.2.1 Management by Moderation 122 7.7.2.2 Management by Multiple Attacks 123 7.7.2.3 Management by Saturation 123 7.7.3 Reactive Resistance Management 123 7.7.4 Proactive Resistance Management 123 7.7.5 Resistance Management as a Component of IPM 123 7.8 Technical Strategies to Combat Insecticide Resistance 123 7.8.1 Searching and Characterizing New and Novel Insecticide 123 7.8.2 Amending Biocontrol 124 7.8.3 Exploring Novel Insect Pest Resistant Varieties 124 7.8.3.1 Plant Immunity and Insect Resistance 124 7.8.4 Combining Known Insecticides in Appropriate Proportion 124 7.8.5 Modifying Known Insecticidal Toxins 125 7.9 Future Perspective 125 Acknowledgments 125 Conflict of Interest 125 References 126 8 Agricultural Herbicides and Fungi in Soil Exposed to Herbicides 131Barberis Carla, Magnoli Carina, Carranza Cecilia, Benito Nicolás and Aluffi Melisa 8.1 Introduction 131 8.2 General Aspects of Main Herbicides 132 8.2.1 Clodinafop Propargyl 132 8.2.2 Toxicity of CF 132 8.2.3 2,4-Dichlorophenoxyacetic Acid 133 8.2.3.1 Toxicity of 2,4-D 133 8.2.4 Glyphosate 133 8.2.4.1 Toxicity of GP 133 8.2.5 Atrazine 134 8.2.5.1 Toxicity of Atrazine 134 8.2.6 Metolachlor 135 8.2.6.1 Toxicity of Metolachlor 135 8.2.7 Diuron 136 8.2.7.1 Toxicity of Diuron 136 8.2.8 Imazapyr 137 8.2.8.1 Toxicity of Imazapyr 137 8.2.9 Pendimethalin 137 8.2.9.1 Toxicity of Pendimethalin 138 8.2.10 Paraquat 138 8.2.10.1 Toxicity of PQ 138 8.3 Biodegradation of Most-Used Herbicides by Fungi 138 8.3.1 2,4-D Degradation 139 8.3.2 Atrazine Degradation 140 8.3.3 Metolachlor Degradation 140 8.4 Effect of Herbicides on Fungi 141 8.4.1 Glyphosate 141 8.4.2 2,4-Dichlorophenoxy Acetic Acid and Others Herbicides 142 8.5 Effect of Herbicides on Toxicogenic Fungi and Mycotoxins Production 144 8.6 Effect of Herbicides on Phytopathogen Fungi 145 8.7 Conclusions 146 References 146 9 Pesticides Usage, Uptake and Mode of Action in Plants with Special Emphasis on Photosynthetic Characteristics 159Nivedita Chaudhary, Krishna Kumar Choudhary, S.B. Agarwal and Madhoolika Agrawal 9.1 Introduction 159 9.1.1 Usage and Requirement of Pesticides on Plants 160 9.1.1.1 Integrated Pest Management (IPM) 161 9.1.1.2 Cultural Control 161 9.1.1.3 Mechanical Control 162 9.1.1.4 Biological Control 162 9.1.1.5 Genetic Control 162 9.1.1.6 Chemical Control 162 9.1.2 Generalized Mode of Action and Uptake of Pesticides in Plants 162 9.2 Effects of Pesticides on the Physiological Characteristics of the Plants 166 9.2.1 Chlorophyll Fluorescence Affected by the Pesticides 168 9.2.2 Pesticides Affect Chlorophyll Content in the Plants 171 9.2.3 Effect of Pesticides on Photosynthesis 171 9.2.4 Effects of Pesticides on Stomatal Conductance, Transpiration and Dark Respiration 173 9.3 Beneficial and Detrimental Effects of Pesticides 173 9.3.1 Beneficial Effects 174 9.3.2 Detrimental Effects 174 9.4 Conclusions 175 Acknowledgments 175 References 175 10 Botanical Pesticides for Eco-Friendly Pest Management: Drawbacks and Limitations 181Christos A. Damalas and Spyridon D. Koutroubas 10.1 Introduction 181 10.2 Overview of Botanical Pesticides 182 10.3 Drawbacks and Limitations 184 10.4 Quality of Raw Material 184 10.5 Product Standardization 185 10.6 Rapid Degradation 186 10.7 Short Shelf-Life 186 10.8 Raw Material Availability 187 10.9 Safety of Botanical Pesticides 187 10.10 Regulatory Approval 188 10.11 Future Perspectives 188 10.12 Conclusions 189 References 190 11 Pesticide Interactions with Foodstuffs: Case Study of Apple 195Géraldine Giacinti, Christine Raynaud and Valérie Simon 11.1 Introduction 195 11.2 Apple Biology 196 11.2.1 General Botanical Presentation 196 11.2.2 Plant Structural Biochemistry 196 11.2.3 Chemical Composition of the Tissues of the Fruit of Malus domestica Borkh 197 11.3 Pesticide Inputs 198 11.3.1 Chemical Composition of Pesticides 199 11.3.1.1 Active Molecules 199 11.3.1.2 Surfactants 199 11.3.1.3 Other Additives 199 11.3.2 Identification of Pesticides Currently Used in French Apple Orchards 200 11.4 Pesticide-Fruit Interactions 200 11.4.1 Epidermis Structure and Function in Apple 201 11.4.2 Two Diffusion Pathways in the Cuticle 202 11.4.3 Study of the Interactions Between Pesticides and Cuticle 204 11.4.3.1 Membrane Transport Mechanism for the Active Molecules of Pesticides 205 11.4.3.2 Cuticular Membrane Permeability 205 11.4.3.3 Identification of the Chemical Compounds of the Cuticle Interacting with Pesticides 206 11.4.4 Identification of Factors Likely to Influence Pesticide-Cuticule Interactions 209 11.4.4.1 Pesticide Formulations 209 11.4.4.2 Environmental Conditions 211 11.4.4.3 Pesticide Molecule Degradation in Plants: New Interactions 212 11.5 Conclusion and Future Prospects 213 References 214 12 Multiresidue Pesticide Analysis in Cabbage and Cauliflower Using Gas Chromatography Tandem Mass Spectrometry (GC-MS/MS) 221Mahadev C. Khetagoudar, Mahadev B. Chetti, A. V. Raghu and Dinesh C. Bilehal 12.1 Introduction 221 12.2 Experimental Details 222 12.2.1 Apparatus 222 12.2.2 Reagents 223 12.2.3 Preparation of Reference Standard Solutions 223 12.2.4 Preparation of Sample 224 12.2.5 GC- MS/MS Analysis 224 12.2.6 Validation Study 224 12.3 Results and Discussion 224 12.3.1 Optimization of GC Oven Programming 224 12.3.2 Optimization of MS/MS 226 12.3.3 QuEChERS Procedure for Extraction 226 12.3.4 Recovery Experiments of Spiked Samples 227 12.3.5 Method Performance 227 12.4 Applicability of the Developed Method 229 12.4.1 Sampling 229 12.5 Conclusion 230 Acknowledgments 230 References 230 13 Pesticide Toxicity Amelioration in Plants by Plant Hormones 233Palak Bakshi, Shagun Bali, Parminder Kaur, Anjali Khajuria, Kanika Khanna, Bilal Ahmad Mir, Puja Ohri and Renu Bhardwaj 13.1 Introduction 233 13.2 Physico-Chemical Methods 237 13.2.1 Chemical Detoxification and Disposal Methods 237 13.2.2 Physical Detoxification and Disposal Methods 238 13.3 Enzymatic Methods 239 13.3.1 Oxidoreductases 240 13.3.2 Hydrolases 240 13.3.3 Lyases 241 13.4 Plant Growth Regulators 241 13.4.1 Auxins 241 13.4.2 Abscisic Acid 243 13.4.3 Brassinosteroids 244 13.4.4 Salicylic Acid 246 13.4.5 Jasmonic Acid 247 13.4.6 Polyphenols 248 13.5 Conclusion 249 References 249 14 Transgenic Strategies to Develop Resistant Plant Against the Pathogen and Pest 259Neeraj Kumar Dubey, Kapil Gupta, Pawan Yadav, Jogeswar Panigrahi and Aditya Kumar Gupta 14.1 Introduction 259 14.2 Techniques Used for Transgenic Plant Development 260 14.3 Transgenic Plants Developed Against Pathogens and Pests 263 14.3.1 Virus 263 14.3.2 Bacteria 266 14.3.3 Fungi 266 14.3.4 Nematodes 270 14.3.5 Insects 272 14.3.6 Parasitic Weeds 276 14.4 Regulation of Insecticidal Gene Expression 278 14.5 Advantages 279 14.6 Disadvantages 279 14.7 Future Strategies 279 Acknowledgments 280 References 280 Index 291

Read more less

Book SynopsisInterest in cereals and other healthy grains has increased considerably in recent years, driving the cereal processing industry to develop new processing technologies that meet consumer demands for sustainable and nutritious cereal products. Innovative Processing Technologies for Healthy Grains is the first dedicated reference to focus on advances in cereal processing and bio-refinery of cereals and pseudocereals, presenting a broad overview of all aspects of both conventional and novel processing techniques and methods. Featuring contributions from leading researchers and academics, this unique volume examines the selection and characteristics of raw ingredients, new and emerging processing technologies, novel cereal-based products, and global trends in cereal and pseudocereal use, processing and consumption. The text offers balanced coverage of advances in both the development and processing of cereal and pseudocereal products, exploring topics including gluten-free products, cereTable of ContentsAbout the IFST Advances in Food Science Book Series xi List of Figures and Tables xiii List of Contributors xvii Preface xix 1 Processing Technologies for Healthy Grains: Introduction 1Milica Pojic ́ and Uma Tiwari 1.1 Healthy Grains: What Are They? 1 1.2 Cereals and Pseudocereals: Production, Nutritional Value, and Utilization 2 1.3 Cereal Byproducts for Food and Feed Utilization 4 1.4 Challenges in Healthy Grain Processing: Traditional vs Innovative Processing 4 1.5 Relevance of this Book 5 Acknowledgment 6 References 6 2 Introduction to Cereal Processing: Innovative Processing Techniques 9Uma Tiwari and Milica Pojic ́ 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Characteristics of Cereals 11 2.2.1 Cereal’s Inflorescences 11 2.2.2 Cereal’s Roots 11 2.2.3 Cereal’s Stems and Leaves 11 2.3 Kernel Structures 12 2.3.1 Rice 12 2.3.2 Wheat 13 2.3.3 Maize 13 2.3.4 Barley 14 2.3.5 Oats 14 2.3.6 Rye 14 2.3.7 Sorghum 15 2.3.8 Millet 15 2.4 Processing of Cereals 15 2.5 Innovations in Post‐harvest Processing 16 2.5.1 Irradiation of Cereal Grains 16 2.5.2 Ozone Technology in Post‐harvest Cereal Processing 16 2.5.3 Cold Plasma Technology in Post‐harvest Cereal Processing 18 2.6 Innovations in Primary Cereal Processing 18 2.6.1 Dry Milling of Cereals 18 2.6.2 Novel Fractionation Methods 19 2.6.3 Alteration of the Techno‐functional Properties of Cereals and Flours 20 2.7 Innovations in Secondary Cereal Processing 24 2.7.1 Innovations in Bioprocessing 24 2.7.2 Innovative Cereal Extrusion 26 2.7.3 Innovative Baking 27 2.8 Conclusion 28 Acknowledgment 28 References 28 3 Pseudocereals as Healthy Grains: An Overview 37Muriel Henrion, Emilie Labat, and Lisa Lamothe 3.1 Introduction 37 3.2 Pseudocereals: Origin, Production, and Utilization 37 3.2.1 Buckwheat 38 3.2.2 Quinoa 39 3.2.3 Amaranth 40 3.3 Processing of Pseudocereals 41 3.3.1 Enzymatic Processing of Pseudocereals 41 3.3.2 Germination of Pseudocereals 41 3.3.3 Fermentation Processing of Pseudocereals 42 3.3.4 Thermal Processing Methods for Pseudocereals 43 3.3.5 Pseudocereals in Gluten‐Free Processing 45 3.4 Emerging Significance of Pseudocereals 46 3.4.1 Nutritional Value of Pseudocereals 46 3.5 Functional Ingredients of Pseudocereals 50 3.5.1 Phenolic Compounds 50 3.5.2 Bioactive Peptides 52 3.6 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 52 References 53 4 Advances in Conventional Cereal and Pseudocereal Processing 61Vijaykrishnaraj Muthugopal Sasthri, Nivedha Krishnakumar, and Pichan Prabhasankar 4.1 Introduction 61 4.2 Conventional Grain Processing 62 4.2.1 Mechanical Processing 62 4.2.2 Thermal Processing 64 4.3 Bioprocessing of Cereals and Pseudocereals 68 4.3.1 Enzyme‐assisted Cereal and Pseudocereal Processing 68 4.3.2 Fermentation in Cereal Processing 70 4.3.3 Biorefinery Processing 72 4.4 The Impact of Processing on the Nutritional Composition of Cereals and Pseudocereals 74 4.4.1 The Impact of Thermal Processing 74 4.4.2 The Impact of Malting and Germination 75 4.4.3 The Impact of Mechanical Processing 75 4.5 Conclusion and Perspectives of Emerging Technologies in Cereal Processing 76 References 76 5 Healthy Grain Products 83Aleksandra Mišan, Anamarija Mandic ́, Tamara Dapčevic ́ Hadnadev, and Bojana Filipčev 5.1 Introduction to Different Types of Healthy Grain Products and Their Specific Features 83 5.1.1 Healthy Grain Products with Enhanced Dietary Fiber Content 84 5.1.2 Healthy Grain Products with Enhanced Bioactive Compounds 84 5.2 Nutritional Profile and Health Benefits of Healthy Grain Products 87 5.2.1 Nutritional Profile of Bran 88 5.2.2 Nutritional Profile of the Aleurone Layer 89 5.2.3 Anthocyanin and Carotenoid‐Pigmented Grains 90 5.3 Bioaccessibility and Bioavailability of Nutritional Compounds 91 5.3.1 Bioaccessibility and Bioavailability of Polyphenols 92 5.3.2 Bioaccessibility and Bioavailability of Fibers 94 5.3.3 Bioaccessibility and Bioavailability of Minerals 94 5.4 Rheological and Structural Properties of Healthy Grain Products 95 5.4.1 Properties of Bakery Products 95 5.4.2 Properties of Pasta Products 97 5.4.3 Properties of Extruded Products 98 5.4.4 Properties of Flour Confectionery Products 99 5.5 Technological Challenges in the Production of Healthy Grain Products 99 5.6 Conclusion 100 Acknowledgment 100 References 101 6 Sprouted Cereal Grains and Products 113Alessandra Marti, Gaetano Cardone, and Maria Ambrogina Pagani 6.1 Introduction 113 6.2 Definition 114 6.3 Mechanisms of Grain Germination 115 6.3.1 Effect of Germination on the Carbohydrate Complex of Cereal Grains 117 6.3.2 Effect of Germination on the Protein Complex of Cereal Grains 117 6.4 Nutritional Profile of Germinated Cereal Grains and Their Health Benefits 118 6.5 From Traditional to Industrial Germination Processes 126 6.6 Utilization of Germinated Cereal Grains in Different Food Products 127 6.6.1 Malting for Brewing Products 127 6.6.2 Bakery Products 128 6.7 Monitoring of Seed Germination 130 6.7.1 Falling and Stirring Number 131 6.7.2 Amylograph 131 6.7.3 Alpha‐Amylase Activity 133 6.8 Conclusion and Further Remarks 135 References 135 7 Novel Ingredients from Cereals 143Dominic Agyei, Jaison Jeevanandam, Christian Kwesi Ofotsu Dzuvor, Sharadwata Pan, Michael Kobina Danquah, Caleb Acquah, and Chibuike C. Udenigwe 7.1 Introduction 143 7.2 Structure, Biochemistry, and Bioactivity of Cereal Ingredients 144 7.2.1 Carbohydrates 144 7.2.2 Proteins, Peptides, and Amino Acids 146 7.2.3 Lipids 150 7.2.4 Secondary Metabolites 151 7.2.5 Other Minor Components 155 7.3 Production Strategies for Cereal Ingredients 157 7.3.1 Production Strategies for Cereal Carbohydrates 157 7.3.2 Production Strategies for Cereal Proteins and Peptides 158 7.3.3 Production Strategies for Cereal Lipids 158 7.3.4 Production Strategies for Cereal-Based Secondary Metabolites 159 7.3.5 Production Strategies for Vitamins and Minerals from Cereal 160 7.4 Food Applications of Cereal Ingredients 160 7.4.1 Nutritional Applications 161 7.4.2 Health Applications 162 7.5 Conclusion and Future Outlook 164 References 164 8 Innovative Gluten‐Free Products 177Cristina M. Rosell, Mehran Aalami, and Sahar Akhavan Mahdavi 8.1 Introduction 177 8.2 Gluten‐Free Foods 178 8.2.1 Bakery Products 179 8.2.2 Pasta and Extruded Products 180 8.2.3 Other Gluten‐Free Products 180 8.3 Processing Techniques for Improving Gluten‐Free Products 181 8.3.1 Conventional Physical Treatments 181 8.3.2 Emerging Technologies 183 8.3.3 Biotechnological Approaches 187 8.4 Conclusion and Further Remarks 190 References 191 9 Cereal‐Based Animal Feed Products 199Abirami R. Ganesan and Gaurav Rajauria 9.1 Introduction 199 9.2 Cereal Grains and By‐Products as Feedstuff 206 9.2.1 Nutritional Value of Cereal Grains Used for Animal Feed Products 206 9.2.2 Nutritional Value of Cereal By‐Products Used for Animal Feed 211 9.3 Processing Methods of Cereal Grains for Feed Purposes 214 9.3.1 Primary Processing Methods 214 9.3.2 Secondary Processing Methods 215 9.4 Safety Risk and Hazards 218 9.5 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 219 References 220 10 The Consumption of Healthy Grains: Product, Health, and Wellness Trends 227Catherine Barry‐Ryan, Marco Vassallo, and Milica Pojic ́ 10.1 Introduction 227 10.2 Benefits of Wholegrain Consumption and Consumers 228 10.3 Consumers’ Attitudes Toward Behavior 228 10.4 Consumers’ Attitudes Toward Consumption of Healthy Grains 230 10.4.1 The Role of Self‐Referencing Task in Food Choice 230 10.4.2 The Role of Food Labeling and Nutrition and Health Claims in Food Choice 231 10.5 Clean‐Label Trend in Grain Products 235 10.6 Healthy Grain Products on the Market 237 10.6.1 Whole Grain Products 237 10.6.2 Low Glycemic Index Products 237 10.6.3 Fortified Grain‐Based Products 238 10.6.4 Supplemented Cereal‐Based Products 239 10.6.5 Gluten‐Free Products 239 10.6.6 Reduced Salt and Sugar Products 240 10.6.7 Fiber‐Rich Products and Fiber Consumption 241 10.6.8 Sourdough Products 241 10.6.9 Cereal‐Based Products with Bioactive Benefits 242 10.6.10 Cereal‐Based Beverages 242 10.7 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 243 Acknowledgment 244 References 244 11 Assessing the Environmental Impact of Processed Healthy Grains 251Nicholas M. Holden and Mingjia Yan 11.1 Introduction 251 11.1.1 The Role of LCA in Grain Processing 252 11.2 Impact Assessment: Life Cycle Assessment 254 11.2.1 LCA Definition 254 11.2.2 The LCA Methods 255 11.2.3 Types of LCA 256 11.3 LCA Study 258 11.3.1 Goal and Scope 259 11.3.2 Life Cycle Inventory 262 11.3.3 Life Cycle Impact Assessment 265 11.3.4 Life Cycle Interpretation 268 11.4 LCA Studies on Cereal and Cereal‐Based Products Processing 270 11.5 Conclusion 271 References 271 Index 277

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe revised edition of the comprehensive book that explores the principles and applications of aquaculture engineering Since the publication of the first edition of Aquaculture Engineering there have been many advances in the industry. The revised and thoroughly updated third edition of Aquaculture Engineering covers the principles and applications of all major facets of aquaculture engineering and the newest developments in the field. Written by a noted expert on the topic, the new edition highlights information on new areas of interest including RAS technology and offshore fish farming. Comprehensive in scope, the book examines a range of topics including: water transportation and treatment; feed and feeding systems; fish transportation and grading; cleaning and waste handling; instrumentation and monitoring; removal of particles; aeration and oxygenation; recirculation and water reuse systems; ponds; and the design and construction of aquaculturTable of ContentsPreface xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Aquaculture engineering 1 1.2 Classification of aquaculture 1 1.3 The farm: technical components in a system 2 1.3.1 Land‐based hatchery and juvenile production farm 2 1.3.2 On‐growing sea cage farm 4 1.4 Future trends: increased importance of aquaculture engineering 6 1.5 This textbook 6 References 7 2 Water Transport 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Pipe and pipe parts 9 2.2.1 Pipes 9 2.2.2 Valves 12 2.2.3 Pipe parts: fittings 14 2.2.4 Pipe connections: jointing 15 2.2.5 Mooring of pipes 15 2.2.6 Ditches for pipes 16 2.3 Some basic hydrodynamics 17 2.3.1 Boundary layer theory 17 2.3.2 Bernoulli’s equation 18 2.4 Water flow and head loss in channels and pipe systems 19 2.4.1 Water flow 19 2.4.2 Head loss in pipelines 20 2.4.3 Head loss in single parts (fittings) 23 2.4.4 Gravity feed pipes 23 2.5 Pumps 26 2.5.1 Types of pump 26 2.5.2 Some definitions 26 2.5.3 Pumping of water requires energy 29 2.5.4 Centrifugal and propeller pumps 30 2.5.5 Pump performance curves and working point for centrifugal pumps 32 2.5.6 Change of water flow or pressure 35 2.5.7 Regulation of flow from selected pumps 37 References 39 3 Water Quality and Water Treatment: An Introduction 41 3.1 Increased focus on water quality 41 3.2 Inlet water 41 3.3 Outlet water 43 3.4 Water treatment 44 References 46 4 Fish Metabolism, Water Quality and Separation Technology 47 4.1 Introduction 47 4.2 Fish metabolism 47 4.2.1 Overview of fish metabolism 47 4.2.2 The energy budget 49 4.3 Separation technology 49 4.3.1 What are the impurities in water? 50 4.3.2 Phosphorus removal: an example 51 References 53 5 Controlling pH, Alkalinity and Hardness 55 5.1 Introduction 55 5.2 pH 55 5.2.1 Water dissolves in water 55 5.2.2 What is pH 56 5.2.3 The carbonate system 57 5.2.4 Total carbonate carbon 60 5.2.5 Open or closed system 60 5.2.6 A mathematical approach 63 5.2.7 pH of different water sources 64 5.2.8 Recommended pH for aquaculture 64 5.3 Alkalinity 65 5.3.1 How to avoid pH fluctuations 65 5.3.2 Titration is necessary 65 5.3.3 A buffer 66 5.3.4 The term equivalent weight 68 5.3.5 Alkalinity given as mg/L CaCO3 68 5.3.6 Alkalinity of different water sources 69 5.3.7 Recommended alkalinity for aquaculture 69 5.4 Hardness 69 5.4.1 The concentration of bivalent cations 69 5.4.2 Hardness may lead to precipitation 70 5.4.3 Hardness of different water sources 71 5.4.4 Recommended hardness 71 5.5 Chemical agents to use for regulation of pH, alkalinity and hardness 72 5.6 Examples of methods for pH adjustment 73 5.6.1 Lime 73 5.6.2 Sea water 75 5.6.3 Lye or hydroxides 76 5.6.4 pH regulation in RAS 76 References 77 6 Removal of Particles: Traditional Methods 79 6.1 Introduction 79 6.2 Characterization of the water 80 6.3 Methods for particle removal in fish farming 80 6.3.1 Mechanical filters and microscreens 81 6.3.2 Depth filtration: granular medium filters 84 6.3.3 Settling or gravity filters 87 6.3.4 Integrated treatment systems 90 6.4 Hydraulic loads on filter units 91 6.5 Purification efficiency 92 6.6 Dual drain tank 92 6.7 Local ecological solutions 94 References 94 7 Protein Skimming, Flotation, Coagulation and Flocculation 97 7.1 Introduction 97 7.1.1 Surface tension, cohesion and adhesion 99 7.1.2 Surfactants 102 7.2 Mechanisms for attachment and removal 102 7.2.1 Attachment of particles to rising bubbles by collision, typically in flotation 103 7.2.2 Improving colloid and particle removal rates: pretreatment 105 7.2.3 Attachment of surface‐active substances, typically in protein skimmers 111 7.2.4 Particle attachment by nucleation 112 7.3 Bubbles 113 7.3.1 What is a gas bubble? 113 7.3.2 Methods for bubble generation 113 7.3.3 Bubble size 115 7.3.4 Bubble coalescence 115 7.4 Foam 116 7.4.1 What is foam? 116 7.4.2 Foam stability 117 7.4.3 Foam breakers 118 7.5 Introduction of bubbles affects the gas concentration in the water 118 7.6 Use of bubble columns in aquaculture 118 7.7 Performance of protein skimmers and flotation plants in aquaculture 119 7.7.1 What is removed in inlet or effluent aquaculture water with the use of protein skimmers? 119 7.7.2 Factors affecting the efficiency of protein skimming in aquaculture 121 7.7.3 Use of ozone 122 7.7.4 Bubble fractionation 123 7.8 Design and dimensioning of protein skimmers and flotation plants 123 7.8.1 Protein skimmers: principles and design 123 7.8.2 Protein skimmers: dimensioning 125 7.8.3 Flotation plant 126 7.8.4 Important factors affecting design of a DAF plant 127 References 129 8 Membrane Filtration 135 8.1 History and use 135 8.2 What is membrane filtration? 136 8.3 Classification of membrane filters 137 8.4 Flow pattern 139 8.5 Membrane shape/geometry 140 8.6 Membrane construction/morphology 142 8.7 Flow across membranes 143 8.8 Membrane materials 143 8.9 Fouling 144 8.10 Automation 146 8.11 Design and dimensioning of membrane filtration plants 146 8.12 Some examples of results with membranes used in aquaculture 149 References 150 9 Sludge 153 9.1 What is sludge 153 9.2 Utilization of the sludge 154 9.3 Dewatering of sludge 155 9.4 Stabilization of sludge 156 9.5 Composting of the sludge: aerobic decomposition 156 9.6 Fermentation and biogas production: anaerobic decomposition 158 9.7 Addition of lime 159 9.8 Drying of sludge 159 9.9 Combustion of sludge 160 9.10 Other possibilities for treatment and utilization of the sludge 161 References 161 10 Disinfection 163 10.1 Introduction 163 10.2 Basis of disinfection 164 10.2.1 Degree of removal 164 10.2.2 Chick’s law 164 10.2.3 Watson’s law 165 10.2.4 Dose–response curve 165 10.3 Ultraviolet light 165 10.3.1 Function 165 10.3.2 Mode of action 165 10.3.3 Design 166 10.3.4 Design specification 166 10.3.5 Dose 168 10.3.6 Special problems 168 10.4 Ozone 168 10.4.1 Function 168 10.4.2 Mode of action 169 10.4.3 Design specification 169 10.4.4 Ozone dose 170 10.4.5 Special problems 170 10.4.6 Measuring ozone content 172 10.5 Advanced oxidation technology 172 10.5.1 Redox potential 172 10.5.2 Methods utilizing AOT 173 10.6 Other disinfection methods 175 10.6.1 Photozone 175 10.6.2 Heat treatment 175 10.6.3 Chlorine 175 10.6.4 Changing the pH 176 10.6.5 Natural methods: ground filtration or constructed wetland 176 10.6.6 Membrane filtration 176 References 176 11 Heating and Cooling 179 11.1 Introduction 179 11.2 Heating requires energy 179 11.3 Methods for heating water 180 11.4 Heaters 181 11.4.1 Immersion heaters 181 11.4.2 Oil and gas burners 183 11.5 Heat exchangers 183 11.5.1 Why use heat exchangers? 183 11.5.2 How is the heat transferred? 184 11.5.3 Factors affecting heat transfer 184 11.5.4 Important parameters when calculating the size of heat exchangers 185 11.5.5 Types of heat exchanger 187 11.5.6 Flow pattern in heat exchangers 189 11.5.7 Materials in heat exchangers 190 11.5.8 Fouling 191 11.6 Heat pumps 192 11.6.1 Why use heat pumps? 192 11.6.2 Construction and function of a heat pump 192 11.6.3 Log pressure–enthalpy (p–H) 193 11.6.4 Coefficient of performance 194 11.6.5 Installations of heat pumps 194 11.6.6 Management and maintenance of heat pumps 196 11.7 Composite heating systems 196 11.8 Chilling of water 199 References 201 12 Gas Exchange, Aeration, Oxygenation and CO2 Removal 203 12.1 Introduction 203 12.2 Gas exchange in fish 203 12.3 Gases in water 204 12.4 Gas solubility in water 206 12.5 Gas transfer theory: aeration 210 12.5.1 Equilibrium 210 12.5.2 Gas transfer 212 12.6 Design and construction of aerators 213 12.6.1 Basic principles 213 12.6.2 Change of gas composition in the water for testing purposes 214 12.6.3 Evaluation criteria 215 12.6.4 Example of designs for different types of aerator 217 12.7 Oxygenation of water 223 12.8 Theory of oxygenation 224 12.8.1 Increasing the equilibrium concentration 224 12.8.2 Gas transfer velocity 224 12.8.3 Addition under pressure 224 12.9 Design and construction of oxygen injection systems 225 12.9.1 Basic principles 225 12.9.2 Where to install the injection system 225 12.9.3 Evaluation of methods for injecting oxygen gas 227 12.9.4 Examples of oxygen injection system designs 227 12.10 Oxygen gas characteristics 231 12.11 Sources of oxygen 231 12.11.1 Oxygen gas 231 12.11.2 Liquid oxygen 232 12.11.3 On‐site oxygen production 234 12.11.4 Selection of source 235 References 236 13 Removal of Ammonia and Other Nitrogen Connections from Water 239 13.1 Introduction 239 13.1.1 Nitrogen connections 239 13.1.2 Total nitrogen: Kjeldahl nitrogen 239 13.1.3 Amount of NH3 in the water is pH dependent 239 13.1.4 NH4+‐N 240 13.1.5 Nitrogen, a part of a cycle 241 13.1.6 Measurement of nitrogen compounds 241 13.1.7 Reference values for aquaculture 241 13.2 Biological removal of ammonium ion 242 13.3 Nitrification 242 13.4 Construction of nitrification filters 244 13.4.1 Flow‐through system 244 13.4.2 The filter medium in the biofilter 245 13.4.3 Rotating biofilter (biodrum) 246 13.4.4 Moving bed bioreactor (MBBR) 246 13.4.5 Granular filters/bead filters 248 13.5 Management of biological filters 248 13.6 Example of biofilter design 248 13.7 Denitrification 249 13.8 Other bacteria cultures 250 13.9 Inoculation and boosting of biological filters 251 13.10 Chemical removal of ammonia 251 13.10.1 Principle 251 13.10.2 Construction 251 13.11 Other methods 253 References 253 14 Recycling Aquaculture Systems: Traditional Recirculating Water Systems 257 14.1 Introduction 257 14.2 Advantages and disadvantages of re‐use systems 257 14.2.1 Advantages of re‐use systems 257 14.2.2 Disadvantages of re‐use systems 258 14.3 Definitions 259 14.3.1 Degree of re‐use 259 14.3.2 Water exchange in relation to amount of fish or to supplied amount of feed 260 14.3.3 Degree of purification 260 14.3.4 Intensity of the RAS 261 14.4 Theoretical models for construction of re‐use systems 261 14.4.1 Mass flow in the system 261 14.4.2 Water requirements of the system 261 14.4.3 Connection between outlet concentration, degree of re‐use and effectiveness of the water treatment system 262 14.5 Components in a re‐use system 264 14.5.1 Freshwater, brackish water and seawater RAS 267 14.6 Accumulation of substances, hydrogen sulphide problem and earthy taste removal 267 14.6.1 Accumulation of substances 267 14.6.2 Earthy taste removal 267 14.6.3 The hydrogen sulphide problem 268 14.7 Water maturation, disinfection and use of probiotics 269 14.8 Design of a re‐use system 270 14.9 Evaluation of performance of a RAS 272 References 273 15 Natural Systems, Integrated Aquaculture, Aquaponics, Biofloc 275 15.1 Characterization of production systems 275 15.2 Closing the nutrient loop 275 15.3 Re‐use of water: an interesting topic 275 15.4 Natural systems, polyculture, integrated systems 277 15.4.1 Integrated multitropic aquaculture 277 15.4.2 Biological purification of water: some basics 278 15.4.3 Examples of systems utilizing photoautotrophic organisms: aquaponics 279 15.4.4 Examples of systems utilizing heterotrophic bacteria: active sludge and bioflocs 279 15.4.5 The biofloc system 281 References 283 16 Production Units: A Classification 285 16.1 Introduction 285 16.2 Classification of production units 285 16.2.1 Intensive/extensive 288 16.2.2 Fully controlled/semi‐controlled 288 16.2.3 Land based/tidal based/sea based 288 16.2.4 Other 289 16.3 Possibilities for controlling environmental impact 290 17 Egg Storage and Hatching Equipment 291 17.1 Introduction 291 17.2 Systems where the eggs stay pelagic 292 17.2.1 The incubator 293 17.2.2 Water inlet and water flow 293 17.2.3 Water outlet 294 17.3 Systems where the eggs lie on the bottom 294 17.3.1 Systems where the eggs lie in the same unit from spawning to fry ready for start feeding 295 17.3.2 Systems where the eggs must be removed before hatching 298 17.3.3 Systems where storing, hatching and first feeding are carried out in the same unit 298 References 299 18 Tanks, Basins and Other Closed Production Units 301 18.1 Introduction 301 18.2 Types of closed production unit 301 18.3 How much water should be supplied? 303 18.4 Water exchange rate 304 18.5 Ideal or non‐ideal mixing and water exchange 305 18.6 Tank design 306 18.7 Flow pattern and self‐cleaning 308 18.8 Water inlet design 310 18.9 Water outlet or drain 312 18.10 Dual drain 314 18.11 Other installations 315 References 315 19 Ponds 317 19.1 Introduction 317 19.2 The ecosystem 317 19.3 Different production ponds 318 19.4 Pond types 320 19.4.1 Construction principles 320 19.4.2 Drainable or non‐drainable 320 19.5 Size and construction 321 19.6 Site selection 322 19.7 Water supply 322 19.8 The inlet 322 19.9 The outlet: drainage 323 19.10 Pond layout 324 References 325 20 Sea Cages 327 20.1 Introduction 327 20.2 Site selection 328 20.3 Environmental factors affecting a floating construction 329 20.3.1 Waves 329 20.3.2 Wind 336 20.3.3 Current 336 20.3.4 Ice 338 20.3.5 Site classification 339 20.4 Construction of sea cages 339 20.4.1 Cage collar or framework 340 20.4.2 Weighting and stretching 341 20.4.3 Net bags 342 20.4.4 Breakwaters 346 20.4.5 Examples of cage constructions 347 20.5 Mooring systems 351 20.5.1 Design of the mooring system 352 20.5.2 Description of the single components in a pre‐stressed mooring system 354 20.5.3 Examples of mooring systems in use 360 20.6 Calculation of forces on a sea cage farm 360 20.6.1 Types of force 362 20.6.2 Calculation of current forces 363 20.6.3 Calculation of wave forces 367 20.6.4 Calculation of wind forces 367 20.6.5 Calculation of weight on materials in water 368 20.7 Calculation of the size of the mooring system 368 20.7.1 Mooring analysis 368 20.7.2 Calculation of sizes for mooring lines 369 20.8 Control of mooring systems 371 References 371 21 Feeding Systems 375 21.1 Introduction 375 21.1.1 Why use automatic feeding systems? 375 21.1.2 What can be automated? 375 21.1.3 Selection of feeding system 375 21.1.4 Feeding system requirements 376 21.2 Types of feeding equipment 376 21.2.1 Feed blowers 376 21.2.2 Feed dispensers 376 21.2.3 Demand feeders 378 21.2.4 Automatic feeders 378 21.2.5 Feeding systems 383 21.3 Feed control 385 21.4 Feed control systems 385 21.5 Dynamic feeding systems 386 References 386 22 Internal Transport and Size Grading 389 22.1 Introduction 389 22.2 The importance of fish handling 390 22.2.1 Why move the fish? 390 22.2.2 Why size grade? 391 22.3 Negative effects of handling the fish 394 22.4 Methods and equipment for internal transport 395 22.4.1 Moving fish with a supply of external energy 395 22.4.2 Methods for moving fish without the need for external energy 405 22.5 Methods and equipment for size grading of fish 406 22.5.1 Equipment for grading that requires an energy supply 406 22.5.2 Methods for voluntary grading (self‐grading) 416 References 416 23 Transport of Live Fish 419 23.1 Introduction 419 23.2 Preparation for transport 419 23.3 Land transport 420 23.3.1 Land vehicles 420 23.3.2 The tank 420 23.3.3 Supply of oxygen 421 23.3.4 Changing the water 422 23.3.5 Density 422 23.3.6 Instrumentation and stopping procedures 423 23.4 Sea transport 423 23.4.1 Well boats 423 23.4.2 The well 424 23.4.3 Density 425 23.4.4 Instrumentation 425 23.4.5 Recent trends in well boat technology 426 23.5 Air transport 426 23.6 Other transport methods 427 23.7 Cleaning and re‐use of water 428 23.8 Use of additives 429 References 429 24 Instrumentation and Monitoring 431 24.1 Introduction 431 24.2 Construction of measuring instruments 432 24.3 Instruments for measuring water quality 432 24.3.1 Measuring temperature 433 24.3.2 Measuring oxygen content of the water 433 24.3.3 Measuring pH 434 24.3.4 Measuring conductivity and salinity 435 24.3.5 Measuring total gas pressure and nitrogen saturation 435 24.3.6 Spectrophotometers for water analysis 436 24.3.7 Other 439 24.4 Instruments for measuring physical conditions 439 24.4.1 Measuring the water flow 440 24.4.2 Measuring water pressure 442 24.4.3 Measuring water level 443 24.5 Equipment for counting fish, measuring fish size and estimation of total biomass 444 24.5.1 Counting fish 444 24.5.2 Measuring fish size and total fish biomass 445 24.6 Monitoring systems 448 24.6.1 Sensors and measuring equipment 449 24.6.2 Monitoring centre 449 24.6.3 Warning equipment 451 24.6.4 Regulation equipment 451 24.6.5 Maintenance and control 451 24.7 Remotely operated vehicle (ROV) technology 451 References 452 25 Buildings and Superstructures 455 25.1 Why use buildings? 455 25.2 Types, shape and roof design 455 25.2.1 Types 455 25.2.2 Shape 456 25.2.3 Roof design 457 25.3 Load‐carrying systems 457 25.4 Materials 458 25.5 Prefabricate or build on site? 460 25.6 Insulated or not? 460 25.7 Foundations and ground conditions 461 25.8 Design of major parts 461 25.8.1 Floors 461 25.8.2 Walls 462 25.9 Ventilation and climate control 463 References 465 26 Design and Construction of Aquaculture Facilities: Some Examples 467 26.1 Introduction 467 26.2 Land‐based hatchery, juvenile and on‐growing production plant utilizing flow‐through technology 467 26.2.1 General 467 26.2.2 Water intake and transfer 468 26.2.3 Water treatment department 477 26.2.4 Production rooms 479 26.2.5 Feed storage 483 26.2.6 Disinfection barrier 484 26.2.7 Other rooms 484 26.2.8 Outlet water treatment 484 26.2.9 Important equipment 484 26.3 Land‐based juvenile and on‐growing production plant utilizing RAS technology 486 26.3.1 Introduction 486 26.3.2 Fish tanks and production department 488 26.3.3 Water treatment department 489 26.3.4 Retention time and number of turnover per day 492 26.3.5 Heating/chilling 493 26.3.6 H2S problem 493 26.3.7 Sludge treatment system 493 26.3.8 Fish handling 494 26.3.9 Others 494 26.4 On‐growing production, sea cage farms 494 26.4.1 General 494 26.4.2 Site selection 494 26.4.3 The cages and the fixed equipment 495 26.4.4 The base station 498 26.4.5 Net handling 499 26.4.6 Boat 500 References 501 27 Planning Aquaculture Facilities 503 27.1 Introduction 503 27.2 The planning process 504 27.3 Site selection 504 27.4 Production plan 505 27.5 Room programme 505 27.6 Necessary analyses 505 27.7 Drawing up alternative solutions 508 27.8 Evaluation of and choosing between the alternative solutions 511 27.9 Finishing plans, detailed planning 511 27.10 Function test of the plant 511 27.11 Project review 511 References 511 Index 513

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn invaluable source of up-to-date information on all major aspects of weed persistence Weeds negatively impact crop yields, the quality of agricultural produce, the health of livestock and ecosystems, and various aspects of human life. Despite significant expenditures of time, money, and resources by agricultural producers, land managers, and the general public, weeds persist. Developing new methods for protecting crops and the environment requires a thorough understanding of the persistence mechanisms of weeds. In Persistence Strategies of Weeds, an international team of expert authors provide detailed information on weed seed biology, identify the vulnerabilities of different weeds, and address the underlying issues behind the problem of weed persistence despite various management methods including herbicides. Presenting a comprehensive approach to the subject, the authors describe what is already understood about weed persistence and what yet needs to be determined. Topics incluTable of ContentsChapter 1 Persistence Strategies of Weeds Chapter 2 Seed Production, Dissemination, and Weed Seedbanks Chapter 3 Weed Seed Dormancy and Persistence of Weeds Chapter 4 Seed Dormancy Genes and Their Associated Adaptive Traits Underlie Weed Persistence Chapter 5 Environmental Regulation of Weed Seedbanks and Seedling Emergence Chapter 6 Longevity of Weed Seeds in Seedbanks Chapter 7 Evolution and Persistence of Herbicide-Resistant Weeds Chapter 8 Seed Predation and Weed Seedbanks Chapter 9 Modelling the Persistence of Weed Populations Chapter 10 Influence of Agronomic Practices on the Persistence of Weed Seedbanks Chapter 11 Clonal Growth, Resprouting, and Vegetative Propagation of Weeds Chapter 12 Climate Change and the Persistence of Weeds Chapter 13 Soil Microbial Effects on Weed Seedbank Persistence Chapter 14 The Potential Role of Allelopathy in the Persistence of Invasive Weeds Chapter 15 Weed Adaptation as a Driving Force for Weed Persistence in Agroecosystems Chapter 16 Persistence Strategies of Weeds Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisDIATOM GLIDING MOTILITY Moving photosynthetic organisms are still a great mystery for biologists and this book summarizes what is known and reports the current understanding and modeling of those complex processes. The book covers a broad range of work describing our current state of understanding on the topic, including: historic knowledge and misconceptions of motility; evolution of diatom motility; diatom ecology & physiology; cell biology and biochemistry of diatom motility, anatomy of motile diatoms; observations of diatom motile behavior; diatom competitive ability, unique forms of diatom motility as found in the genus Eunotia; and models of motility. This is the first book attempting to gather such information surrounding diatom motility into one volume focusing on this single topic. Readers will be able to gather both the current state of understanding on the potential mechanisms and ecological regulators of motility, as well as possible models anTable of ContentsPreface xxvii 1 Some Observations of Movements of Pennate Diatoms in Cultures and Their Possible Interpretation 1Thomas Harbich 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Kinematics and Analysis of Trajectories in Pennate Diatoms with Almost Straight Raphe along the Apical Axis 3 1.3 Curvature of the Trajectory at the Reversal Points 9 1.4 Movement of Diatoms in and on Biofilms 13 1.5 Movement on the Water Surface 16 1.6 Formation of Flat Colonies in Cymbella lanceolata 23 1.7 Conclusion 29 References 29 2 The Kinematics of Explosively Jerky Diatom Motility: A Natural Example of Active Nanofluidics 33Ahmet C. Sabuncu, Richard Gordon, Edmond Richer, Kalina M. Manoylov and Ali Beskok 2.1 Introduction 34 2.2 Material and Methods 35 2.2.1 Diatom Preparation 35 2.2.2 Imaging System 35 2.2.3 Sample Preparation 36 2.2.4 Image Processing 36 2.3 Results and Discussion 41 2.3.1 Comparison of Particle Tracking Algorithms 41 2.3.2 Stationary Particles 42 2.3.3 Diatom Centroid Measurements 43 2.3.4 Diatom Orientation Angle Measurements 46 2.3.5 Is Diatom Motion Characterized by a Sequence of Small Explosive Movements? 49 2.3.6 Future Work 50 2.4 Conclusions 51 Appendix 52 References 59 3 Cellular Mechanisms of Raphid Diatom Gliding 65Yekaterina D. Bedoshvili and Yelena V. Likhoshway 3.1 Introduction 65 3.2 Gliding and Secretion of Mucilage 67 3.3 Cell Mechanisms of Mucilage Secretion 68 3.4 Mechanisms of Gliding Regulation 71 3.5 Conclusions 72 Acknowledgments 72 References 73 4 Motility of Biofilm-Forming Benthic Diatoms 77Karen Grace Bondoc-Naumovitz and Stanley A. Cohn 4.1 Introduction 77 4.2 General Motility Models and Concepts 86 4.2.1 Adhesion 87 4.2.2 Gliding Motility 89 4.2.3 Motility and Environmental Responsiveness 91 4.3 Light-Directed Vertical Migration 93 4.4 Stimuli-Directed Movement 94 4.4.1 Nutrient Foraging 94 4.4.2 Pheromone-Based Mate-Finding Motility 97 4.4.3 Prioritization Between Co-Occurring Stimuli 99 4.5 Conclusion 99 References 100 5 Photophobic Responses of Diatoms – Motility and Inter-Species Modulation 111Stanley A. Cohn, Lee Warnick and Blake Timmerman 5.1 Introduction 112 5.2 Types of Observed Photoresponses 112 5.2.1 Light Spot Accumulation 112 5.2.2 High-Intensity Light Responses 114 5.3 Inter-Species Effects of Light Responses 118 5.3.1 Inter-Species Effects on High Irradiance Direction Change Response 119 5.3.2 Inter-Species Effects on Cell Accumulation into Light Spots 123 5.4 Summary 123 References 131 6 Diatom Biofilms: Ecosystem Engineering and Niche Construction 135David M. Paterson and Julie A. Hope 6.1 Introduction 135 6.1.1 Diatoms: A Brief Portfolio 135 6.1.2 Benthic Diatoms as a Research Challenge 136 6.2 The Microphytobenthos and Epipelic Diatoms 136 6.3 The Ecological Importance of Locomotion 137 6.4 Ecosystem Engineering and Functions 139 6.4.1 Ecosystem Engineering 139 6.4.2 Ecosystem Functioning 140 6.5 Microphytobenthos as Ecosystem Engineers 141 6.5.1 Sediment Stabilization 141 6.5.2 Beyond the Benthos 143 6.5.3 Diatom Architects 144 6.5.4 Working with Others: Combined Effects 144 6.5.5 The Dynamic of EPS 145 6.5.6 Nutrient Turnover and Biogeochemistry 145 6.6 Niche Construction and Epipelic Diatoms 146 6.7 Conclusion 149 Acknowledgments 150 References 150 7 Diatom Motility: Mechanisms, Control and Adaptive Value 159João Serôdio 7.1 Introduction 159 7.2 Forms and Mechanisms of Motility in Diatoms 160 7.2.1 Motility in Centric Diatoms 160 7.2.2 Motility in Pennate Raphid Diatoms 161 7.2.3 Motility in Other Substrate-Associated Diatoms 162 7.2.4 Vertical Migration in Diatom-Dominated Microphytobenthos 163 7.3 Controlling Factors of Diatom Motility 164 7.3.1 Motility Responses to Vectorial Stimuli 164 7.3.1.1 Light Intensity 164 7.3.1.2 Light Spectrum 165 7.3.1.3 UV Radiation 166 7.3.1.4 Gravity 166 7.3.1.5 Chemical Gradients 167 7.3.2 Motility Responses to Non-Vectorial Stimuli 167 7.3.2.1 Temperature 167 7.3.2.2 Salinity 168 7.3.2.3 pH 168 7.3.2.4 Calcium 168 7.3.2.5 Other Factors 169 7.3.2.6 Inhibitors of Diatom Motility 169 7.3.3 Species-Specific Responses and Interspecies Interactions 169 7.3.4 Endogenous Control of Motility 170 7.3.5 A Model of Diatom Vertical Migration Behavior in Sediments 170 7.4 Adaptive Value and Consequences of Motility 172 7.4.1 Planktonic Centrics 172 7.4.2 Benthic Pennates 173 7.4.3 Ecological Consequences of Vertical Migration 175 7.4.3.1 Motility-Enhanced Productivity 175 7.4.3.2 Carbon Cycling and Sediment Biostabilization 176 Acknowledgments 176 References 176 8 Motility in the Diatom Genus Eunotia Ehrenb. 185Paula C. Furey 8.1 Introduction 185 8.2 Accounts of Movement in Eunotia 188 8.3 Motility in the Context of Valve Structure 194 8.3.1 Motility and Morphological Characteristics in Girdle View 194 8.3.2 Motility and Morphological Characteristics in Valve View 196 8.3.3 Motility and the Rimoportula 198 8.4 Motility and Ecology of Eunotia 198 8.4.1 Substratum-Associated Environments 199 8.4.2 Planktonic Environments 201 8.5 Motility and Diatom Evolution 202 8.6 Conclusion and Future Directions 203 Acknowledgements 204 References 205 9 A Free Ride: Diatoms Attached on Motile Diatoms 211Vincent Roubeix and Martin Laviale 9.1 Introduction 211 9.2 Adhesion and Distribution of Epidiatomic Diatoms on Their Host 213 9.3 The Specificity of Host-Epiphyte Interactions 215 9.4 Cost-Benefit Analysis of Host-Epiphyte Interactions 217 9.5 Conclusion 219 References 219 10 Towards a Digital Diatom: Image Processing and Deep Learning Analysis of Bacillaria paradoxa Dynamic Morphology 223Bradly Alicea, Richard Gordon, Thomas Harbich, Ujjwal Singh, Asmit Singh and Vinay Varma 10.1 Introduction 224 10.1.1 Organism Description 224 10.1.2 Research Motivation 227 10.2 Methods 228 10.2.1 Video Extraction 228 10.2.2 Deep Learning 230 10.2.3 DeepLabv3 Analysis 234 10.2.4 Primary Dataset Analysis 234 10.2.5 Data Availability 235 10.3 Results 235 10.3.1 Watershed Segmentation and Canny Edge Detection 235 10.3.2 Deep Learning 236 10.4 Conclusion 243 Acknowledgments 245 References 245 11 Diatom Triboacoustics 249Ille C. Gebeshuber, Florian Zischka, Helmut Kratochvil, Anton Noll, Richard Gordon and Thomas Harbich Glossary 249 11.1 State-of-the-Art 251 11.1.1 Diatoms and Their Movement 251 11.1.2 The Navier-Stokes Equation 252 11.1.3 Low Reynolds Number 253 11.1.4 Reynolds Number for Diatoms 254 11.1.5 Further Thoughts About Movement of Diatoms 254 11.1.6 Possible Reasons for Diatom Movement 255 11.1.7 Underwater Acoustics, Hydrophones 256 11.1.7.1 Underwater Acoustics 256 11.1.7.2 Hydrophones 257 11.2 Methods 257 11.2.1 Estimate of the Momentum of a Moving Diatom 257 11.2.2 On the Speed of Expansion of the Mucopolysaccharide Filaments 258 11.2.2.1 Estimation of Radial Expansion 258 11.2.2.2 Sound Generation 261 11.2.3 Gathering Diatoms 266 11.2.3.1 Purchasing Diatom Cultures 267 11.2.3.2 Diatoms from the Wild 267 11.2.4 Using a Hydrophone to Detect Possible Acoustic Signals from Diatoms 269 11.2.4.1 First Setup 269 11.2.4.2 Second Setup 271 11.3 Results and Discussion 272 11.3.1 Spectrograms 272 11.3.2 Discussion 277 11.4 Conclusions and Outlook 277 Acknowledgements 279 References 279 12 Movements of Diatoms VIII: Synthesis and Hypothesis 283Jean Bertrand 12.1 Introduction 283 12.2 Review of the Conditions Necessary for Movements 284 12.3 Hypothesis 285 12.4 Analysis – Comparison with Observations 288 12.4.1 Translational Apical Movement 288 12.4.2 The Transapical Toppling Movement 290 12.4.3 Diverse Pivoting 290 12.5 Conclusion 291 Acknowledgments 292 References 292 13 Locomotion of Benthic Pennate Diatoms: Models and Thoughts 295Jiadao Wang, Ding Weng, Lei Chen and Shan Cao 13.1 Diatom Structure 295 13.1.1 Ultrastructure of Frustules 295 13.1.2 Bending Ability of Diatoms 297 13.2 Models for Diatom Locomotion 300 13.2.1 Edgar Model for Diatom Locomotion 300 13.2.2 Van der Waals Force Model (VW Model) for Diatom Locomotion 302 13.2.2.1 Locomotion Behavior of Diatoms 302 13.2.2.2 Moving Organelles and Pseudopods 304 13.2.2.3 Chemical Properties of Mucilage Trails 307 13.2.2.4 Mechanical Properties of Mucilage Trails 310 13.2.2.5 VW Model for Diatom Locomotion 314 13.3 Locomotion and Aggregation of Diatoms 319 13.3.1 Locomotion Trajectory and Parameters of Diatoms 319 13.4 Simulation on Locomotion, Aggregation and Mutual Perception of Diatoms 323 13.4.1 Simulation Area and Parameters 323 13.4.2 Diatom Life Cycle and Modeling Parameters 323 13.4.3 Simulation Results of Diatom Locomotion Trajectory with Mutual Perception 326 13.4.4 Simulation Results of Diatom Adhesion with Mutual Perception 327 13.4.5 Adhesion and Aggregation Mechanism of Diatoms 331 References 332 14 The Whimsical History of Proposed Motors for Diatom Motility 335Richard Gordon 14.1 Introduction 336 14.2 Historical Survey of Models for the Diatom Motor 338 14.2.1 Diatoms Somersault via Protruding Muscles (1753) 338 14.2.2 Vibrating Feet or Protrusions Move Diatoms (1824) 338 14.2.3 Diatoms Crawl Like Snails (1838) 342 14.2.4 The Diatom Motor is a Jet Engine (1849) 344 14.2.5 Rowing Diatoms (1855) 346 14.2.6 Diatoms Have Protoplasmic Tank Treads (1865) 350 14.2.7 Diatoms as the Flame of Life: Capillarity (1883) 354 14.2.8 Bellowing Diatoms (1887) 355 14.2.9 Jelly Powered Jet Skiing Diatoms (1896) 355 14.2.10 Bubble Powered Diatoms (1905) 358 14.2.11 Diatoms Win: “I Have No New Theory to Offer and See No Reason to Use Those Already Abandoned” (1940) 360 14.2.12 Is Diatom Motility a Special Case of Cytoplasmic Streaming? (1943) 360 14.2.13 Diatom Adhesion as a Sliding Toilet Plunger (1966) 365 14.2.14 Diatom as a Monorail that Lays Its Own Track (1967) 366 14.2.15 The Diatom as a “Compressed Air” Coanda Effect Gliding Vehicle (1967) 368 14.2.16 The Electrokinetic Diatom (1974) 371 14.2.17 The Diatom Clothes Line or Railroad Track (1980) 372 14.2.18 Diatom Ion Cyclotron Resonance (1987) 374 14.2.19 Diatoms Do Internal Treadmilling (1998) 375 14.2.20 Surface Treadmilling, Swimming and Snorkeling Diatoms (2007) 376 14.2.21 Acoustic Streaming: The Diatom as Vibrator or Jack Hammer (2010) 378 14.2.22 Propulsion of Diatoms Via Many Small Explosions (2020) 379 14.2.23 Diatoms Walk Like Geckos (2019) 380 14.3 Pulling What We Know and Don’t Know Together, about the Diatom Motor 381 14.4 Membrane Surfing: A New Working Hypothesis for the Diatom Motor (2020) 393 Acknowledgments 397 References 397 Appendix 420 Index 421

Read more less

Book SynopsisRecent Advances in Micro- and Macroalgal Processing A comprehensive review of algae as novel and sustainable sources of algal ingredients, their extraction and processingThis comprehensive text offers an in-depth exploration of the research and issues surrounding the consumption, economics, composition, processing and health effects of algae. With contributions from an international team of experts, the book explores the application of conventional and emerging technologies for algal processing. The book includes recent developments such as drying and milling technologies along with advancements in sustainable greener techniques.The text also highlights individual groups of compounds including polysaccharides, proteins, polyphenols, carotenoids, lipids and fibres from algae. The authors provide insightful reviews of the traditional and more recent applications of algae/algal extracts in food, feed, pharmaceutical and cosmetics products. Offering a holistic view oTable of ContentsAcknowledgments v About the IFST Advances in Food Science Book Series xvii List of Contributors xix Preface xxiii Section I Composition and Extraction Technologies For Algal Bioactives 1 Algae: A Functional Food with a Rich History and Future Superfood 3Gaurav Rajauria, and Yvonne V. Yuan 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 History of Macro- and Microalgae Consumption 4 1.3 Economic Relevance of Macro- and Microalgae 6 1.4 Book Objectives 7 1.5 Book Structure 7 References 11 2 Influence of Seasonal Variation on Chemical Composition and Nutritional Profiles of Macro- and Microalgae 14K. Suresh Kumar, Sushma Kumari, Kamleshwar Singh, and Pratibha Kushwaha 2.1 Introduction 14 2.2 Influence of Seasonal Variation on Biochemical Composition of Micro- and Macroalgae 22 2.3 Pigments 24 2.4 Carbohydrates/Polysaccharides 31 2.5 Fiber Content 36 2.6 Proteins 38 2.6.1 Mycosporine-Like Amino Acids (MAAs) 46 2.6.2 Phycobiliproteins and Lectins 47 2.7 Lipids and PUFAs 48 2.8 Inorganic Elements and Minerals 52 2.9 Vitamins 56 2.10 Phenolic Compounds 57 2.11 Other Compounds 59 2.12 Conclusion 59 References 60 3 Advances in Drying and Milling Technologies for Algae 72K.Y. Show, Y.G. Yan, and Duu-Jong Lee 3.1 Introduction 72 3.2 Algal Cell Drying Technologies 74 3.2.1 Solar Drying 74 3.2.2 Oven Drying 76 3.2.3 Freeze Drying 77 3.2.4 Rotary Drum Drying 77 3.2.5 Incinerator Drying 78 3.2.6 Spray Drying 78 3.2.7 Heat Circulation Drying 79 3.2.8 Microwave Drying 80 3.2.9 Polypropylene Nonwoven Membrane Drying 80 3.2.10 Refractance Window® Drying 81 3.3 Algal Cell Milling Technologies 81 3.3.1 Vortex-Bead Milling 81 3.3.2 Shake-Bead Milling 83 3.3.3 High-Pressure Homogenization 84 3.3.4 High-Speed Homogenization 86 3.3.5 Liquid Nitrogen Grinding 86 3.4 Challenges and Prospects 87 3.4.1 Processing Technology 87 3.4.2 Energy Requirement 87 3.4.3 Product Quality 88 3.4.4 Environmental Impacts 88 3.4.5 Future Directions 89 3.5 Conclusion 89 References 89 4 Recent Advances in the Use of Greener Extraction Technologies for the Recovery of Valuable Bioactive Compounds from Algae 96Marco Garcia-Vaquero, Torres Sweeney, John O’Doherty, and Gaurav Rajauria 4.1 Introduction 96 4.2 Green Extraction Technologies and Applications 98 4.2.1 Pulsed Electric Field (PEF) 98 4.2.2 Supercritical Fluid Extraction (SFE) 101 4.2.3 Pressurized Liquid Extraction (PLE) 106 4.2.4 Microwave Assisted Extraction (MAE) 108 4.2.5 Ultrasound Assisted Extraction (UAE) 110 4.3 Combination Techniques 112 4.4 Challenges and Future Perspectives 115 Acknowledgments 116 References 116 5 Extraction Technologies for Functional Lipids 123Calle Niemi and Francesco G. Gentili 5.1 Introduction 123 5.2 Conventional Extraction Techniques for Functional Lipids 124 5.3 Application of Novel Extraction Technologies for Functional Lipids 127 5.3.1 Algal Cell Disruption Methods 127 5.3.2 Novel Extraction Methods 129 5.4 Future Recommendations 134 Acknowledgments 134 References 135 6 Extraction Technologies for Proteins and Peptides 141Ariane Tremblay and Lucie Beaulieu 6.1 Introduction 141 6.2 Conventional Extraction Techniques for Proteins and Peptides 144 6.2.1 Cell Disruption Methods 144 6.2.2 Chemical Extraction 147 6.2.3 Enzymatic Processes 148 6.2.4 Recovery/Enrichment Techniques 149 6.2.5 Protein Extraction Methods in Proteomics 150 6.3 Emerging Technologies for Proteins and Peptides 151 6.3.1 Microwave Assisted Extraction (MAE) 151 6.3.2 Pulsed Arc Technology 151 6.3.3 Pressurized Liquid Extraction (PLE) 153 6.3.4 Sub- and Supercritical Fluid Extraction (SFE) 153 6.3.5 High Hydrostatic Pressure (HHP) and Ultra-high Pressure Extraction (UHP) 154 6.4 Conclusion and Future Outlook 154 References 155 7 Extraction Technologies to Recover Dietary Polyphenols from Macro- and Microalgae 163M. Shanmugam, Abirami Ramu Ganesan, and Gaurav Rajauria 7.1 Introduction 163 7.2 Conventional Extraction Techniques for Polyphenols 164 7.2.1 Liquid-Liquid Extraction (LLE) 165 7.2.2 Solid-Liquid Extraction (SLE) 165 7.3 Innovative Extraction Technologies for Isolation of Polyphenols from Macroalgae 166 7.3.1 Enzyme-Assisted Extraction (EAE) 166 7.3.2 Microwave Assisted Extraction (MAE) 169 7.3.3 Pressurized Liquid Extraction (PLE) 170 7.3.4 Subcritical Water Extraction (SWE) 171 7.3.5 Supercritical Fluid Extraction (SFE) 174 7.3.6 Ultrasound Assisted Extraction (UAE) 176 7.4 Factors Affecting Extraction 178 7.4.1 pH 179 7.4.2 Solvents 180 7.5 Challenges and Future Recommendations 180 Acknowledgments 180 References 181 8 Extraction Technologies for Bioactive Polysaccharides 188Rashida Qari and Rajeev Ravindran 8.1 Introduction 188 8.2 Polysaccharides in Seaweed 189 8.3 Conventional Technologies for Polysaccharide Extraction 192 8.4 Advanced Technologies for Polysaccharide Extraction 200 8.4.1 Microwave Assisted Extraction (MAE) 200 8.4.2 Ultrasound Assisted Extraction (UAE) 201 8.4.3 Pressurized Liquid Extraction (PLE) 202 8.4.4 Enzyme Assisted Extraction (EAE) 203 8.5 Conclusion 203 References 203 Section II Biological Properties of Algal Derived Compounds 9 Potential Biological Activities Associated with Algal Derived Compounds 211Yvonne V. Yuan 9.1 Introduction 211 9.2 Antioxidant and Anticarcinogenic Activities of Macro- and Microalgal Constituents 213 9.2.1 Mycosporine-like Amino Acids (MAAs) 214 9.2.2 Scytonemins 218 9.2.3 Pterins 220 9.2.4 Carotenes and Xanthophylls 221 9.3 Antiobesogenic Biological Activities of Macroalgal Constituents 224 9.4 Antidiabetic Biological Activities of Macroalgal Constituents 224 9.5 Prebiotic Biological Activities of Macroalgal Constituents 226 9.6 Immune System Biological Activities of Macroalgal Constituents 227 9.7 Conclusion and Future Work 227 Acknowledgments 227 References 228 10 Algal Polysaccharides and Their Biological Properties 231Kit-Leong Cheong, Valentina Jesumani, Bilal Muhammad Khan, Yang Liu, and Hong Du 10.1 Introduction 231 10.2 Structure of Marine Algae Polysaccharides 232 10.2.1 Agar 234 10.2.2 Alginates 234 10.2.3 Carrageenan 235 10.2.4 Cellulose 235 10.2.5 Fucoidans 236 10.2.6 Laminarans 237 10.2.7 Mannans 238 10.2.8 Sulfated Rhamnans 239 10.2.9 Ulvans 239 10.2.10 Xylans 239 10.3 Isolation and Purification of Polysaccharides from Algae 240 10.3.1 Isolation 241 10.3.2 Purification 246 10.4 Health-Promoting Activities of MAP 248 10.4.1 Antioxidant Activity 249 10.4.2 Immunomodulatory Activity 253 10.4.3 Anticancer Activity 256 10.4.4 Antiviral Activity 257 10.4.5 Antihyperlipidemic Activity 260 10.4.6 Anticoagulant Activity 261 10.4.7 Antimicrobial Activity 262 10.5 Conclusion and Future Trends 263 References 264 11 Marine Algal Derived Phenolic Compounds and their Biological Activities for Medicinal and Cosmetic Applications 278Leslie Gager, Fanny Lalegerie, Solène Connan, and Valérie Stiger-Pouvreau 11.1 Introduction 278 11.2 Types and Structures of Phenolic Compounds from Algae 280 11.2.1 Phenolic Compounds from Marine Cyanobacteria and Microalgae 281 11.2.2 Phenolic Compounds from Green and Red Macroalgae 282 11.2.3 Phenolic Compounds from Brown Macroalgae 283 11.2.4 Variability of Phenolic Content in Space and Time 284 11.3 Isolation and Purification of Phenolic Compounds from Algae 285 11.3.1 Importance of the Pretreatment of the Biomass 285 11.3.2 Extraction Procedures 286 11.3.3 Quantification and Analyses of Phenolic Compounds 289 11.4 Biological Properties of Phenolic Compounds in Health, Well-Being, and Cosmetics 290 11.4.1 Antioxidant Properties 290 11.4.2 Antiallergenic and Anti-inflammatory Properties 293 11.4.3 Antidiabetic, Antiobesity Properties and Cardiovascular Protection 296 11.4.4 Antiproliferative and Anticancer Properties 298 11.4.5 Antimicrobial and Antiparasite Properties 299 11.4.6 Antiviral Activities 301 11.4.7 Mineralogenic and Osteogenic Activities 302 11.4.8 Photoprotective Properties 303 11.4.9 Biological Properties Specific to Cosmetics or Cosmeceuticals 304 11.5 Potential Commercial Applications 306 11.5.1 Interest in Health and Nutraceutical Ingredients 306 11.5.2 Interest in Cosmetics and Cosmeceutical Ingredients 307 11.6 Conclusions and Future Trends 308 Acknowledgments 310 References 310 12 Algal Carotenoids: Recovery and their Potential in Disease Prevention 335V. Sivamurugan, D. Radhika, Abirami Ramu Ganesan, and S. Murugesan 12.1 Introduction 335 12.2 Types and Structure of Carotenoids in Microalgae 337 12.2.1 General Occurrence 337 12.2.2 Carotenoids Isolated from Seaweeds 337 12.3 Isolation and Purification of Carotenoids from Algae 343 12.3.1 Conventional SLE 343 12.3.2 Microwave and Ultrasound Promoted Extraction 344 12.3.3 SCF Extraction 345 12.3.4 Adsorbent Assisted Carotenoid Extraction 346 12.3.5 Ionic Liquid Mediated Carotenoid Extraction 347 12.3.6 Surfactant Assisted Extraction Method 347 12.4 Biological Properties of Carotenoids and Possible Health Effects 349 12.4.1 Cancer Prevention 349 12.4.2 Antioxidant Activities 350 12.4.3 Antidiabetic Activity 351 12.4.4 Skin Diseases 352 12.4.5 Antimicrobial Activities 352 12.4.6 Wound Healing 353 12.4.7 Miscellaneous Biological Activities 353 12.5 Potential Commercial Applications 354 12.5.1 Microalgal Carotenoids in Commercial Applications 355 12.5.2 Commercial Applications of Astaxanthin and Lutein 355 12.5.3 Macroalgal Carotenoids in Commercial Applications 356 12.5.4 Nutraceutical Supplements 357 12.5.5 Commercial Application of Algal Carotenoids in Feed 357 12.6 Conclusions and Future Recommendations 358 Acknowledgments 358 References 358 13 Algal Derived Functional Lipids and their Role in Promoting Health 370Nolwenn Terme, Benoît Chénais, Mathilde Fournière, Nathalie Bourgougnon, and Gilles Bedoux 13.1 Introduction 370 13.2 Types and Structures of Fatty Acids from Algae 371 13.3 Isolation and Purification of FAs from Algae 378 13.3.1 Isolation of FAs from Algae 378 13.3.2 Purification of FAs from Algae 378 13.4 Health Properties of FAs 384 13.4.1 Lipids, FAs from Seaweeds and Cosmetic or Cosmeceutical Uses 384 13.4.2 Preventive Effects of n-3 PUFAs on CVD and Metabolic Syndrome 387 13.4.3 Contribution of n-3 PUFAs in Cancer Risk Factor Prevention and/or Therapy 390 13.4.4 Antiviral Activities 396 13.5 Potential Commercial Applications 396 13.6 Conclusion and Future Trends 397 Acknowledgments 398 References 398 14 Algal Proteins and Peptides: Current Trends and Future Prospects 418Abirami Ramu Ganesan, Shanmugam Munisamy, Rajeev Bhat, Palaniappan Seedevi, Kannan Mohan, and Shingo Matsukawa 14.1 Introduction 418 14.2 Isolation and Purification of Proteins from Algae 419 14.3 Structural Characteristics of Micro- and Macroalgae Peptides 421 14.3.1 Structures of Peptides from Microalgae 421 14.3.2 Structure of Protein and Peptides from Macroalgae 423 14.4 Protein and Peptide Extraction Methods from Algae 424 14.4.1 Physical Processes 424 14.4.2 Enzymatic Hydrolysis 427 14.4.3 Enzyme Assisted Extraction (EAE) 428 14.4.4 Ultrasound Assisted Extraction 428 14.4.5 Pulsed Electric Field 429 14.4.6 Microwave Assisted Extraction 429 14.4.7 Membrane Filtration 430 14.4.8 High Hydrostatic Pressure (HHP) 430 14.5 Biological Properties of Micro- and Macroalgal Peptides and Possible Health Effects 431 14.5.1 Antihypertensive Peptides 431 14.5.2 Anticancer Peptides and Proteins 431 14.5.3 Antioxidant Micro- and Macroalgal Peptides 432 14.5.4 Anti-Inflammatory Peptides 432 14.5.5 Algal Proteins and Peptides on Immunomodulation 433 14.5.6 Antiobesity Peptides 434 14.5.7 Antidiabetic Proteins and Peptides 434 14.5.8 Antimicrobial Algal Peptides 435 14.5.9 Biological Value of Algal Proteins in Human Nutrition 435 14.6 Potential Commercial Applications of Micro- and Macroalgal Peptides and Proteins 436 14.6.1 Microalgae Peptides and Proteins in Commercial Applications 436 14.6.2 Macroalgal Peptides and Proteins in Commercial Applications 437 14.7 Conclusion and Future Recommendations 437 Acknowledgments 438 References 438 15 Algal Dietary Fiber and its Health Benefits 446Shakeel Ramzan, Muhammad Mushtaq, Sumia Akram, and Ahmad Adnan 15.1 Introduction 446 15.2 Dietary Fiber 447 15.2.1 Algae as a Source of Dietary Fiber 449 15.2.2 Marine Algal Polysaccharides 451 15.3 Physical Properties of Dietary Fiber (Dispersibility, Viscosity, Binding Capacity, Fermentability) 452 15.3.1 Dispersibility 452 15.3.2 Viscosity (η) 453 15.3.3 Binding Capacity 454 15.3.4 Fermentability 455 15.4 Therapeutic Effect of Algal Dietary Fibers 456 15.4.1 Antihypertensive Effects 456 15.4.2 Antiobesity Attributes 457 15.4.3 Diabetes Control 457 15.5 Potential Commercial Applications 458 15.6 Conclusion and Future Recommendations 459 References 460 Section III Application of Algae and Algal Components 16 Applications of Algae and Algae Extracts in Human Food and Feed 467Sara Amiri Samani, Maryam Jafari, Sayed Mohammad Sahafi, and Shahin Roohinejad 16.1 Introduction 467 16.2 Nutritional Composition of Algae 468 16.3 Application of Whole Algae in Food Products 468 16.3.1 Muscle-Based Foods 468 16.3.2 Dairy Products 469 16.3.3 Cereal-Based Food Products 471 16.3.4 Beverages 473 16.4 Application of Whole Algae in Feed 473 16.5 Algal Extracts as Ingredients in Food Products 475 16.5.1 Proteins 475 16.5.2 Polysaccharides 477 16.5.3 Lipids 478 16.5.4 Pigments 479 16.5.5 Phenolic Compounds 480 16.6 Conclusion and Future Recommendations 481 References 481 17 Role of Algal Compounds for Human Health 487Sidra Ehsan, Sumia Akram, Zohaib Saeed, Muhammad Pervaiz, and Muhammad Mushtaq 17.1 Introduction 487 17.2 Classification of Algae 488 17.2.1 Euglenophyta 488 17.2.2 Chrysophyta 489 17.2.3 Pyrrophyta 489 17.2.4 Chlorophyta (Green Algae) 489 17.2.5 Rhodophyta (Red Algae) 490 17.2.6 Phaeophyta (Brown Algae) 490 17.2.7 Xanthophyta 490 17.3 Proximate Composition of Algae 490 17.3.1 Algal Carbohydrates 490 17.3.2 Proteinaceous Biomolecules in Algae 494 17.3.3 Algal Lipids 496 17.3.4 Algal Minerals 499 17.3.5 Algal Vitamins 500 17.4 Commercial Importance of Macroalgae in Human Nutrition 500 References 502 18 Advancements in Algae in Nutraceutical and Functional Food 506Froylán M.E. Escalante and Daniel A. Pérez-Rico 18.1 Introduction 506 18.2 Algal Derived Molecules 507 18.2.1 Carbohydrates 507 18.2.2 Lipids 511 18.2.3 Proteins 513 18.2.4 Pigments 517 18.3 Perspectives 524 References 526 19 Role of Algal Derived Compounds in Pharmaceuticals and Cosmetics 537María Lourdes Mourelle, Carmen P. Gómez, and José L. Legido 19.1 Introduction 537 19.2 Algae as a Source of Active Ingredients for Pharmaceutical Products 538 19.2.1 Sulfated Polysaccharides and Other Phycocolloids 539 19.2.2 Phlorotannins and Other Polyphenols 549 19.2.3 Sterols 552 19.2.4 PUFAs and Other Lipidic Compounds 554 19.2.5 Carotenoids and Other Pigments 556 19.2.6 Peptides and Proteins 557 19.2.7 Other Bioactive Compounds 558 19.3 Potential Pharmaceutical Formulations from Algae 559 19.3.1 Potential Anticancer, Cytotoxic, and Antiproliferative Pharmaceutical Formulations 559 19.3.2 Potential Antithrombotic, Anticoagulant, and Antihypertensive Pharmaceutical Formulations 561 19.3.3 Potential Antilipidemic and Anticholesterolemic Pharmaceutical Formulations 562 19.3.4 Potential Antiobesity and Antidiabetic Pharmaceuticals Formulations 562 19.3.5 Potential Antibacterial, Antiviral, and Antifungal Pharmaceutical Formulations 564 19.3.6 Potential Immunomodulatory Anti-Inflammatory Pharmaceutical Formulations 565 19.3.7 Potential Neuroprotective Pharmaceutical Formulations for Healthy Nervous System 565 19.3.8 Other Potential Pharmacological Formulations from Algae 566 19.4 Algae as a Source of Active Ingredients for Cosmeceuticals 567 19.4.1 Polysaccharides 568 19.4.2 Phenols and Polyphenols 575 19.4.3 Terpenes 576 19.4.4 Pigments 576 19.4.5 PUFAs and Other Lipid Compounds 577 19.4.6 Proteins and Amino Acids 577 19.4.7 Other Compounds 578 19.4.8 Algal Extracts 579 19.5 Potential Cosmeceutical Formulations from Algae 580 19.5.1 Moisturizing Cosmeceutical Formulations 581 19.5.2 Antiaging and Photoageing Cosmeceutical Formulations 581 19.5.3 Skin Whitening Cosmeceutical Formulations 582 19.5.4 Other Potential Cosmeceutical Formulations 582 19.6 Conclusion and Future Trends 583 References 584 20 Economic Status of Seaweed: Production, Consumption, Commercial Applications, Hazards, and Legislations 604Anushree Priyadarshini, Akanksha Priyadarshini, and Gaurav Rajauria 20.1 Introduction 604 20.2 World Seaweed Utilization 605 20.2.1 World Seaweed Production 605 20.2.2 Trends in Seaweed Production and Consumption 605 20.2.3 Economic Relevance of Seaweed 610 20.3 Commercial Usage of Seaweed and Seaweed Functional Components 611 20.3.1 Food Applications of Seaweed 611 20.3.2 Nonfood Applications of Seaweed 612 20.4 Hazards Associated with Seaweed Applications 612 20.5 Legislation 613 20.6 Conclusion 614 References 614 Index 617

Read more less

Book SynopsisENERGY STORAGE Written and edited by a team of well-known and respected experts in the field, this new volume on energy storage presents the state-of-the-art developments and challenges in the field of renewable energy systems for sustainability and scalability for engineers, researchers, academicians, industry professionals, consultants, and designers. The world's energy landscape is very complex. Fossil fuels, especially because of hydraulic fracturing, are still a mainstay of global energy production, but renewable energy sources, such as wind, solar, and others, are increasing in importance for global energy sustainability. Experts and non-experts agree that the next game-changer in this area will be energy storage. Energy storage is crucial for continuous operation of power plants and can supplement basic power generation sources over a stand-alone system. It can enhance capacity and leads to greater security, including continuous electricity supply and other applications. A depenTable of ContentsList of Contributors xi Preface xiii 1 Thermal Energy Storage Systems for Concentrating Solar Power Plants 1 Dr. Pratibha Biswal 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Concentrating Solar Power (CSP) Technology 2 1.2.1 CSP Receiver Concepts 4 1.2.1.1 Parabolic Trough System 4 1.2.1.2 Linear Fresnel Reflector Systems 5 1.2.1.3 Central Receiver Plants 6 1.2.1.4 Dish System 7 1.3 Thermal Energy Storage in CSP 7 1.3.1 Active Two-Tank System 9 1.3.1.1 Active Two-Tank Direct 9 1.3.2 Active Single-Tank Thermocline 20 1.3.3 Other TES Systems 21 1.3.3.1 Packed-Bed Storage System 21 1.3.3.2 Passive Thermal Storage System 22 1.3.4 Types of Thermal Energy Storage (TES) 22 1.3.4.1 Sensible Energy Storage 22 1.3.4.2 Latent Heat Storage 24 1.3.4.3 Thermochemical Energy Storage 25 1.4 Corrosion Problem in TES-CSP System 26 1.5 Conclusion 26 References 27 2 Solar Thermal Power Plant with Thermal Energy Storage 31 Anil Kumar, Umakanta Sahoo and BK Jayasimha Rathod 2.1 Introduction 32 2.2 Literature Review 39 2.2.1 Power Installed Capacity of India 39 2.2.2 Energy Storage Systems 40 2.2.3 Thermal Storage Systems 40 2.3 Energy Demand of World 44 2.4 Experimental Set Up 48 2.4.1 Description of Experimental Set Ups 49 2.5 Experimental Data Analysis, Results and Discussions 55 2.5.1 Performance of Reflector Round the Year (Experimental Set up I) 58 2.5.1.1 Simulation Results 63 2.5.1.2 Typical PID of a Solar Module from ‘India One’ Solar Power Plant 66 2.5.1.3 Quantity of Steam to Turbine 67 2.6 Experimental Data Analysis, Results and Discussions 69 2.7 Conclusions 75 Symbols 76 Acknowledgement 77 References 77 3 Efficient Energy Storage Systems for Wind Power Application 81 Pradeep Kumar Sahu, Satyaranjan Jena and Umakanta Sahoo 3.1 Introduction 82 3.2 Energy Storage Devices 84 3.2.1 Electrical Energy Storage 84 3.2.1.1 Superconducting Magnetic Energy Storage (SMES) 85 3.2.1.2 Supercapacitors 86 3.2.2 Mechanical Energy Storage 87 3.2.2.1 Flywheel Energy Storage (FES) 87 3.2.2.2 Pumped Hydroelectric Storage (PHS) 88 3.2.2.3 Compressed Air Energy Storage 89 3.2.3 Chemical Energy Storage 89 3.2.3.1 Battery Storage System (BSS) 90 3.2.3.2 Fuel Cells 90 3.2.3.3 Solar Fuel 90 3.2.4 Thermal Energy Storage 93 3.3 Hybrid Energy Storage System (HESS) 93 3.4 Power Converter Topologies for Hybrid Energy Storage 95 3.4.1 Passive Topology 95 3.4.2 Semi-Active Topology 97 3.4.3 Active Topology 97 3.4.4 Comparison of Different Topologies 98 3.5 HESS Energy Management and Control 99 3.5.1 HESS Control Schemes 99 3.5.1.1 Classical Control Scheme 100 3.5.1.2 Intelligent Control Schemes 102 3.5.2 Comparison of Different Control Schemes 103 3.6 Applications of the Storage Technologies in Wind Power 104 3.6.1 Power Fluctuation Mitigation 104 3.6.2 Low Voltage Ride Through (LVRT) 105 3.6.3 Voltage Control Support 105 3.6.4 Oscillation Damping 106 3.6.5 Peak Shaving 106 3.6.6 Spinning Reserve 107 3.6.7 Time Shifting 108 3.6.8 Transmission Line Curtailment 108 3.6.9 Load Following 109 3.6.10 Unit Commitment 110 3.7 Conclusion 110 References 112 4 Advances in Electrochemical Energy Storage Device: Supercapacitor 119 Swagatika Kamila, Bikash Kumar Jena and Suddhasatwa Basu 4.1 Introduction 120 4.2 Types of Energy Storage Devices 120 4.3 Overview of Supercapacitor and Its Global Scenario 122 4.4 Status of Supercapacitor in India 125 4.5 Types of Supercapacitor According to the Energy Storage Mechanism 126 4.5.1 Electrical Double-Layer Capacitor (EDLC) 126 4.5.2 Pseudocapacitor 128 4.5.3 Hybrid Supercapacitor 129 4.5.3.1 Composite Supercapacitor 129 4.5.3.2 Asymmetric Supercapacitor 130 4.5.3.3 Battery Type 130 4.6 Basic Components of Supercapacitor 130 4.6.1 Current Collector 130 4.6.2 Electrode Materials 131 4.6.2.1 EDLC Materials 131 4.6.2.2 Pseudocapacitive Materials 132 4.6.3 Electrolytes 138 4.6.4 Binders 138 4.6.5 Separators 139 4.7 Conclusion 140 References 140 5 Thermal Energy Storage Systems for Cooling and Heating Applications 149 Pankaj Kalita, Debangsu Kashyap and Urbashi Bordoloi 5.1 Introduction 150 5.2 Classification of Storage Systems 151 5.3 Sensible Heat Storage 151 5.3.1 Water-Based Storage 153 5.3.2 Packed Beds 156 5.3.3 Aquifers 158 5.3.4 Borehole 160 5.4 Latent Heat Storage 163 5.4.1 Enhancement Methods for Thermal Conductivity Enhancement 164 5.4.1.1 Macro and Microencapsulation 165 5.4.1.2 Addition of Fins 166 5.4.1.3 Multiple PCM Technology 167 5.4.1.4 Immersion Through Material Pores 167 5.5 Thermochemical Heat Storage 168 5.5.1 Absorption Cycle 172 5.5.2 Adsorption Cycles 173 5.5.3 Chemical Reaction 174 5.6 Application of Thermal Energy Storage Systems 176 5.6.1 Absorption Refrigeration System 176 5.6.2 Solar Pumps Application in Space Cooling/Heating 177 5.6.3 Solar Pond Integrated Packed-Bed TES System for Space Heating 178 5.6.4 Solar FPC 179 5.6.5 Solar PV/T 181 5.6.6 Solar Air Heater 183 5.7 Design Problems 184 5.8 Conclusion 196 References 196 6 Optimistic Technological Approaches for Sustainable Energy Storage Devices/Materials 201 Benjamin Raj, Arya Das, Suddhasatwa Basu and Mamata Mohapatra 6.1 Introduction 202 6.2 Advancements in Supercapacitor Technology 202 6.2.1 The Current Global Supercapacitor Market 205 6.2.2 Challenges: From Lab to Market 207 6.2.3 Current Trends and Opportunities 209 6.2.4 Composites and Novel Architectures 209 6.2.5 Microsupercapacitors 210 6.2.6 Hybrid Supercapacitors 211 6.2.7 Flexible, Wearable and Smart Supercapacitors 211 6.3 Advancements in Battery Technology 212 6.3.1 Challenges 213 6.3.2 Nickel-Cadmium Batteries 213 6.3.3 Nickel-Metal Hydride Batteries 214 6.3.4 Lead Storage Battery 214 6.3.5 Sodium Sulphur Battery 215 6.3.6 Flow Batteries 217 6.3.7 Lithium Ion Batteries (LIBs) 218 6.4 Conclusion and Outlook 221 References 222 7 Electro-Chemical Battery Energy Storage Systems - A Comprehensive Overview 229 Nikhil P G and G Sivaramakrishnan 7.1 Introduction 229 7.2 Electro-Chemical Storage Devices 231 7.2.1 Definition and Types 231 7.2.2 Energy Storage Landscape and Benefits of Electro-Chemical Storage 235 7.2.3 Drivers and Barriers in Implementation of Energy Storage Systems 240 7.3 Design and Performance Parameters for Electro-Chemical Storage 240 7.3.1 Design Basis for Large Storage Application 240 7.4 Case Study From Industry 243 7.5 Best Practices in Battery Maintenance 245 7.6 End of Life Cycle of Batteries 247 7.6.1 Major Recyclable Products from the Process 248 7.6.2 Disposal Measures 248 7.7 India Energy Storage Mission 249 7.8 Conclusion 251 References 251 8 Simulation of Charging and Discharging a Thermal Energy Storage System Involving Phase Change Material 253 S. Sanyal, A. Borgohain and S.P. Gupta 8.1 Introduction 253 8.2 Design of Latent Heat Storage (LHS) System 256 8.2.1 Identification of Suitable PCM 256 8.2.2 Design of Heat Exchanger 260 8.2.3 Performance Evaluation 261 8.3 Analysis of Phase Change Systems 261 8.4 Simulation 263 8.4.1 Equations Involved 263 8.4.2 Modelling 265 8.4.3 Transient Analysis 269 8.5 Results and Discussion 269 8.5.1 Scalability of Mesh 269 8.5.2 Melting 270 8.5.3 Solidification 271 8.5.4 Performance 273 8.6 Conclusion 274 Acknowledgement 274 Abbreviation 275 References 275 Index 277

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe energy scene in the world is a complex picture of a variety of energy sources being used to meet the world's growing energy needs. There is, however, a gap in the demand and supply. It is recognized that decentralized power generation based on the various renewable energy technologies can, to some extent, help in meeting the growing energy needs. The renewable energy landscape has witnessed tremendous changes in the policy framework with accelerated and ambitious plans to increase the contribution of renewable energy such as solar, wind, bio-power, and others. Hybrid renewable energy systems are important for continuous operation and supplements each form of energy seasonally, offering several benefits over a stand-alone system. It can enhance capacity and lead to greater security of continuous electricity supply, among other applications. This book provides a platform for researchers, academics, industry professionals, consultants and designers to discover state-of-the-art deveTable of Contents1 Resource Assessment and Implementation of Hybrid Renewable Energy Systems for Food Preservation in Agro-Tropical Areas: A Techno-Economic Approach 1 M. Edwin, M. Saranya Nair and S. Joseph Sekhar 1.1 Introduction 2 1.1.1 Objectives 4 1.2 Materials and Methods 5 1.2.1 Resource Assessment 6 1.2.1.1 Definition of the Study Region 6 1.2.1.2 Field Survey from Households 6 1.2.1.3 Existing Collection and Preservation Methods for Milk 7 1.2.1.4 Potential of Renewable Energy Sources 8 1.2.1.5 Identification of Influential Parameters 10 1.2.1.6 Load/Demand Assessment 10 1.2.2 Modelling and Simulation of a Hybrid Renewable Energy–Based Cooling System 13 1.2.2.1 System Description 13 1.2.2.2 Energy Modelling 14 1.2.2.3 Economic Modelling 15 1.2.2.4 Simulation and Performance Evaluation 15 1.3 Results and Discussion 19 1.3.1 Overall Efficiency of the System 19 1.3.2 Evaluation of Economic Parameters 22 1.3.3 Techno-Economic Study 29 1.3.4 Sensitivity Analysis 29 1.4 Conclusions 32 References 33 2 Implementation of Hybrid Renewable Energy Projects in Rural India—A Case Study 37 Utpal Goswami and Arvind Kumar 2.1 Introduction 37 2.2 Overview of Microgrid 40 2.3 Basic Structure of Hybrid System 40 2.4 Hybrid Microgrid Control 41 2.5 Project Location 42 2.6 Load Profile Study of Proposed Location 42 2.7 Operation of Hybrid Microgrid System Considered for Current Study 44 2.8 Technical Specification of Hybrid System 46 2.9 Modeling of Hybrid Microgrid System 46 2.10 Last One Year Output of Hybrid Microgrid Plant 53 2.11 Financial Analysis 55 2.12 Tariff Calculation 55 2.13 Conclusion 59 References 60 3 Techno-Economic Analysis of Hybrid Renewable Energy System with Energy Storage for Rural Electrification 63 Pradeep Kumar Sahu, Satyaranjan Jena and Umakanta Sahoo 3.1 Introduction 64 3.2 HES Components 65 3.3 Energy Storage Systems 66 3.3.1 Pumped Hydro Storage (PHS) 68 3.3.2 Compressed Air Energy Storage (CAES) 68 3.3.3 Flywheel Energy Storage (FES) 69 3.3.4 Chemical Energy Storage 70 3.3.4.1 Hydrogen-Based ESS 70 3.3.4.2 Battery Energy Storage (BESS) 71 3.3.5 Electromagnetic Energy Storage 72 3.3.5.1 Super Capacitors (SC) 72 3.3.5.2 Superconducting Magnet Energy Storage (SMES) 73 3.4 Hybrid Energy System Configuration 74 3.4.1 Integration Schemes 74 3.4.2 DC-Coupled Systems 76 3.4.3 AC-Coupled Systems 76 3.4.4 Hybrid-Coupled Systems 77 3.5 Component Sizing of Hybrid RE Systems 78 3.6 Techno-Economical Analysis 78 3.6.1 Selection of Study Area for the Proposed Study 81 3.6.2 Load Assessment of the Study Area 81 3.6.3 Resources Assessment 81 3.6.4 Economic Analysis 85 3.6.4.1 Net Present Cost (NPC) 86 3.6.4.2 Cost of Energy (COE) 87 3.6.5 Results and Discussion 87 3.7 Conclusion 91 References 91 4 Modeling and Energy Optimization of Hybrid Energy Storage System 97 Hemavathi S. 4.1 Introduction 97 4.2 Modeling of Proposed Topology 98 4.2.1 Modeling of Photovoltaic System 99 4.2.2 Modeling of Li-Ion Battery Module 100 4.2.3 Modeling of Ultracapacitor Module 103 4.3 Control Strategies 104 4.3.1 PV-MPPT Technique and DC/DC Converter Model 105 4.3.2 Hybrid Active Power Control of Energy Storage Systems 107 4.4 Energy Optimization Strategy and Simulation Results 109 4.4.1 Energy Optimization Strategy 109 4.4.2 Simulation Results 110 4.5 Conclusion 112 Acknowledgment 112 References 113 5 Techno Commercial Study of Hybrid Systems for the Agriculture Farm Using Homer Software 115 Sanjay Kumar C, Karthikeyan M, Prasannakumaran K M and V. Kirubakaran 5.1 Introduction 116 5.2 Electricity Consumption by Agricultural Sector 117 5.3 Literature Review 117 5.4 Study Location 118 5.4.1 Solar Energy Potential in Dindigul District 118 5.5 Load Estimation of the Farm 120 5.5.1 Daily Power Consumption by the Farm 120 5.6 Renewable Energy Technology Used in the Hybrid System 121 5.6.1 Solar PV System 121 5.6.1.1 PV Module 121 5.6.1.2 Storage Batteries 121 5.6.1.3 Converter 122 5.6.2 Biogas Energy Potential in Farm 122 5.6.2.1 Volume Calculation of Digester 123 5.6.2.2 Volume of Gas Collecting Chamber (Vc) 123 5.6.2.3 Generator Sizing 124 5.6.3 Biomass Potential in the Particular Site 124 5.6.3.1 Syn Gas Generation Rate 125 5.6.3.2 Fuel Consumption Rate (FCR) 125 5.7 System Design and Analysis 125 5.7.1 Result Analysis 126 5.7.1.1 Case-1 PV/Biomass Hybrid System 127 5.7.1.2 Case 2 – Hybrid PV/Biogas System 128 5.8 Conclusion 131 References 132 6 Experimental Investigation of Solar Photovoltaic Cold Storage With Thermal Energy Storage 135 K. Sahoo, V. Yadav, N. Goyal, S. Kumar, Y. Singh, S. Mukhopadhyay, U. Sahoo, A.K. Tripathi and C. Banerjee 6.1 Introduction 136 6.2 Scope of Cold Storage in India 137 6.3 Materials and Method 138 6.3.1 Experimental Setup 138 6.4 Economic Analysis 141 6.4.1 Payback Period 149 6.5 Different Business Models for SPV Cold Storage With Thermal Energy Storage 149 6.6 Result and Discussions 153 6.7 Conclusions 164 Acknowledgements 165 Abbreviations 165 References 166 7 Estimation of Fault Voltages in Renewable Energy–Based Microgrid 169 Golla Anand, Chinmoy Basak, Rishabh Anand, Sourav Sahoo and Prof. Sarita Nanda 7.1 Introduction 170 7.2 Problem Formulation 173 7.2.1 Taylor Series Based Voltage Signal Formulation 173 7.2.2 Recursive Least Square (RLS) Algorithm 175 7.3 Pseudo Code/Algorithm for Taylor-RLS 176 7.4 Experimental Validation 177 7.5 Conclusion 181 References 181 8 Optimization of PV-Wind Hybrid Renewable Energy System for Health Care Buildings in Smart City 183 A. Karthick, V. Kumar Chinnaiyan, J. Karpagam, V.S. Chandrika and P. Ravi Kumar 8.1 Introduction 184 8.2 Objectives and Methodology 186 8.3 Description of the HE 188 8.4 Results and Discussion 189 8.5 Conclusion 195 Nomenclatures 196 References 196 9 Hybrid Solar-Biomass Gasifier System for Electricity and Cold Storage Applications for Rural Areas of India 199 Nasir ul Rasheed Rather and Umakanta Sahoo 9.1 Introduction 200 9.2 Literature Review 202 9.2.1 Gasification of Biomass 202 9.2.2 Solar Energy Cooling and Heating 203 9.2.3 Engine Exhaust and Waste Heat Recovery 204 9.3 Materials and Methods 205 9.3.1 System Components 205 9.3.1.1 Biomass Gasifier 207 9.3.1.2 Gas-Engine Generator 209 9.3.1.3 Waste Heat Recovery Unit 210 9.3.1.4 Scheffler Dish Collector 213 9.3.1.5 Vapor Absorption Machine (VAM) 224 9.3.1.6 Cold Storage Unit 230 9.4 Performance Evaluation 233 9.4.1 Thermodynamic Analysis 234 9.5 Results and Discussion 235 9.6 Conclusion & Suggestions for Future Work 244 Suggestions for Future Work 244 References 245 Index 247

Read more less

Book SynopsisEnergy is one of the most important topics of our time, and renewable energy has been a long and still-unfolding story that has taken decades to bring us to where we are today. Even after so much progress, engineers and scientists are always still developing new and innovative techniques, processes, equipment, and materials to further the science and fulfill the mission of generating cleaner, renewable energy for the world's consumption. This new groundbreaking series, Advances in Renewable Energy, covers these topics across the spectrum, including solar, wind, and other renewable energy sources. This first volume in the series focuses on solar energy, probably the fastest-growing and developing area of renewable energy. With new materials and processes constantly coming online, it is important for engineers and scientists to stay abreast of the state-of-the-art in the field, and this volume does just that. Covering not just the basics of the technology and technological advaTable of ContentsAbout the Editor xi Contributors xii 1 Reliability Testing of PV Module in the Outdoor Condition 1Birinchi Bora, O.S. Sastry, Som Mondal and B. Prasad 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Indoor Testing of Reliability of PV Module 4 1.3 Basics of Measurement Methods used to Identify Failures in the PV Module in the Field after Installation 7 1.3.1 Visual Inspection 8 1.3.2 I-V Tracer 11 1.3.3 Temperature Coefficient 13 1.3.4 Series Resistance 15 1.3.5 Curve Correction Factor 16 1.3.6 Dark I-V 17 1.3.7 Degradation Analysis 18 1.3.8 IR Thermography 19 1.3.9 Insulation Resistance Tester 22 1.3.10 EL Camera 23 1.3.11 Interconnect Breakage Tester 25 1.3.12 Current, Voltage and Continuity Checking 25 1.3.13 Environmental Parameter Checking 25 1.4 Quantification of Reliability 26 1.5 Procedure for Performance and Reliability Testing of PV Module in Outdoor Conditions 33 1.5.1 Selection Procedure of PV Modules for Testing in the Field 33 1.5.2 Testing Report Format of Performance Guarantee Test 33 1.6 Conclusion 35 Abbreviation 35 References 36 2 Solar Energy Technologies and Water Potential for Distillation: A Pre-Feasibility Investigation for Rajasthan, India 39Nikhil Gakkhar, Manoj Kumar Soni and Sanjeev Jakhar 2.1 Introduction 40 2.2 Solar Assisted Technologies for Water Purification 41 2.3 Resource Availability in Rajasthan, India, for Solar Distillation 45 2.3.1 Availability of Solar Irradiance 47 2.3.2 Land Availability in Rajasthan 47 2.3.3 Water Availability from Various Sources 51 2.3.3.1 Surface Water Resources of Rajasthan 51 2.3.3.2 Rainfall 54 2.3.3.3 Domestic Wastewater 54 2.3.3.4 Groundwater 58 2.4 Estimation of Solar Potential and Water Availability 58 2.4.1 Solar PV Potential 59 2.4.2 Solar CSP Potential 60 2.4.3 Water Potential Estimation for Distillation 61 2.5 Choice of Distillation Technology 65 2.5.1 PV-Assisted RO Plants 65 2.5.2 CSP-Assisted MSF Plants 71 2.6 Conclusion 75 Nomenclature 77 References 77 3 Design Analysis of Solar Photovoltaic Power Plants for Northern and Southern Regions of India 83Sanjay Kumar 3.1 Introduction 83 3.1.1 Solar Power in India 88 3.2 Site Selection 90 3.2.1 Geography 90 3.2.2 Specification of Locations 100 3.2.3 Location Dedicated for Power Plant Setup 100 3.2.4 Load Profile of INA 116 3.3 Technology 124 3.3.1 Solar PV Systems 124 3.3.2 Major Components 125 3.3.2.1 Module 126 3.3.2.2 Inverters 127 3.3.2.3 Auxiliary Components 128 3.4 BOM for 3MW Power Plant 134 3.5 Quality, Testing and Standard Certification 140 3.6.1 Modules selection 146 3.6.1.1 Installation of Module 147 3.6.2 Inverter Selection 148 3.7 Financial Analysis 150 3.8 Plant Layout with Electrical and Civil Engineering Aspects 151 3.8.1 Land Requirement 151 3.8.2 Plant Layout 151 3.8.3 Civil Works 152 3.8.4 Module Mounting Structures 152 3.8.5 Operation and Maintenance 152 3.9 Monitoring System 153 3.9.1 SCADA 153 3.9.2 Control and Instrumentation System 154 3.10 Environmental Aspects 155 3.10.1 State Pollution Control Board Clearances 156 3.11 Project Management 156 3.11.1 Project Contracting 156 3.11.2 Quality Management 157 3.11.3 Construction Management 157 3.11.4 Health, Safety and Environment 158 3.11.5 Commissioning and Testing 159 3.11.6 Operation and Maintenance (O & M) 160 3.11.7 Training 161 3.12 Solar Business Models for Megawatt-Scale Projects in India 161 3.12.1 Power Purchase Agreement (PPA) Model 161 3.12.2 Captive Model 161 3.12.3 REC Model 162 3.12.4 REC Formalities and Procedures 163 3.12.5 Business Models under the REC Mechanism 165 3.12.6 Risk Factors of REC 166 3.13 Concepts toward Net Zero Energy Solar Building 167 3.14 Strategy Implementation 168 3.15 Conclusion 176 Abbreviations 177 References 179 4 Cold Storage with Backup Thermal Energy Storage System 181K. Sahoo, B. Bandhyopadhyay, S. Mukhopadhyay, U. Sahoo, T. S. Kumar, V. Yadav and Y. Singh 4.1 Introduction 181 4.1.1 Recommended Condition for Fruits and Vegetables 183 4.1.2 Incompatibility 183 4.2 Solar Energy Scenario 184 4.2.1 Overview of Solar Radiation 187 4.2.1.1 Basic Principles 187 4.2.1.2 Diffuse and Direct Solar Radiation 188 4.2.1.3 Global Solar Radiation 188 4.3 Refrigeration Technology Overview 190 4.3.1 Brier Introduction of Refrigeration 190 4.3.2 Carnot Cycle 191 4.3.3 Reverse Carnot Cycle 192 4.3.4 Air Refrigeration Cycle 193 4.3.5 Vapour Compression Refrigeration System 194 4.3.6 Actual Vapour Compression Refrigeration System 195 4.4 Literature Review 195 4.5 Designing of Solar PV Cold Storage 196 4.5.1 Determining the Size of Cold Room 197 4.5.2 Cooling Load Calculation 197 4.5.2.1 Transmission Load 197 4.5.2.2 Heat Transmission through Door 198 4.5.2.3 Equipment Load 199 4.5.2.4 Product Heat Load 199 4.5.2.5 Heat of Respiration 199 4.5.2.6 Human Occupancy Load 200 4.5.2.7 Cooling Load Due to Thermal Energy Storage 200 4.5.3 Cooling Load Summary for 10 MT Storage Capacities 200 4.5.4 Solar Photovoltaic Plant Design 202 4.5.4.1 Photovoltaic Module Design 202 4.5.4.2 Inverter Sizing 202 4.5.4.3 Battery Sizing 203 4.5.4.4 Solar Charge Controller Sizing 203 4.6 Design of Cold Room Mechanical System 203 4.7 Designing of Thermal Energy Storage System (TES) 206 4.8 Battery Storage 208 4.9 Refrigerant 208 4.10 Specification of Cold Storage and Thermal Energy Storage System 209 4.11 Design of Solar Thermal Based Cold Storage 210 4.11.1 Technology Selection 211 4.11.2 Energy and Collector Area Required from Solar Thermal Technology 212 4.12 Economic Analysis 213 4.12.1 Net Present Value (NPV) 213 4.12.2 Internal Rate of Return (IRR) 214 4.12.3 Payback Period 214 4.13 Economic Analysis of Solar PV Cold Storage 215 4.13.1 NPV and IRR Calculation of Solar PV Cold Storage 215 4.13.2 Payback Period of Solar PV Cold Storage 221 4.14 Economic Analysis of Solar Thermal System Based Cold Storage 223 4.14.1 NPV and IRR Calculation 223 4.14.2 Payback Period of Solar Thermal Cold Storage 229 4.15 Conclusion 231 References 231 5 Development of Parabolic Trough Collector Based Power and Ejector Refrigeration System Using Eco-Friendly Refrigerants 233D.K. Gupta, R. Kumar and N. Kumar 5.1 Introduction 234 5.2 Literature Review 236 5.3 Solar Operated Ejector Cooling and Power Cycle 244 5.3.1 Working of Proposed Cycle 245 5.3.2 First and Second Law Analysis of Proposed Cycle 247 5.4 Ejector Cooling and Power Cycle with Various Ecofriendly Refrigerants 250 5.4.1 System Description 250 5.4.2 Properties of Refrigerants 251 5.4.3 Thermodynamic Analysis 251 5.4.4 Parameters considered for Operation of Proposed System 253 5.5 Ejector Organic Rankine Cycle Integrated with a Triple Pressure Level Vapour Absorption System 253 5.5.1 Working of Proposed System 253 5.5.2 Energy and Exergy Analysis of the Proposed System 258 5.6 Combined Organic Rankine Cycle with Double Ejector 261 5.6.1 Working of Proposed Cycle 262 5.6.2 First and Second Law Analysis of Proposed Cycle 264 5.7 Result and Discussions 267 5.8 Conclusion 297 Nomenclatures 298 Greek symbols 299 Subscript 300 References 300 6 Unlocking the Design of Stand-Alone and Grid-Connected Rooftop Solar PV Systems 309Tanmay Bishnoi 6.1 Introduction 310 6.2 Stand-Alone Solar PV System 312 6.2.1 Types of Stand-Alone PV System Configurations 312 6.2.2 Design Methodology 313 6.2.3 Detailed Steps for Designing a Solar PV System 314 6.2.4 Stand-Alone Solar PV System Design and Safety Standards 330 6.3 Grid-Connected Solar PV System 330 6.3.1 Step by Step Procedure for Designing a Rooftop Grid-Connected Solar PV System 331 6.3.2 Grid-Tied Solar PV System Standards 333 6.3.3 Performance Analysis of a Solar PV System 334 6.4 Costing Analysis for a Solar PV System 337 6.5 Conclusion 359 References 360 Index 363

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplores soil as a nexus for water, chemicals, and biologically coupled nutrient cycling Soil is a narrow but critically important zone on Earth's surface. It is the interface for water and carbon recycling from above and part of the cycling of sediment and rock from below. Hydrogeology, Chemical Weathering, and Soil Formation places chemical weathering and soil formation in its geological, climatological, biological and hydrological perspective. Volume highlights include: The evolution of soils over 3.25 billion yearsBasic processes contributing to soil formationHow chemical weathering and soil formation relate to water and energy fluxesThe role of pedogenesis in geomorphologyRelationships between climate soils and biotaSoils, aeolian deposits, and crusts as geologic dating toolsImpacts of land-use change on soils The American Geophysical Union promotes discovery in Earth and space science for the benefit of humanity. Its publications disseminate scientific knowledge and provideTable of ContentsList of Contributors ix Preface xi Part I: Soil Definition 1 1. Soil as a System: A HistoryRichard J. Huggett 3 Part II: Soil History 21 2. Soils, Chemical Weathering, and Climate Change in Earth HistorySteven G. Driese, Lee C. Nordt, and Gary E. Stinchcomb 23 Part III: Soil Formation Processes 67 3. Soil Formation, Vegetation Growth, and Water Balance: A Theory for BudykoAllen Hunt 69 4. Earthworms, Plants, and SoilsRenée-Claire Le Bayon, Géraldine Bullinger, Andreas Schomburg, Pascal Turberg, Philip Brunner, Rodolphe Schlaepfer, and Claire Guenat 81 5. Tephra for the Trees? Geochemical Constraints on Weathering and Tephra Inputs to Soils on New Zealand’s North IslandClaire E. Lukens and Kevin P. Norton 105 6. The Origin and Formation of Clay Minerals in Alpine SoilsMarkus Egli and Aldo Mirabella 121 Part IV: Application of Chemical Weathering/Soil Formation in Other Disciplines 139 7. Weathering Rinds as Tools for Constraining Reaction Kinetics and Duration of Weathering at the Clast-ScalePeter B. Sak 141 8. Unraveling Loess Records of Climate Change from the Chinese Loess Plateau Using Process-Based ModelsPeter A. Finke, Keerthika Nirmani Ranathunga Arachchige, Ann Verdoodt, Yanyan Yu, and Qiuzhen Yin 163 9. Relations Between Soil Development and LandslidesArnaud J.A.M. Temme 177 10A. Soils in Agricultural Engineering: Effect of Land-Use Management Systems on Mechanical Soil ProcessesRainer F. Horn 187 10B. Soil Strength and Carbon SequestrationRattan Lal 201 Part V: Integrated Studies of Soils 205 11. Chemical Weathering in the McMurdo Dry Valleys, AntarcticaW. Berry Lyons, Deborah L. Leslie, and Michael N. Gooseff 207 12. Carbon and Nutrient Fluxes Within Southeastern Piedmont Critical ZonesTodd C. Rasmussen, Maryam Foroughi, and Daniel Markewitz 217 13. Is This Steady State? Weathering and Critical Zone Architecture in Gordon Gulch, Colorado Front RangeSuzanne P. Anderson, Patrick J. Kelly, Noah Hoffman, Katherine Barnhart, Kevin Befus, and William Ouimet 231 14. Where Are We and Where Are We Going? Pedogenesis Through Chemical Weathering, Hydrologic Fluxes, and BioturbationAllen Hunt, Markus Egli, and Boris Faybishenko 253 Index 270

Read more less

Book SynopsisOil and Oilseed Processing The latest information available on oil and oilseed processingOil and Oilseed Processing offers a comprehensive text that explores both the conventional and novel green extraction methods used to extract oils from seeds. The authorsnoted experts on the topicexamine the positive aspects of operations in processing oil and oilseeds and present the processing concepts, principles, effects on quality, as well as the stability characteristics, limitations, and challenges. Due to the economic implications associated with the overproduction of seed oils, the book includes pertinent information on vegetable and animal-derived oils for industrial applications. The authors also explore recent applications and future perspectives for vegetable and animal oils use in the food and non-food industry. Safety concerns regarding oil and oilseed processing and waste valorisation are also covered in-depth. This important guide:Explores the Table of ContentsContents Preface xi List of Contributors xiii1 Production and Consumption of Oils and Oilseeds 1Tomás Lafarga 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Oilseeds and Oils: Production and Trade 2 1.2.1 Copra and Coconut Oil 2 1.2.2 Cottonseeds and Cottonseed Oil 6 1.2.3 Groundnuts and Groundnut Oil 6 1.2.4 Linseed 7 1.2.5 Maize 8 1.2.6 Olive Oil 9 1.2.7 Palm and Palm Kernel Oil 10 1.2.8 Rapeseed and Canola Oil 12 1.2.9 Sesame Seeds and Sesame Oil 12 1.2.10 Soybean 14 1.2.11 Sunflower 14 1.3 Novel Sources for Oil Production 17 1.4 Summary 18 Acknowledgments 18 References 18 2 Conventional Oils and Oilseeds: Composition and Nutritional Importance 23Gloria Bobo, Iolanda Nicolau-Lapeña and Ingrid Aguiló-Aguayo 2.1 Introduction 23 2.2 Oilseeds 24 2.2.1 Description of Oilseeds 24 2.2.2 Physicochemical Properties of Oilseeds Oils 25 2.2.3 Nutritional Properties 25 2.2.4 Bioactive Properties 27 2.2.5 Antinutritional Factors 30 2.3 Factors Affecting Oil Yield 30 2.4 Overview of Oilseed Processing and Current Applications 33 Acknowledgments 34 References 35 3 Novel Sources for Oil Production 41Marco Garcia-Vaquero and Brijesh K. Tiwari 3.1 Introduction 41 3.2 Algae 42 3.2.1 Microalgae 42 3.2.2 Macroalgae 47 3.3 Insects 48 3.4 Unconventional Plants and Seeds 52 3.5 Opportunities, Challenges, and Future Prospects 53 Acknowledgements 55 References 55 4 Oils Extracted from Nuts and Grains 61Nirupama Gangopadhyay 4.1 Introduction 61 4.2 Oils 61 4.3 Nut Lipids 63 4.3.1 Composition of Nut Lipids 64 4.3.2 Processing of Nuts 66 4.3.3 Application/Utilization of Nut Lipids 68 4.4 Grain Lipids 68 4.4.1 Composition of Cereal Grains 69 4.4.2 Distribution of Lipids in Cereal Grains 72 4.4.3 Processing of Cereals 73 4.4.4 Application/Utilization of Cereal Lipids 75 4.5 Conclusions 76 References 76 5 New Approaches to Detect Compositional Shifts in Fish Oils 81Editha Giese and Jan Fritsche 5.1 Introduction 81 5.2 Production and Processing 82 5.3 Nutritional Benefits 83 5.4 Oxidative Stability 84 5.5 Methods for Quality Assessment 84 5.6 Conventional Methods 85 5.6.1 Wet‐Chemical Methods 85 5.6.2 Instrumental Methods 85 5.7 Machine Learning Approaches toward the Detection of Compositional Shifts 88 5.7.1 Standard Methods 90 5.7.2 Advanced Methods 92 5.7.3 Limitations 95 5.8 Future Perspectives 95 References 96 6 Milk Fats 103Rogelio Sánchez-Vega, América Chávez-Martínez, Juan Manuel Tirado-Gallegos, Néstor Gutiérrez-Méndez and María Janeth Rodríguez-Roque 6.1 Introduction 103 6.2 Health Effects of Milk Fats 105 6.2.1 Milk Fat Globule Membrane (MFGM) 105 6.2.2 Fatty Acids 105 6.2.3 Oleic Acid 105 6.2.4 Conjugated Linoleic Acid (CLA, 18:2 Conjugated) 106 6.2.5 Sphingomyelin 106 6.2.6 Phosphatidylcholine 106 6.2.7 Phosphatidylserine 106 6.3 Pre‐Treatment and Processing Technologies 107 6.3.1 Cooling 107 6.3.2 Heat Treatment 107 6.3.3 Homogenization 107 6.4 Techniques for Obtaining Functionality of Milk Fats 108 6.4.1 Melting 110 6.4.2 Fractionation 110 6.4.3 Crystallization 110 6.4.4 Blending 111 6.4.5 Softening or Hardening of Milk Fat 111 6.4.6 Interesterification 111 6.4.7 Hydrolysis 111 6.4.8 Hydrogenation 111 6.4.9 Cholesterol Reduction 112 6.5 Current and Potential Applications in the Food Industry and Other Areas 112 6.5.1 Milk Fats in Foods 113 6.5.2 Structured Lipids 113 6.5.3 Edible Films 113 6.6 Non‐food Uses of Milk Fats 113 6.7 Future Trends 114 References 114 7 Oils and Their Use Beyond the Food Industry 119Douglas G. Hayes 7.1 Introduction 119 7.2 Seed Oils for Non‐food and Industrial Applications 120 7.2.1 Common Oil Crops 120 7.2.2 Industrial Oil Crops 121 7.3 Industrial Applications of Seed Oils 123 7.3.1 Biopolymers 123 7.3.2 Biofuels 129 7.3.3 Surfactants 135 7.3.4 Lubricants 138 7.3.5 Plasticizers 140 7.3.6 Cosmetics 141 7.4 Conclusions and Future Prospects 141 References 142 8 Occurrence and Determination of Contaminants in Edible Oils and Oilseeds 149José L. Hidalgo-Ruiz, Roberto Romero-González, José Luis Martínez-Vidal and Antonia Garrido-Frenich 8.1 Introduction 149 8.2 Mycotoxins 151 8.2.1 Sources of Contamination 151 8.2.2 Legislation 152 8.2.3 Analysis 152 8.3 Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons 155 8.3.1 Sources of Contamination 155 8.3.2 Legislation 155 8.3.3 Analysis 156 8.4 3‐MCPD Esters and Glycidyl Esters 158 8.4.1 Sources of Contamination 158 8.4.2 Legislation 159 8.4.3 Analysis 160 8.5 Mineral Oil 162 8.5.1 Sources of Contamination and Legislation 162 8.5.2 Analysis 163 8.6 Phthalates 166 8.6.1 Sources of Contamination 166 8.6.2 Legislation 166 8.6.3 Analysis 167 8.7 Pesticides 168 8.7.1 Sources of Contamination 168 8.7.2 Legislation 169 8.7.3 Analysis 169 8.8 Conclusions 172 Acknowledgments 173 References 173 9 By-Products from Oilseed Processing and Their Potential Applications 183María Janeth Rodríguez-Roque, Rogelio Sánchez-Vega, Ramona Pérez-Leal, Mayra Cristina Soto-Caballero, Nora Aideé Salas-Salazar and María Antonia Flores-Córdova 9.1 Introduction 183 9.2 Oilseed by‐Products: Origin, Characteristics, and Composition 184 9.2.1 By‐Products from Unprocessed Oilseeds 184 9.2.2 By‐Products from Oilseed Processing 189 9.3 Nutritional Composition and Functional Properties of Oilseed by‐Products 190 9.3.1 Carbohydrates 190 9.3.2 Proteins 191 9.3.3 Fiber 192 9.3.4 Minerals 192 9.3.5 Vitamins 192 9.3.6 Phenolic Compounds 193 9.3.7 Lignans 193 9.3.8 Tocopherols 193 9.4 Antinutritional Compounds 193 9.4.1 Glucosinolates 194 9.4.2 Phytic Acid or Phytate 194 9.4.3 Oxalic Acid 194 9.4.4 Erucic and Brassidic Acids 194 9.4.5 Carbohydrates with Antinutritional Properties 195 9.4.6 Other Antinutritional Factors 195 9.5 Current Applications in the Valorization of Oilseed by‐Products 195 9.5.1 Vegetable Proteins Source 195 9.5.2 Natural Antioxidants and Preservatives 196 9.5.3 Organic Fertilizer 196 9.5.4 Livestock Diets 197 9.5.5 Renewable Energy 197 9.6 Future Trends 198 References 199 10 Proteins and Peptides Derived from Rapeseed: Techno-Functional and Bioactive Properties 203Maria Hayes 10.1 Introduction 203 10.2 Summary of Existing Rapeseed Meal Protein Extraction Processes 204 10.3 Hydrolysis of Rapeseed Proteins and Rapeseed Meal to Produce High Value Bioactive Compounds 205 10.4 Techno‐Functional Attributes of Rapeseed Proteins 206 10.4.1 Emulsifying Properties 206 10.4.2 Digestibility of Rapeseed Proteins 207 10.4.3 Solubility 208 10.5 Bioactivities of Rapeseed Protein Hydrolysates and Identified Bioactive Peptides 209 10.5.1 Heart Health Benefits – Inhibition of Enzymes Associated with Cardiovascular Disease 209 10.5.2 Anti‐Proliferative Activity of Rapeseed Meal Hydrolysates/Fermentates 213 10.6 Safety of Rapeseed Proteins and Hydrolysates 213 10.7 Conclusion 213 References 214 11 Oils and Oilseeds in the Nutraceutical and Functional Food Industries 219Manuel Suárez, Andreu Gual-Grau, Javier Ávila-Román, Cristina Torres-Fuentes, Miquel Mulero, Gerard Aragonès, Francisca Isabel Bravo and Begoña Muguerza 11.1 Introduction 219 11.2 Functional Food and Nutraceuticals 220 11.2.1 Definition 220 11.2.2 Regulation 221 11.3 Vegetable and Seed Oils as Source of Bioactive Compounds 221 11.3.1 Saponifiable Fraction 221 11.3.2 Unsaponifiable Fraction 222 11.4 Bioactivity of Vegetable Oils and Oilseeds 228 11.4.1 Olive Oil 228 11.4.2 Sunflower Oil 229 11.4.3 Corn Oil 229 11.4.4 Palm Oil 230 11.4.5 Peanut Oil 230 11.4.6 Avocado Oil 231 11.4.7 Linseed Oil 231 11.4.8 Sesame Oil 232 11.4.9 Canola Oil/Rapeseed 232 11.5 New Trends and Applications 233 References 235 12 Sensorial Evaluation and Aroma of Vegetable Oils 245Gemma Echeverria, Chloe Leclerc, Jordi Giné-Bordonaba and Agustí Romero 12.1 Introduction 245 12.2 Olive Oil 246 12.3 Palm Oil 249 12.4 Soybean Oil 250 12.5 Sun Flower Seed Oil 251 12.6 Corn Oil 253 12.7 Peanut Oil 253 12.8 Coconut Oil 255 12.9 Linseed/Flaxseed Oil 256 12.10 Canola or Rapeseed 257 12.11 Hazelnut Oil 260 12.12 Avocado Oil 261 12.13 Almond Oil 264 12.14 Pistachio Oil 265 12.15 Sesame Oil 267 12.16 Walnut Oil 268 References 270 Index 279

Read more less

Book SynopsisINVASIVE ALIEN SPECIES Invasive Alien Species: Observations and Issues from Around the WorldVolume 1: Issues and Invasions in AfricaInvasive alien species are spreading into new ecosystems each year. The impacts caused by these invaders can be swift and devastating. The topic of invasive alien species is large, complex, and globally significant at various scales, exacerbated by the globalization of world economies and increased trade and commerce that has overcome natural barriers to species movement. Invasive alien species threaten global food supplies, water quality and availability, and energy production and delivery. With the added risks associated with global climate change, the global homogenization of plants, animals, and microbes is a major factor in the decline in ecosystem health and ecosystem services worldwide. To counter this trend, there is a critical need to unify governments, cultures, and programs to improve cross-boundary coordination to effectiTable of ContentsVolume One List of Contributors xi 1 Invasive Alien Species: A Prodigious Global Threat in the Anthropocene 1Michael R. Ielmini and K.V. Sankaran 2 Reproductive Traits That Foster the Invasion of Four Alien Plant Species in Botswana 80Demel Teketay, Thabo Mafote, Kamogelo K. Puodipe, Pauline B. Mompati, Neo Nkoborwane, Thembinkosi Mathowa, and Witness Mojeremane 3 The Worst Invasive Species to Egypt 112Wafaa M. Amer 4 Status, Trends, and Scenarios of Invasive Alien Species in Gabon 139Jean Bruno Mikissa, Aurelie Flore Koumba Pambo, Emmanuel Bayani Ngoyi, Kathryn J. Jeffery, Lee White, and Katharine Abernethy 5 Invasive Alien Species (IAS) of Ghana 145Michael Kwabena Osei, Kofi Frimpong-Anin, Joseph Adjebeng-Danquah, Benedicta Nsiah Frimpong, and Joseph Adomako 6 Invasive Alien Species in Libya 173Mohammed H. Mahklouf and Esmail A. Shakman 7 Elements for Reflection on Primary Invasive Alien Species (IAS) in Morocco: Actual and Potential Impacts 196Mohamed Menioui 8 Invasive Alien Species of Sierra Leone 242Prince E. Norman, Jonathan Johnny, Sheku K. Moiforay, and Yvonne S.G.E. Norman 9 Alien Invasive Species in Tanzania 263John K. Bukombe, Ally K. Nkwabi, Lazaro J. Mangewa, Emmanuel A. Sweke, Pius Y. Kavana, Steven D. Liseki, and Hamza H. Kija 10 Invasive Alien Species in Togo (West Africa) 291Kouami Kokou, Komlan Mawuli Afiademanyo, and Lakpo Koku Agboyi 11 Invasive Alien Species in Zambia 313Stanford Mudenda Siachoono, Stephen Syampungani, and Jhonnah Mundike 12 Invasive Alien Species in Zimbabwe (Southern Africa) 330Claid Mujaju, Nhamo Mudada, and Godfrey Pasurai Chikwenhere Volume Two List of Contributors xii 1 Invasive Alien Species of Bangladesh 1Sharif A. Mukul, Mohammed Abu Sayed Arfin-Khan, and Mohammad Belal Uddin 2 An Annotated Inventory of Invasive Alien Flora of India 16Anzar A. Khuroo, Rameez Ahmad, Maroof Hamid, Zubair A. Rather, Akhtar H. Malik, and Irfan Rashid 3 Bio-invasion of Aquatic Invasive Species in India 38Ramakrishna 4 Invasive Alien Plant Species Management in Indonesia 73Titiek Setyawati, Sunardi, and Sukisman Tjitrosoedirdjo 5 Invasive Alien Species of Iran 103Mohammad Mehdi Dehshiri 6 Invasive Alien Species in Iraq 126Saman A. Ahmad, Nariman S. Ahmad, and Sarbagh Salih 7 Invasive Alien Species in Malaysia 151Ibrahim Faridah-Hanum and Abdul Latiff 8 Invasions of Alien Plant Species in Nepal: Patterns and Process 168Bharat Babu Shrestha and Krishna Kumar Shrestha 9 Invasive Alien Species of Oman 184Annette Patzelt and Darach A. Lupton 10 Impact Assessment and Management of Invasive Species in Plant Diversity Centers and Agriculture Fields of Saudi Arabia 207Ahmed H. Alfarhan, Jacob Thomas, and R. Rajakrishnan 11 Status and Management of Invasive Alien Species (IAS) in Vietnam 226Mai Dinh Yen 12 Parthenium hysterophorus in Global Perspectives, with Special Reference to Sri Lanka 244A.H. Magdon Jayasuriya 13 Biosecurity Plan for Invasive Ants in the Pacific Region 275Casper Vanderwoude, Souad Boudjelas, Monica Gruber, Benjamin Hoffmann, David Oi, and Sanford Porter Index 289 Volume Three List of Contributors xiii 1 Invasive Alien Species in Scandinavia 1Kjetil Bevanger 2 Invasive Alien Species in the Balkan Peninsula 42Biljana Panjkovic, Milica Rat, Sara Mihajlovic, Laszlo Galambos, Alen Kis, Slobodan Puzovic, Bojana Nadazin, Jelena Seat, Filip Vukajlovic, Ivan Tot, and Marko Dapic 3 Invasive Alien Species of Georgia 88Guram Aleksidze, Givi Japaridze, Giorgi Kavtaradze, and Shalva Barjadze 4 Invasive Alien Species of Greece 124E. Korakaki, A. Legakis, S. Katsanevakis, P.P. Koulelis, E.V. Avramidou, N. Soulioti, and P.V. Petrakis 5 Invasive Aliens in Italy: Enumeration, History, Biology and Their Impact 190Gianniantonio Domina 6 Invasive Alien Plant Species in Global Perspectives with Special References to Bosnia and Herzegovina 215S. Barudanovic, E. Zecic, A. Macanovic, B. Durakovic, and E. Masic 7 Status and Management of Invasive Alien Species in Switzerland 253Lea Amacher, Gabriella Silvestri, and Gian-Reto Walther 8 Eucalyptus in South Europe: Searching for the Promised Land -- Introduction and Dissemination of Eucalyptus in Southwestern Europe 278Francisco Javier Silva-Pando Index 317 Volume Four List of Contributors xiv 1 Advances in the Knowledge and Study of Invasive Alien Species in Bolivia 1Wendy L. Tejeda, Adriana Rico-Cernohorska, Stephan G. Beck, Alfredo F. Fuentes, Robert B. Wallace, Guido Miranda-Chumacero, Luis F. Aguirre, and Maria del Pilar Fernandez Murillo 2 Distribution of Invasive Alien Species in Brazilian Ecoregions and Protected Areas 24Michele de Sá Dechoum, Rafael Barbizan Sühs, Silvia de Melo Futada, and Sílvia Renate Ziller 3 Botanical Gardens and the Global Challenge of Invasive Species 43David Allan Galbraith and Nadia Cavallin 4 Invasive Plants of Costa Rica Current Status and Research Opportunities 57Gerardo Avalos, Eduardo Chacón-Madrigal, and Luis Guillermo Artavia-Rodríguez 5 Invasive Alien Species in Mexico 77Patricia Koleff, Roberto Mendoza Alfaro, Jordan Golubov, Ana Isabel González-Martínez, Yolanda Barrios-Caballero, Silvia De Jesús De Jesús, Zenia Patricia Ruiz-Utrilla, Federico Méndez-Sánchez, Mariam Latofski-Robles, María del Mar Garciadiego-San Juan, and Ana Esperanza Marichal-González 6 Invasive Species in Mexican Marine Ecosystems 93Jesús Ángel de León-González, José Rolando Bastida-Zavala, Roberto Mendoza-Alfaro, and Sergio Luna 7 Invasive Species in Mexican Continental Aquatic Ecosystems 119Roberto Mendoza Alfaro, Sergio Luna, and Carlos Aguilera 8 Invasion Potential of Mexican Terrestrial Ecosystems 143Julieta Salomé Díaz, Jordan Golubov, Sarah Sifuentes de la Torre, Cristina M. Ramirez-Gutierrez, and María del Carmen Mandujano 9 The Implementation of the Mexican Strategy on Invasive Species: How Far Have We Come? 153Georgia Born-Schmidt, Jordi Parpal Servole, Viviana Reyes-Gómez, Eduardo Rendón Hernández, Erika Alarcón Chavira, and Sayra Rosio Espindola Barrientos 10 Invasive Plant Management and Greater Sage-Grouse Conservation: A Review and Status Report 165Michael R. Ielmini, Todd E. Hopkins, Kenneth E. Mayer, Kim Goodwin, Chad Boyd, Brian Mealor, Mike Pellant, and Tom Christiansen 11 Invasive Alien Biota of Venezuela 212José Ramón Grande Allende 12 Invasion of Domestic Dog (Canis familiaris L.) and Its Effect on Wildlife in Temperate Forests from La Malinche National Park (LMNP), in Central Mexico 257Arturo Estrada Torres and Iván R. Bravo 13 Biosecurity in a Global Invasion Hotspot: Hawai'i as a Model for Interagency Biosecurity Planning 270Chelsea Arnott, Josh Atwood, Randal Bartlett, Kevin Hoffman, Leyla Kaufman, Julie Kuo, Michael Melzer, Rachel Neville, Teya Penniman, David Rodriguez, and Lincoln Wells 14 Evaluating Protection Strategies for an Invasive Plant Species: Miconia calvescens 285David Lewis, Christopher A. Wada, Kimberly M. Burnett, James Leary, and Brooke Mahnken 15 Weed Wrangle, a Functional Model for Teaching the Negative Impacts of Non-native Invasive Species 303Elizabeth Lamar, Cayce McAlister, and Steve Manning 16 The Life Cycle of Invasive Alien Species Occurrence Data: Mapping, Sharing, and Reuse 308Rebekah D. Wallace, Charles T. Bargeron, Joseph H. LaForest, and Rachel L. Carroll 17 Citizen Scientists' Role in Invasive Alien Species Mapping and Management 325Rebekah D. Wallace, Charles T. Bargeron, Joseph H. LaForest, and Rachel L. Carroll 18 Effective Collaboration to Prevent and Manage Invasive Pests: Lessons Learned from the Pacific Northwest (United States) 339R. Jalene Littlejohn and J. Michelle Delepine 19 Chemical War Between Fire Ants (Solenopsis invicta) and Rasberry Crazy Ants (Nylanderia fulva) 353Shiyou Li, Wei Yuan, Ping Wang, Zushang Su, David L. Kulhavy, Fuqiang Zhao, and Steven H. Bullard Index 369

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a solid foundation for understanding American agricultural history and offers new directions for research A Companion to American Agricultural History addresses the key aspects of America's complex agricultural past from 8,000 BCE to the first decades of the twenty-first century. Bringing together more than thirty original essays by both established and emerging scholars, this innovative volume presents a succinct and accessible overview of American agricultural history while delivering a state-of-the-art assessment of modern scholarship on a diversity of subjects, themes, and issues. The essays provide readers with starting points for their exploration of American agricultural historywhether in general or in regards to a specific topicand highlights the many ways the agricultural history of America is of integral importance to the wider American experience. Individual essays trace the origin and development of agricultural politics and policies, examine changes in science,Table of ContentsNotes on Contributors ix Introduction 1R. Douglas Hurt Part I Regional 3 1 Native American Agriculture before European Contact 5Gayle Fritz 2 North American Colonial Agriculture 23Taylor Spence 3 Early National America, 1789-1830: Laying the Foundation for Nineteenth-Century Agricultural Growth 37James L. Huston 4 Agricultural Power and Production in Antebellum America 47Kelly Houston Jones 5 Making the Rural Midwest: Commodities and Communities 60J.L. Anderson 6 The Great Plains 75Thomas D. Isern 7 Post-Civil War Southern Agriculture 89Jeannie Whayne 8 Three Eras of California Agriculture: Wheat, Specialty Crops, Cotton 102David Vaught 9 American Indian Agriculture 115David H. DeJong 10 Cities and Agriculture in America 129Andrew C. Baker Part II Science, Technology, and Environment 145 11 The Historians' Corner: American Agricultural Science 147Alan I Marcus 12 Agricultural Technology 161Paul Nienkamp 13 Plant Sciences: A Brief History 175Karen-Beth G. Scholthof 14 A Counterculture Agriculture: Organic Farming in a Commercial Food Age 188David D. Vail 15 Agricultural History's Agroecological Turn 200Mark D. Hersey and Albert G. Way Part III Ethnicity and Gender 213 16 African Americans in Twentieth-Century Agriculture 215Cherisse Jones-Branch 17 Gender and Agriculture 229Sara Egge 18 Migrant Labor 244Nancy Gabin Part IV Politics and Policy 255 19 Evolving Boundaries: "The People's Department" across Three Centuries 257Anne Effland 20 Agrarian Reform: The Grange, the Farmers' Alliance, and Populism 272Connie L. Lester 21 Agricultural Organization in the Twentieth Century: Progressives, Radicals, and Social Activists 286Nancy K. Berlage 22 The Development of American Agricultural Policy 300Jonathan Coppess 23 Irrigation, Reclamation, and Water Rights 314Brian Q. Cannon 24 Consumers, Producers, and the Shifting Logic of Food Safety 327Kendra Smith-Howard 25 Meatpacking 341Wilson J. Warren 26 Agribusiness 354Peter A. Coclanis Part V Culture 371 27 Rural Life 373Megan Birk 28 Agriculture and Art 389Travis Nygard 29 Agriculture in US Literature 409Kathryn C. Dolan 30 The Blues, Country Music, and American Agriculture 421Joseph M. Thompson 31 Agriculture and Film 436Debra A. Reid Bibliography 453Sara E. Morris Index 551

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xiii List of Contributors xv 1 Beneficial Elements in Plant Life Under A Changing Environment 1 Misbah Naz, Muhammad Ammar Raza, Muhammad Adnan Bodlah, Sarah Bouzroud, Muhammad Imran Ghani, Muhammad Riaz, Tariq Shah, Akmal Zubair, Imran Bodlah, and Xiaorong Fan Introduction 1 Beneficial Element Interaction with Environment 2 Aluminium (Al) in Plants 3 Aluminium (Al) in Soil – Aluminium, a Friend or Foe of Higher Plants in Acidic Soils 4 Cobalt (Co) in Plants 5 Cobalt (Co) in Soil 6 Silicon (Si) 9 Function of Silicon 10 Silicon in Soil 11 Sodium in Plants 12 Sodium in Soil 12 Selenium (Se) 13 Selenium in Environment 13 Physiological Functions of Beneficial Elements Under A Changing Environment 13 5-Beneficial Elements Against Stresses 14 Conclusion 15 References 15 2 Role of Beneficial Elements in Epigenetic Regulation of Plants in Response to Abiotic Stress Factors 22 Muhittin Kulak and Adnan Aydin Introduction 22 Beneficial Elements for Crop and Non-Crop Plants 22 Selenium 22 Silicon 23 Aluminium 23 Sodium 23 Cobalt 23 Abiotic Stress Factors 23 Epigenetic Modifications Under Stressful Conditions 24 Studies Regarding the Effect of Beneficial Elements on Epigenetic Changes in the Genome of Plants 28 Selenium 28 Cobalt 28 Sodium 29 Aluminium 29 Silicon 30 Conclusion 30 References 30 3 Beneficial Elements and Status of ROS and RNS in Plants: Current Evidence and Future Prospects 38 Biswajita Pradhan, Rabindra Nayak, Srimanta Patra, Chhandashree Behera, Soumya Ranjan Dash, and Mrutyunjay Jena Introduction 38 Essential and Beneficial Elements in Plant Physiology: A Pleasant Dilemma 39 Aluminium 40 Cobalt 41 Sodium 42 Selenium 42 Silicon 44 ROS and RNS Production Sites in Plant Cells: Cellular Redox Compartments with Regards to Essential Elements 45 ROS and RNS Production and Their Function in Plants: Connecting Physiology to Stress Physiology 47 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 48 Acknowledgments 49 Conflicts of Interest 49 References 49 4 Biostimulant Effects and Concentration Patterns of Beneficial Elements in Plants 58 Libia I. Trejo- Téllez, Libia F. Gómez- Trejo, and Fernando C. Gómez- Merino Introduction 58 Aluminium 59 Cerium 69 Cobalt 70 Iodine 72 Lanthanum 73 Selenium 75 Silicon 77 Sodium 79 Titanium 80 Vanadium 82 Conclusions and Perspectives 83 References 84 5 Targeted Effects of Beneficial Elements in Plant Photosynthetic Process 103 Costanza Ceccanti, Ermes Lo Piccolo, Lucia Guidi, and Marco Landi Introduction 103 Effect of Metal Beneficial Elements 104 Effect of Non-metal Beneficial Elements 114 Conclusion 116 References 116 6 Aluminium Stress in Plants: Consequences and Mitigation Mechanisms 123 Akbar Hossain, Sagar Maitra, Sukamal Sarker, Abdullah Al Mahmud, Zahoor Ahmad, Reza Mohammad Emon, Hindu Vemuri, Md Abdul Malek, M. Ashraful Alam, Md Atikur Rahman, Md Jahangir Alam, Nasrin Jahan, Preetha Bhadra, Debojyoti Moulick, Saikat Saha, Milan Skalicky, and Marian Brestic Introduction 123 An Overview of Al Toxicity in Plants 124 Effect on Root Growth 124 Oxidative Stress 126 Nutrient Imbalances 127 Mechanisms for Al Stress Tolerance in Plants 127 Phenotyping for Al-toxicity Tolerance in Plants 128 Physiological Mechanisms of Al Tolerance in Plants 128 Morpho-physiological Mechanisms 129 Biochemical Mechanisms 130 Cellular Mechanisms 130 Phytohormones-based Aluminium Stress Tolerance in Plants 133 Antioxidants-based Aluminium Stress Tolerance in Plants 134 Potential Transgenic Approach for Aluminium Toxicity Improvement 134 Genes Responsive Under Aluminium Toxicity 135 Gene Family Variation 136 Interference in the Resistance Mechanism 136 Expression and Regulation of Gene Families 136 Genetic Engineering 138 Pyramiding of Genes 138 Phytoremediation of Al Stress in Plants 139 Microorganism-mediated Aluminium Stress Tolerance in Plants 142 Agronomic Management for Mitigating Aluminium Stress in Plants 143 Role of Inorganic Amendments for Mitigating Al Toxicity in Plants 144 Calcium (Ca) as a Mitigator of Al Toxicity 144 Phosphorus (P) as a Mitigator of Al Toxicity 146 Magnesium (Mg) as a Mitigator of Al Toxicity 146 Boron (B) as a Mitigator of Al Toxicity 147 Sulphur (S) as a Mitigator of Al Toxicity 147 Silicon (Si) as a Mitigator of Al Toxicity 147 Role of Organic Amendments for Mitigating Al Toxicity in Plants 147 Biochar as a Mitigator of Al Toxicity 147 Compost or Organic Matter as a Mitigator of Al Toxicity 148 Conclusion 148 Conflict of Interest 149 References 149 7 Mechanisms of Cobalt Uptake, Transport, and Beneficial Aspects in Plants 169 Zaid Ulhassan, Aamir Mehmood Shah, Ali Raza Khan, Wardah Azhar, Yasir Hamid, and Weijun Zhou Introduction 169 Mechanisms of Cobalt Uptake and Transport in Plants 170 Beneficial Aspects of Cobalt in Plants 172 Growth and Yield 172 Nitrogen Fixation and Nodule Formation 173 Alterations in Nutrient Status 173 Alterations in Physiological and Biochemical Constituents 174 Antioxidant Enzyme Activities and Synthesis of Hormones 175 Protective Roles of Cobalt Against Abiotic Stresses 175 Conclusions and Future Prospects 176 Acknowledgments 177 References 177 8 Cobalt in Plant Life: Responses and Deficiency Symptoms 182 Xiu Hu, Xiangying Wei, Jie Ling, and Jianjun Chen Introduction 182 Cobalt in Lower Plants 184 Bryophytes 184 Algae 185 Cobalt in Higher Plants 186 Root Absorption of Cobalt 186 Cobalt Transport in Plants 187 Cobalt Effects on Plant Growth 188 Cobalt is Essential for N 2 Fixation in Nodulated Legumes 188 Cobalt Enhances Growth of Non-Leguminous Crops 190 Possible Mechanisms 190 Other Beneficial Effects on Plants 192 Cobalt Deficiency in Plants 192 Cobalt Toxicity in Plants 194 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 196 References 197 9 Silicon Uptake, Transport, and Accumulation in Plants 205 Shivani Sharma, Muntazir Mushtaq, Sreeja Sudhakaran, Vandana Thakral, Gaurav Raturi, Ruchi Bansal, Virender Kumar, Sanskriti Vats, S. M. Shivaraj, and Rupesh Deshmukh Introduction 205 Molecular Mechanism Involved in Silicon Uptake 206 Seminal Studies Defining Uptake of Silicon in Different Plant Species 206 Silicon Influx Transporter 207 Silicon Efflux Transporter 209 Cordial Activity of Silicon Influx and Efflux Transporter 211 Other Homologs of Silicon Influx and Efflux Transporter 213 Silicon Transporters yet to be Discovered 213 Silicon Deposition in Different Tissues 214 Silicon Deposition in Roots 214 Silicon Deposition in Shoot 214 Silicon Deposition in Leaves 216 Phytoliths: Biochemical Composition and Deposition Patterns 217 Silicon Deposition and the Phytolith Formation 218 Role of Phytoliths in the Silicon Biogeochemical Cycle 220 References 222 10 Silicon in Soil, Plants, and Environment 227 Mujahid Ali, Muhammad Zia Ur Rehman, Asad Jamil, Muhammad Ashar Ayub, and Muhammad Tahir Shehzad Introduction 227 Sources of Silicon in Soil, Plants and Environment 228 Natural Sources 228 Artificial/Synthetic Sources 228 Uses of Silicon 229 Industrial Use 229 Application in Agro-ecosystems 229 Role of Silicon in Plant Nutrition-Growth Responses 230 Nutrient Acquisition 230 Plant Growth Promotion 230 Gas Exchange Attributes Modulation 230 Plant Water Balance 230 Antioxidant Enzymes Activities 231 Uptake and Translocation Mechanisms of Silicon 231 Role of Silicon in Agriculture 232 Role of Silicon in Abiotic Stress Management 232 Heavy Metals 232 Salinity 232 Water Stress 234 Temperature Stress 234 Role of Silicon in Biotic Stress Management 237 Pest Attack 237 Role of Silicon in Disease Management 237 Silicon-Mediated Endogenous Modifications in Plants 238 C. Mechanism of Silicon-Mediated Abiotic Stress Management 238 D. Mechanism of Silicon-Mediated Biotic Stress Management 241 Source of Silicon for Agricultural Application 241 Recommendations for Exogenous Silicon Applications 242 Conclusion and Future Perspectives 242 References 242 11 Silicon- Mediated Alleviation of Heavy Metal Stress in Plants 256 Sana Rana, Muhammad Zia ur Rehman, Muhammad Umair, Muhammad Ashar Ayub, and Muhammad Arif Introduction 256 Heavy Metal (HM) Sources in Agro-ecosystem 257 The Response of Plants Towards HM Stress 257 Sources of Silicon in Soil 258 Role of Silicon in HM Stress Management 258 Silicon Role in Plant Nutrition 259 Silicon-Mediated HM Management Mechanisms 259 Reduction of HM Uptake 259 Modification of Rhizosphere Chemistry/Making Si Complexes with Metals 260 Stimulation of Antioxidants 260 Help in Compartmentation of HM Inside Plants 260 Gene Expression Modification 261 Structural and Physiological Modification 261 Exogenous Application of Silicon to Manage HM Toxicity 261 Silicon Fertilizer 262 Biogenic Si Sources (Organic Amendments Enriched in Si) 262 Silicon Nanoparticles 265 Summary 266 References 266 12 How Does Sodium Content in Growing Media Affect the Chemical Content of Medicinal and Aromatic Plants? Two Sides of the Coin 277 Ahmet Metin Kumlay, Muhittin Kulak, Mehmet Zeki Kocak, Ferdi Celikcan, and Mehmet Hakki Alma Introduction 277 What Kinds of Functions Have Been Attributed to Sodium for Proper Metabolism of the Plant? 278 What Kind of Perturbations Might Emerge in Case of Deficiency or Excessive Accumulation of Sodium in Growing Media and in Turn, in Plants? 279 What Are the Major Mechanisms Associated with the Damage Caused by High Salinity? 279 Compartmentalization of Sodium Through Plant Parts 280 Why Is the Sodium/Potassium Ratio Important for Plant Metabolism? 280 How Do Priming or Osmo-Conditioning Seeds Using NaCl Solutions Imprint the Sequential Growth Performance or Stage of the Plants? An Approach Regarding Imprint Memory with Low Concentration versus Higher Subsequent Concentration of NaCl 281 What Are Medicinal and Aromatic Plants and Metabolites of Those Plants? How Do Those Metabolites Respond to Higher Content of Na in Media Regarding Total Content and Their Specific Compounds? 281 The Growth, Development, and Yield are Adversely Affected Under High Sodium Concentration of Growing Media, but What Can We Say for Contents of Total Metabolites or Specific Compounds? 282 Alkaloids 282 Terpenoids 283 Phenolics 286 What Kinds of Explanations Have Been Postulated for Changes Concerned with Defence-Related Metabolites in Those Plants Exposed to Higher Levels of Sodium in Growing Media? 297 Do Lower or Higher Concentration of the Sodium Favour Metabolites? 297 Two Sides of the Coin: Is a Third Probability Possible for Plant Production Versus Secondary Metabolite Production? 298 Conclusion 298 References 299 13 Sodium and Abiotic Stress Tolerance in Plants 307 Misbah Naz, Muhammad Imran Ghani, Muhammad Jawaad Atif, Muhammad Ammar Raza, Sarah Bouzroud, Muhammad Rahil Afzal, Muhammad Riaz, Maratab Ali, Muhammad Tariq, and Xiaorong Fan Introduction 307 Relationship Between Salinity and Plant 309 Salinity and the Ideal Sustainable Agricultural System 310 Relationship Between Salinity and Sodicity and Soil 311 Salt Stress Effects on Plants 311 Management Strategies to Mitigate Salt Injury 312 Salt Sensitivity 313 Genetic Engineering and Salt-Tolerant Transgenic Plants 316 Role of Sodium in Plants 317 Osmotic Tolerance 318 Proteomics Study in Plant Responses and Tolerance to Salt Stress 318 Ion Uptake/Homeostasis 319 Role of Phytohormones for Abiotic Stress Tolerance 320 Interaction Between Na + and K + in Plants 321 Interactions Between Na + and Mg 2+ in Plants 322 Interactions Between Na + and Ca 2+ in Plants 322 Conclusion 323 References 323 14 Selenium Species in Plant Life: Uptake, Transport, Metabolism, and Biochemistry 331 Zaid Ulhassan, Ali Raza Khan, Wardah Azhar, Yasir Hamid, Durgesh Kumar Tripathi, and Weijun Zhou Selenium Speciation in the Soil-Plant System 331 Accumulation and Uptake of Selenium Species by Plants 331 Transport Mechanisms of Selenium Species within Plants 333 Selenium Metabolism in Plants 333 Step 1: Conversion of Selenate into Selenite and Selenide 333 Step 2: Selenide to Selenocysteine (SeCys) Transformation 334 Step 3: Transformation of Selenocysteine (SeCys) into Elemental Se 0 and Alanine (Ala) 335 Step 4: Metabolic Pathways of Methyl Selenomethionine (MeSeMet) 335 Biochemistry of Selenium 335 Is Selenium an Essential Trace Element for Plants? 335 Conversion of Inorganic to Organic Selenium Forms (The First Step of the Se-Assimilation Pathway) 336 Adaptive Mechanisms by Plants to Evade Selenium Toxicity Participation of Se-Amino Acids 338 Volatilization of Selenium Organic Compounds 338 Involvement of Selenocysteine Lyase 339 Sequestration of Selenium Organic Compounds 339 Antioxidant Defense Mechanisms 340 Involvement of Phytohormones or Signalling Molecules 340 General Conclusions and Future Prospects 341 Acknowledgments 342 References 342 15 Lanthanides as Beneficial Elements for Plants 349 Fernando C. Gómez- Merino, Libia F. Gómez- Trejo, Rubén Ruvalcaba- Ramírez, and Libia I. Trejo- Téllez Introduction 349 Lanthanides in Biological Systems 353 Lanthanides in Plants 355 Beneficial Effects of Lanthanides in Plants 356 Conclusions and Future Research Needs 360 References 360 Index 370

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsIntroduction 1 Part 1: Getting Started With Charcuterie 5 Chapter 1: Get the Gear 7 Chapter 2: Working with Potentially Hazardous Food 25 Chapter 3: Quality In, Quality Out 39 Part 2: Making Meat Treats 53 Chapter 4: Fresh and Dry-Cured Whole Muscles 55 Chapter 5: Grinding and Stuffing Sausage 81 Chapter 6: Getting Fresh with Sausages 101 Chapter 7: You Say Salami, I Say Salame 113 Part 3: Entertaining with Charcuterie 137 Chapter 8: Always the Entertainer 139 Chapter 9: Wine and Charcuterie 161 Chapter 10: Beer and Charcuterie 177 Part 4: The Part of Tens 187 Chapter 11: Ten Wines Under $25 to Impress Your Guests 189 Chapter 12: Ten Meats You Must Try 197 Index 209

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Chenopodium Species 1 Priyanka Kundu and Prerna Gupta 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Chenopodium Varieties 4 1.3 Growth and Plantation 4 1.4 Health Effects 5 1.5 Medicinal Values 7 1.6 Anti-Nutritional Factors 11 1.7 Methods of Elimination of Anti-Nutritional Factors 12 1.8 Traditional Food Products 13 1.9 Future Scope 15 1.10 Conclusion 15 References 16 2 Herbs of Asteraceae Family: Nutritional Profile, Bioactive Compounds, and Potentials in Therapeutics 21 Chinaza Godswill Awuchi and Sonia Morya 2.1 Introduction 22 2.2 Future Prospects 46 2.3 Conclusion 46 References 47 Appendix A: Comprehensive List of Plants in Asteraceae Family 57 3 Tribulus terrestris: Pharmacological and Nutraceutical Potential 79 Jyoti Singh, Jaspreet Kaur, Mansehaj Kaur, Anvi Rana, Prasad Rasane and Sawinder Kaur 3.1 Introduction 79 3.2 Chemical Composition and Active Constituents Possessed by Tribulus terrestris 83 3.3 Nutritional and Antinutritional Content of Leaves of Tribulus terrestris 84 3.4 Medicinal Benefits of TT Extracts 86 3.5 Ayurvedic Importance and Recommendations 87 3.6 Biological Activities of Tribulus terrestris 87 3.7 Pharmacological Profiling of Tribulus terrestris 96 3.8 Mechanisms of Action of Tribulus terrestris 100 3.9 Effects of Herbal Supplements with Medication Effects 101 3.10 Herb-Drug Interconnection 103 3.11 Toxicity and Dosage 104 3.12 Conclusion 105 References 106 4 Eleusine Indica 113 Piyush Kashyap, Deep Shikha, Sunakshi Gautam and Umexi Rani 4.1 Origin and History 114 4.2 Botanical Explanation 114 4.3 Production, Development, and Maturation 115 4.4 Nutritional Profile 116 4.5 Bioactives: Pharmacology and Bioactive 117 4.6 Pharmacology 119 4.7 Health Benefits 132 4.8 Future Prospectus and Conclusion 136 References 136 5 Hemp (Cannabis sativa L.) Agronomic Practices, Engineering Properties, Bioactive Compounds and Utilization in Food Processing Industry 143 Vipul Mittal, Anil Panghal and Ravi Gupta 5.1 Introduction 144 5.2 Hemp Taxonomic Classification 146 5.3 Agronomic Practices/Growing Condition for Hemp Cultivation 147 5.4 Hemp Phytomorphology 149 5.5 Hemp Plant Parts 150 5.6 Bioactive Compounds 152 5.7 Pharmacological Properties 162 5.8 Processing Technologies (Methods and Effects) 167 5.9 Conclusion and Prospects for the Future 172 References 173 6 Ocimum Species 183 Deep Shikha and Piyush Kashyap 6.1 Origin and History 184 6.2 Botanical Distribution 185 6.3 Production 186 6.4 Development and Maturation 187 6.5 Nutritional Profile 188 6.6 Bioactive Compounds 189 6.7 Pharmacological Aspect 201 6.8 Health Benefits 205 6.9 Industrial Utilization 206 6.10 Conclusion and Future Prospectus 207 References 207 7 Role of Bioactive Compounds of Bauhinia variegata and their Benefits 217 Deepika Kaushik, Mukul Kumar, Ravinder Kaushik and Ashwani Kumar 7.1 Introduction 218 7.2 Origin and Distribution of Bauhinia variegata 219 7.3 Cultivation 219 7.4 Morphology 219 7.5 Composition 221 7.6 Bioactive Compound of Bauhinia variegta 222 7.7 Role and Structure of Bioactive Compounds of Bauhinia variegta 223 7.8 Traditional Uses as a Food 225 7.9 Therapeutic Value of Bauhinia variegata 238 7.10 Health Benefits of Bauhinia variegatata 255 7.11 Other Uses 257 8 Hibiscus cannabinus 267 Deep Shikha, Piyush Kashyap, Abhimanyu Thakur and Madhusudan Sharma 8.1 Origin and History 268 8.2 Botanical Description 269 8.3 Production 271 8.4 Development and Maturation 272 8.5 Nutritional Profile 273 8.6 Bioactive Compounds 278 8.7 Pharmacology 300 8.8 Health Benefits 309 8.9 Industrial Use 310 8.10 Conclusion and Future Prospectus 316 References 317 9 Dhatura: Nutritional, Phytochemical, and Pharmacological Properties 327 K.M. Manju, Ritu Sindhu, Priyanka Rohilla and Rohit Kumar 9.1 Introduction 327 9.2 Botanical Description 328 9.3 Nutritional Properties and Phytochemistry 330 9.4 Properties of Plant 332 9.5 Applications 341 9.6 Toxic Effects of Datura Plant 341 9.7 Conclusion 342 References 343 10 Bioactive Properties and Health Benefits of Amaranthus 351 Nisha Singhania, Rajesh Kumar, Pramila, Sunil Bishnoi, Aradhita B. Rayand Aastha Diwan 10.1 Introduction 352 10.2 Species 353 10.3 Plant Physiology and Environmental Factors for Growth of Amaranth 354 10.4 Edible Part and Uses 356 10.5 Nutritional Properties 356 10.6 Non-Nutritional Compounds 368 10.7 Medicinal Properties 369 10.8 Conclusion 376 References 377 11 Corchorus Species: Health Benefits and Industrial Importance 385 Kavya Ganthal, Nehal Sharma and Narinder Kaur 11.1 Introduction 385 11.2 Various Species of Corchorus 388 11.3 Future Scope 403 References 403 Index 407

Read more less

Book SynopsisRENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEMS Providing updated and state-of-the-art coverage of a rapidly changing science, this groundbreaking new volume presents the latest technologies, processes, and equipment in renewable energy systems for practical applications. This groundbreaking new volume examines recent advances in the area of renewable energy systems, including modeling and optimization using different methods like GAMS, HOMER, AI techniques and MATLAB Simulink, and others. Covering extensively diverse topics ranging from solar radiation prediction model to improving solar power output by studying the tilt and orientation angle of rooftop-mounted systems, a multitude of practical applications are covered, offering solutions to everyday problems, as well as the theory and concepts behind the technology. Among these applications are increasing the longevity of PV by studying its degradation and its use by operating an electrolyzer for hydrogen production, using biodiesel as a green energy resouTable of Contents1 Importance of Hybrid Energy System in Reducing Greenhouse Emissions 1Rupan Das, Somudeep Bhattacharjee and Uttara Das 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Scenario of Climate Change in the World 5 1.3 Role of a Hybrid Framework Based on Renewable Energy 7 1.4 Proposed Model Description 10 1.5 Mathematical Model of Hybrid System 11 1.5.1 Solar PV System 11 1.5.2 Wind Energy System 12 1.5.3 Diesel Generator 13 1.5.4 Renewable Voltage Stabilizing Controller 14 1.5.5 Inverter 14 1.6 Simulation Model of the Hybrid Energy System 15 1.6.1 Solar PV System Simulation 16 1.6.2 Wind Energy System Simulation 17 1.6.3 Diesel Generator Simulation 17 1.6.4 Renewable Voltage Stabilizing Controller Simulation 17 1.7 Results of Simulation Analysis 19 1.7.1 Hybrid Renewable Energy System Simulation Results 19 1.7.2 Solar PV Simulation Results 19 1.7.3 Wind Generation System Simulation Results 20 1.7.4 Inverter Simulation Result 21 1.8 Conclusion and Discussion 22 Acknowledgments 23 References 23 2 Experimental Study on Tilt Angle and Orientation of Rooftop PV Modules for Maximising Power Output for Chandigarh, India 29Tarlochan Kaur, Isha Arora, Jaimala Gambhir, Ravneet Kaur and Ayush Gera 2.1 Introduction 30 2.2 Literature Review 32 2.3 Experimental Setup 37 2.3.1 Location Under Study 37 2.3.2 Experimental Setup 38 2.3.3 Methodology Used 40 2.4 Experimental Results and Discussion 40 2.4.1 Orientation Optimisation of PV Modules 40 2.4.2 Tilt Angle Optimisation of PV Modules 43 2.4.2.1 Absolute Maximum Monthly Energy Values Method 43 2.4.2.2 Weighted Frequency Count (WFC) Method 43 2.4.2.3 Weighted Maximum Energy (WME) Method 44 2.4.3 Mutual Shading of PV Modules on Account of Row Spacing 45 2.5 Latitude and Optimal Tilt Angle 52 2.6 Conclusions and Future Scope 54 Acknowledgment 55 References 56 3 Biodiesel, Challenges and Solutions 61Mukesh Kumar and Mahendra Pal Sharma 3.1 Introduction 62 3.2 Significant Challenges Faced by Biodiesel 62 3.2.1 Low Oil Yields and Slow Growth Rate 62 3.2.2 Selection of Potential Feedstocks 63 3.3 Conversion of Microalgae into Biodiesel 66 3.3.1 Transesterification 66 3.3.2 Direct (In Situ) Transesterification 74 3.4 Microalgae Biodiesel 76 3.5 Conclusion 81 References 82 4 Comparative Overview of a Novel Configuration of a DC-AC Converter with Reduced Components 91Himanshu Sharma, Kamaldeep and Rahul Dogra 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 The Novel Topology 94 4.2.1 State of Operation of the Proposed Inverter 95 4.2.1.1 First Operating Mode 95 4.2.1.2 Second Operating Mode 96 4.2.1.3 Third Operating Mode 97 4.2.2 Boost Factor Calculation 97 4.2.3 RMS Value of the Output Voltage 98 4.3 Performance Characteristics 98 4.3.1 Boost Factor and Shoot-Through Duty Ratio Variation 98 4.3.2 Output Voltage Variation with Shoot-Through Duty Ratio 99 4.3.3 Boost Factor and THD Variation 100 4.3.4 Capacitor Voltage Stress 104 4.4 Modulation Technique 104 4.5 Simulation Results 106 4.5.1 Simulation Results with MATLAB 106 4.5.2 Simulation Results with Real-Time Simulator 109 4.6 Critical Analysis of Proposed Topology with the Conventional Z-Source Inverter 111 4.7 Conclusion 113 References 114 5 Intelligent Sliding Mode Controller for Wind Energy Powered DC Nanogrid 117Saurabh Kumar, Vijayakumar K., Ashok Bhupathi Kumar Mukkapati and Rajvir Kaur 5.1 Introduction 118 5.2 Overview of Wind Energy Conversion System 122 5.3 System Description 124 5.4 Controller Description 125 5.4.1 Particle Swarm Optimization 130 5.5 Results and Analysis 131 5.5.1 Comparative Study 133 5.6 Conclusion 135 References 136 6 Grid Integration of Renewable Energy Systems 139Pallavi Verma, Rachana Garg and Priya Mahajan 6.1 Introduction 139 6.2 Modelling of Grid-Interconnected Solar PV System 141 6.2.1 SPV System 142 6.2.2 DC-DC Converter 143 6.2.3 PV Inverter 144 6.3 Design of Grid-Interconnected Solar PV System 144 6.3.1 Design of Solar PV Array 144 6.3.2 Inductor for Boost Converter (Lb) 144 6.3.3 Selection of Diode and IGBT for Boost Converter 145 6.3.4 Choice of DC-Link Voltage (Vdc) 145 6.3.5 Sizing of DC-Link Capacitor (Cdc) 146 6.3.6 Interfacing Inductors (Lr) 146 6.4 PV Inverter Control Techniques 147 6.4.1 Synchronous Reference Frame Theory 147 6.4.2 Unit Template-Based Control Algorithm 149 6.4.3 Fuzzy Logic Control (FLC) Algorithm 150 6.4.3.1 Fuzzification 150 6.4.3.2 Inference Process 150 6.4.3.3 Defuzzification 151 6.4.4 LMS-Based Adaptive Control Algorithm 151 6.5 MATLAB/Simulink Results and Discussion 154 6.5.1 Linear/Non-Linear Load Under Steady-State Condition 154 6.5.2 Linear/Non-Linear Load Under Dynamic Condition 156 6.5.3 Linear/Non-Linear Load with Change in Irradiation 158 6.5.4 Linear/Non-Linear Unbalanced Loading Condition 160 6.5.5 Comparison of LMS-Based Adaptive Control Algorithm with Other Control Algorithms in Terms of Total Harmonics Distortion (THD) 161 6.6 Conclusion 162 Appendix 162 References 163 7 Modeling and Analysis of Autonomous Hybrid Green Microgrid System for the Electrification of Rural Area 167Sumit Sharma, Yog Raj Sood, Ankur Maheshwari and Pallav 7.1 Introduction 167 7.2 Renewable Energy Technologies 174 7.3 Economic Evaluation 175 7.4 Microgrid Protection 177 7.5 Simulation Results and Discussion 179 7.5.1 MIC – A: SPV/Wind/Biomass Generator/ Hydro/Battery/Converter 182 7.5.2 MIC – B: SPV/Wind/Diesel Generator/ Hydro/Battery/Converter 182 7.6 Conclusion 185 References 186 8 Performance Optimization of a Pine Oil-Fueled Agricultural Engine Using Grey – Taguchi Approach 191Rajesh Kumar, Manoj Gwalwanshi, Vikas Verma, Rahul Tarodiya and Manoj Kumar 8.1 Introduction 192 8.1.1 Taguchi Method 196 8.1.2 Grey Relational Analysis 197 8.2 Experimental Setup and Procedure 198 8.2.1 Experimental Setup 198 8.2.2 Error Analysis 200 8.3 Grey-Taguchi Analysis 200 8.4 Taguchi – SN Ratio 207 8.4.1 Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) 208 8.4.2 Confirmatory Experiments 209 8.5 Results and Discussion 210 8.6 Conclusion 211 Acknowledgment 211 References 211 9 Nonlinear Mathematical Modeling and Energy Optimization of Multiple-Stage Evaporator Amalgamated with Thermo-Vapor Compressor 217Smitarani Pati, Om Prakash Verma, Varun Sharma and Tarun Kumar Sharma 9.1 Introduction 219 9.2 Process Description 223 9.3 Nonlinear Energy Modeling 224 9.3.1 Material Balance Equations 226 9.3.2 Energy Balance Equations 226 9.3.3 Thermo-Vapor Compressor (TVC) 228 9.4 Formulation of the Objective Function 229 9.5 Solution Approach 230 9.6 Result and Discussion 232 9.7 Validity of the Proposed Model 234 9.8 Conclusion 242 References 243 10 Fuel Cell Fed Shunt Active Power Filter for Power Quality Issue by Electric Vehicle Charging 247Ravinder Kumar and Hari Om Bansal 10.1 Introduction 247 10.2 Specification of the Fuel Cell Integrated SAPF 249 10.2.1 Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell 250 10.3 Reference Current Generation 252 10.3.1 ANFIS-Based Control Algorithm 254 10.4 Discussion and Simulation Findings 255 10.5 Results and Discussion in Real Time 258 10.6 Conclusions 261 References 261 11 In-Depth Analysis of Various Aspects of Charging Station Infrastructure for Electric Vehicle 265Shubham Mishra, Shrey Verma, Gaurav Dwivedi and Subho Upadhyay 11.1 Introduction 265 11.2 Classification of Electric Vehicles 268 11.2.1 Hybrid Electric Vehicles (HEVs) 269 11.2.2 Plug-In Electric Vehicles (PEVs) 269 11.2.3 Fuel Cell Electric Vehicles (FCEVs) 269 11.3 Energy Storage Technologies Used in EVs 269 11.3.1 Battery 270 11.3.2 Super Capacitor (SC) 271 11.3.3 Flywheel 271 11.3.4 Hydrogen Storage 271 11.4 Types of Electric Vehicle Charging Station (EVCS) 271 11.5 Aspects and Challenges in the Development of EV Charging Infrastructure 271 11.5.1 Determining the Optimal Location for Establishing Ev Charging Stations 273 11.5.2 Ensuring an Optimized and Well-Planned Operation Management 273 11.5.3 Reducing EV Charging Time by Establishment of High-Class Charging Techniques and Battery Swapping Method 274 11.5.4 Strategically Handling the Queues of EVs at the Charging Station 275 11.5.5 Establishing a Promising Structure for Integration with Grid 275 11.5.6 A Proper Communication Channel for Managing the Grid Operation 275 11.5.7 Impact on the Environment by EV Charging Station Infrastructure 276 11.5.8 Impact on Power System Expansion by an Increased Rate of EV Adoption 276 11.5.9 Proper Sizing of Energy Storage Technologies 276 11.5.10 Sizing and Proper Methodology for the Use of Renewable Energy Technologies that will Fulfill the Electricity Demand of the Charging Station with or Without Integrating with the Power Grid 277 11.5.11 Use of Energy Storage Technologies and Charging Techniques to Enhance Stability 278 11.5.12 Determining the Peak Hours for Managing the Charging Load Demand on the Grid for Stable Operation 279 11.5.13 Estimating a Customer-Friendly as well as Profit-Making Charging Rate 280 11.6 Developments in the Sector of Electric Vehicles and its Charging Stations in India 281 11.7 Conclusion 283 References 284 12 Optimization of PV Electrolyzer for Hydrogen Production 295Sudipta Saikia, Vikas Verma, Sivasakthivel Thangavel, Rahul Tarodiya and Rajesh Kumar 12.1 Introduction 296 12.2 Hydrogen as a Potential Fuel for the Future 297 12.3 Properties of Hydrogen 298 12.4 Fundamental Concepts of Hydrogen Production Processes 299 12.4.1 Water Electrolysis – Thermodynamic Reactions 300 12.4.2 Factors Impacting the Rate of Efficiency of Water Electrolysis 302 12.4.3 Classification of Electrolyzers 303 12.4.4 Selection Criterion of Electrodes 305 12.4.5 Effects of Changing Operating Parameters, Sizes and Electrolytic Concentration 306 12.5 System Description and Components 307 12.6 Electrochemical Equations 308 12.7 Methodology 310 12.7.1 Taguchi Technique 310 12.7.2 Taguchi – Design of Experiments 311 12.7.3 Steps of Taguchi Technique 312 12.8 Results and Discussion 314 12.8.1 Taguchi Process – Operating Factors for the Perforated Electrolyzer 314 12.8.2 Taguchi Process – Result of Signal-to-Noise (S/N) Ratio 317 12.8.3 Taguchi Process – Analysis of Variance (anova) 319 12.8.4 Confirmation Test 319 Conclusions 322 References 323 13 Assessment of GAMS in Power Network Applications Including Wind Renewable Energy Source 327Vineet Kumar, R. Naresh, Veena Sharma and Vineet Kumar 13.1 Introduction 328 13.1.1 General Background and Motivation 329 13.1.2 Goal and Challenging Focus 330 13.2 Importance and a User’s View on GAMS Software 333 13.2.1 Models for Academic Research 334 13.2.2 Models for Domain Expert 335 13.2.3 Black Box Models 336 13.3 The Basic Structure in the GAMS Environment 337 13.3.1 Input Command 339 13.3.2 Output Command 340 13.4 Power System Applications Using GAMS Software 340 13.4.1 Multi-Area Economic Dispatch (ED) 341 13.4.2 AC Optimal Power Flow 344 13.5 Development Trends in GAMS 355 13.6 Conclusion 357 Acknowledgments 358 References 358 14 Multi-Objective Design of Fractional Order Robust Controllers for Load Frequency Control 365Nitish Katal and Sanjay Kumar Singh 14.1 Introduction 366 14.2 Mathematical Model of Single Area Load Frequency Control 367 14.3 Background 368 14.3.1 Fractional-Order PID Controllers 368 14.3.2 Multiverse Optimizer 369 14.4 Proposed Method to Tune PID Controller 370 14.4.1 Formulation of Optimization Problem 370 14.4.1.1 Formulation of Objective Function Related to Time-Domain Response 370 14.4.1.2 Formulation of Objective Function Related to Robust Control 371 14.5 Results and Discussions 371 14.5.1 Optimal Controller Synthesis Using Time Domain Approaches 372 14.5.2 Optimal Robust Controller Synthesis 372 14.6 Frequency Deviation for 0.02 p.u. Load Change 375 14.7 Conclusions 376 Nomenclature 376 References 377 15 Challenges and Remedies of Grid-Integrated Renewable Energy Resources 379Subho Upadhyay and Ashwini Kumar Nayak 15.1 Introduction 380 15.2 Developing a Cost-Effective and Adequate Stand-Alone or Grid-Connected Generation System in a Hilly Area 381 15.3 Challenges of Grid-Connected Hybrid Energy System 383 15.4 Energy Management 385 15.4.1 Cycle Charging Strategy 386 15.4.2 Load Following Strategy 386 15.4.3 Peak Shaving Strategy 387 15.5 Frequency Deviation 387 15.6 Voltage Deviation 389 15.7 Adequacy Assessment of Intermittent Sources 389 15.7.1 Failure Rate of PV System 390 15.7.1.1 Configuration of PV Plant 390 15.7.1.2 Calculation of Forced Outage Rate of Solar PV System 393 15.7.2 Failure Rate of Wind System 393 15.7.2.1 WTG Output as a Function of Wind Speed 393 15.7.2.2 Determination of DAFOR Using Apportioning Method 394 15.7.2.3 Reducing Multistate WECS Using the Apportioning Method 395 15.7.3 Power System Planning 396 15.8 Conclusion 398 References 399 16 Solar Radiations Prediction Model Using Most Influential Climatic Parameters for Selected Indian Cities 403Anand Mohan and Gopal Singh 16.1 Introduction 403 16.2 Introduction to Solar Energy 404 16.3 Energy Status 405 16.3.1 World Energy Status 405 16.3.2 India Energy Status 405 16.3.3 Himachal Pradesh Energy Status 406 16.4 Existing Solar Technologies 407 16.4.1 Solar Thermoelectric Technology 407 16.4.2 Photovoltaic Technology 407 16.4.2.1 High Efficiency 408 16.4.2.2 Thin Films 408 16.4.2.3 Organic and Dye-Sensitised 408 16.5 Existing Solar Modeling Techniques 408 16.5.1 Angstrom Model 408 16.5.2 Angstrom-Prescott Model 409 16.5.3 Lieu and Jordan Model 410 16.6 Relevance for Solar Electrification in Himachal Pradesh 414 16.7 Literature Review 414 16.7.1 Related Researches 414 16.7.2 Gaps in Research Drawn from Literature 418 16.7.3 Estimation of Solar Radiation Potential 418 16.7.4 Objectives of the Research 419 16.8 Methodology Used 420 16.8.1 Prediction Model Developed Using Artificial Neural Networks 420 16.8.2 Potential Assessment Using ANN 420 16.8.3 Identification of Most Influential Parameters 420 16.8.4 Artificial Neural Network – A Better Prediction Tool 420 16.8.5 Artificial Neural Networks vs. Regression 424 16.9 Prediction Model Using Adaptive Neuro-Fuzzy Inference System (ANFIS) 424 16.9.1 Potential Assessment Using ANFIS 425 16.10 Different Input Variables 426 16.10.1 Most Relevant Input Data Selection 426 16.10.2 Development of a Database for Different Models 426 16.10.3 Designing of Different Models 427 16.10.4 Calculation of Maximum Absolute Percentage Error 428 16.10.5 Selection of Most Suitable Models 428 16.11 Prediction Model for Ten Selected Cities of Himachal Pradesh 428 16.11.1 Selection of Input Variables Used for Prediction Model Using ANN 428 16.11.2 ANN Dependent Solar Radiation Estimation Models 431 16.12 Sensitivity Test and Error Evaluation of SRPM Models 431 16.13 Results and Discussion of ANN Model 432 16.14 Selection of Inputs Used for Prediction Model Using ANFIS 442 16.15 ANFIS-Based Solar Radiation Prediction Models 442 16.16 Results and Discussion of ANFIS Model 447 References 447 17 Quality Improvement by Eliminating Harmonic Using Nature-Based Optimization Technique 453Kamaldeep, Himanshu Sharma, Sanjay Kumar, Arjun Tyagi and Rahul Dogra 17.1 Introduction 454 17.2 Cascaded H-Bridge Multilevel Inverter 455 17.3 Harmonic Elimination 456 17.4 Particle Swarm Optimization (PSO) 458 17.5 Simulation Results 462 17.6 Conclusion 466 References 467 18 Effect of Degradations and Their Possible Outcomes in PV Cells 469Neha Kumari, Sanjay Kumar Singh and Sanjay Kumar 18.1 Introduction 470 18.1.1 Photovoltaic Cells – An Approach to a Greener World 470 18.2 Basics of Photovoltaic Cell 472 18.2.1 History of Semiconductors 473 18.2.2 Basics of Semiconductors 473 18.2.3 Photovoltaic Effect 474 18.2.4 Photovoltaic Cell Efficiency 475 18.3 Photovoltaic Technology 476 18.3.1 First-Generation Technology – Photovoltaic Cells Based on Crystalline Silicon Wafer 476 18.3.1.1 Monocrystalline Silicon Solar Cells (mc-Si) 477 18.3.1.2 Polycrystalline Silicon Solar Cells (pc-Si) 477 18.3.1.3 Heterojunction Solar Cells (HIT) 477 18.3.1.4 PERC Solar Cells 477 18.3.2 Second-Generation Technology – Photovoltaic Cells Based on Thin Films 477 18.3.2.1 Amorphous Silicon Solar Cells (a-Si) 478 18.3.2.2 Cadmium Telluride Solar Cells (CdTe) 478 18.3.2.3 Copper Indium Gallium Selenium Solar Cells (CIGS) 479 18.3.3 Third-Generation Technology – Photovoltaic Cells Based on Innovative Technology 479 18.3.3.1 Organic Solar Cells 480 18.3.4 Emerging Technologies 481 18.4 Degradation in Photovoltaics 481 18.4.1 What is Degradation? 481 18.4.2 Types of Degradation in Photovoltaic Cells and Its Consequences 491 18.4.2.1 Hotspots 491 18.4.2.2 Mechanical Stressing and Cracks 493 18.4.3 Other Types of Degradations 494 18.4.3.1 Corrosion 494 18.4.3.2 Delamination in Photovoltaic Module 495 18.4.3.3 Discoloration in Photovoltaic Module 496 18.4.3.4 Potential Induced Degradation (PID) 496 18.4.3.5 Light-Induced Degradation (LID) 497 18.4.3.6 Interconnection Degradation 497 18.4.3.7 Packaging Material Degradation 498 18.4.3.8 Snail Trails 498 18.5 Current Status and Challenges in Photovoltaic Technologies 499 18.5.1 Crystalline Silicon Photovoltaic Cells 499 18.5.1.1 Current Status and Degradation Level 500 18.5.1.2 Challenges 500 18.5.2 Thin-Film Photovoltaic Cells 500 18.5.2.1 Current Status and Degradation Level 501 18.5.2.2 Challenges 502 18.5.3 The Innovative Technology 503 18.5.3.1 Current Status and Degradation Level 503 18.5.3.2 Challenges 504 18.6 Cost and Efficiency Trends in Photovoltaics Over the Past Decade 504 18.7 Impedance Spectroscopy (IS) – Technique to Identify Degradations in Photovoltaics 505 18.7.1 AC Equivalent Model of Solar Cell 506 18.7.2 Impedance Spectroscopy 507 18.7.3 Procedure for Impedance Spectroscopy 507 18.8 Conclusion 510 References 511 Index 517

Read more less

Book SynopsisAGRICULTURE WASTE MANAGEMENT AND BIORESOURCE Comprehensive resource detailing the generation of agricultural waste and providing insight into waste management Agriculture Waste Management and Bioresource provides thorough coverage of the generation of agricultural waste with essential thought leadership about various options in managing the waste, including composting, vermicomposting to form manure, and biogas generation. Readers take a crucial step toward more sustainable development and creating a greener planet. The text includes a wide range of information regarding resource recovery from the waste of the agriculture sector, energy generation, biofuels, reduction in the amount and volume of waste through circular economies, and much more. The authors place particular importance on understanding and managing agricultural waste concerning the sustainability of the environment in the era of global climate change. Topics covered in Agriculture WasteTable of Contents1. Agricultural Waste as a Resource: the lesser travelled road to Sustainability 2. Sustainable Physical Methods Used For The Management Of Agricultural Waste Biomass 3. An overview of Biomass Conversion from Agricultural Waste: Address on Environmental Sustainability 4. Agriculture wastes: Generation and Sustainable management" 5. Microbiological Digestion of Agricultural Biomass: Prospects & Challenges in Generating Clean and Green energy 6. Nothing is “Waste” in Agriculture: From Nanotechnology and Bioprocesses Perspectives 7 Agro-Wastes as Low-Cost Bio-sorbent for Dyes Removal from Wastewater 8 Agricultural waste as source of organic fertilizer and Energy 9 Production of Bioethanol using Agricultural Waste: An Overview 10 Bioethanol production from Lignocellulose Waste of Agricultural waste Biomass 11 Hydrothermal liquefaction of waste agricultural biomass for biofuel and biochar 12 Biogas production through Anaerobic digestion of Agricultural Wastes: State of Benefits and its Future trend 13 Expansion of Agricultural Residues to Bio-Fuel Processing and Production 14 Creating wealth from agro-waste: success stories from India

Read more less

Book SynopsisSustainable Agriculture Systems and Technologies A robust treatment of traditional and new techniques in sustainable agriculture In Sustainable Agriculture Systems and Technologies, a team of distinguished researchers delivers an up-to-date and comprehensive exploration of sustainable agriculture and its relationship to the drivers of climate change. Along with robust examinations of food security and the agrarian livelihood, the book covers the impact of climate change and variability on agriculture, water management in agricultural systems, and precision agriculture. This book represents a significant contribution to the scientific understanding of the application of technologies that address food insecurity and climate change through sustainable productivity, system diversification, irrigation practices, crop modeling, data analytics, and agricultural policy. It also explores the risks and benefits of different agricultural systems under changing climate scenarios. The book also ofTable of ContentsList of Contributors viii Preface xiv About the Editors xvi Foreword 1 xix Foreword 2 xxi Section 1 Food Security and Agrarian Livelihood 1 1 Agriculture and Nutritional Security in India 3Shubhi Patel, Anwesha Dey, Rakesh Singh, and Ramesh Chand 2 Diversification for Restoration of Ecosystems and Sustainable Livelihood 21Sanjay S. Rathore, Kapila Shekhawat, R.K. Singh, S. Babu, and V.K. Singh 3 Impact of Total Mixed Ration on Performance of Heifers and Homemade Concentrate Feeding on Milk Yield in Dairy Animals 37A. Dey, B.P. Bhatt, and J.J. Gupta 4 Multifaceted Impact of Lockdown During COVID-19 on Food Security and Smallholder Agricultural Systems 49Aishwarya, Meenu Rani, Bhagwan Singh Chaudhary, Bharat Lal, Rajiv Nandan, and Pavan Kumar Section 2 Climate Change and Agriculture 63 5 Crop Diversification: An Approach for Productive and Climate-Resilient Production System 65Rakesh Kumar, Bal Krishna, Prem K. Sundaram, Narendra Kumawat, Pawan Jeet, and Anil Kumar Singh 6 Impacts of Climate Variability on Food Security Dimensions in Indonesia: Reference from the Nusa Tenggara Timur Province 81Boubacar Siddighi Balde, Martiwi Diah Setiawati, I. Wayan Nampa, and Mohamed Esham 7 Knowledge-Intensive Livestock Resource Management in a Changing Environment 117Avijit Haldar, Indranil Samanta, and Amlan Kumar Patra 8 Aquaculture Resources and Practices in a Changing Environment 169Shib Kinkar Das, Amit Mandal, and Sachin Onkar Khairnar Section 3 Water Management in Agricultural Systems 201 9 An Approach to Understand Conservation Agriculture 203Anwesha Dey, Shubhi Patel, and H.P. Singh 10 Quality of Irrigation Water for Sustainable Agriculture Development in India 224Bharat Lal, Abhishek Kumar Shukla, Pavan Kumar, and Susheel Kumar Singh 11 Agricultural Water Footprint and Precision Management 251V.K. Singh, G.A. Rajanna, V. Paramesha, and Pravin Kumar Upadhyay 12 Drip Fertigation for Enhancing Crop Yield, Nutrient Uptake, Nutrient, and Water Use Efficiency 267V. Paramesha, G.A. Rajanna, Parveen Kumar, M.S. Sannagoudar, and H.M. Halli Section 4 Precision Agriculture 279 13 Sustainable Agriculture Systems and Technologies 281Amit K. Singh, Avijit Ghosh, Manjanagouda S. Sannagoudar, R.V. Kumar, Sunil Kumar, Prashant Deo Singh, and Safik Ahamad 14 Geoinformatics,Artificial Intelligence, Sensor Technology, Big Data: Emerging Modern Tools for Sustainable Agriculture 295Abhishek Singh, Riya Mehrotra, Vishnu D. Rajput, Pavel Dmitriev, Anil Kumar Singh, Pradeep Kumar, Ram Sewak Tomar, Omkar Singh, and Awani Kumar Singh 15 Investigation of the Relationship Between NDVI Index, Soil Moisture, and Precipitation Data Using Satellite Images 314Shilan Felegari, Alireza Sharifi, Kamran Moravej, Ahmad Golchin, and Aqil Tariq 16 Artificial Machine Learning–Based Classification of Land Cover and Crop Types Using Sentinel-2A Imagery 326Ram Kumar Singh, Pavan Kumar, Manoj Kumar, Keshav Tyagi, and Harshi Jain 17 Geoinformatics and Nanotechnological Approaches for Coping Up Abiotic and Biotic Stress in Crop Plants 337Abhishek Singh, Vishnu D. Rajput, Sapna Rawat, Ragini Sharma, Anil Kumar Singh, Pradeep Kumar, Awani Kumar Singh, Tatiana Minkina, Rudra Pratap Singh, and Shashank Singh Index 360

Read more less

Book SynopsisKnott's Handbook for Vegetable Growers Authoritative and comprehensive go-to reference work for commercial vegetable growers around the world For more than 65 years, Knott's Handbook for Vegetable Growers has provided generations of commercial growers with the most timely, accessible, and useful information available on the subject, containing key guidance on transplant production, planting rates and spacing, irrigation, fertilization, methods for controlling diseases, and insect pest identification, plus important information on topics such as composting, post-harvest storage and processing, genetically-engineered crops, organic growing, federal regulations and best management practices, environmentally friendly pest management, and food safety. To allow for convenient and efficient access to the enormous amount of data contained within, most of the information is presented in the form of tables and charts. The work goes above and beyond to provide everythinTable of ContentsPreface to the Sixth Edition xi About the Companion Website xvi Part 1—Vegetables and the Vegetable Industry 1 01 Botanical Names of Vegetables and Common Names of Vegetables in Nine Languages 3 02 Edible Flowers 29 03 U.S. Vegetable Production 35 04 Consumption of Vegetables in The United States 42 05 World Vegetable Production 44 06 Nutritional Composition of Vegetables 46 Part 2—Vegetable Seeds 55 01 Seed Labels 57 02 Seed Germination Tests 58 03 Seed Germination Standards 66 04 Seed Production 67 05 Organic Seed Production 71 06 Seed Yields 72 07 Seed Storage 76 08 Seed Priming 78 09 Seedborne Pathogens and Hot Water Seed Treatment 81 10 Vegetable Varieties 84 11 Genetically-Engineered Vegetable Varieties 88 12 Vegetable Seed Sources 90 Part 3—Seedling and Transplant Production 99 01 Transplant Production 101 02 Plant Growing Containers 102 03 Seeds and Seeding 104 04 Temperature and Time Requirements 107 05 Plant Growing Mixes 108 06 Soil Sterilization 110 07 Fertilizing and Irrigating Transplants 111 08 Plant Growing Problems 115 09 Conditioning Transplants 120 10 Shipping and Transportation of Transplants 122 11 Grafted Transplants 123 12 Organic Transplant Production 124 13 Additional Transplant Production Resources 126 Part 4—Greenhouse and Protected Agriculture Production 127 01 Structures 129 02 Cultural Management 131 03 Co2 Enrichment 136 04 Soilless Culture 138 05 Nutrient Solutions 146 06 Tissue Composition 153 Part 5—Field Planting 155 01 Temperatures for Vegetables 157 02 Scheduling Successive Plantings 162 03 Time Required for Seedling Emergence 165 04 Seed Requirements 167 05 Planting Rates for Large Seeds 169 06 Spacing Of Vegetables 172 07 Precision Seeding 178 08 Conservation Tillage and No-Till Systems 181 09 Vegetative Propagation 183 10 Polyethylene and Degradable Mulches 186 11 Row Covers 191 12 Windbreaks 193 13 Environmental Monitoring: Soil, Water, and Air 195 Part 6—Soils and Fertilizers 199 01 Nutrient Best Management Practices (Bmps) 203 02 Organic Matter 206 03 Soil Health and Soil-Improving Crops 208 04 Manures and Other Organic Soil Ammendents 212 05 Organic Production Systems 216 06 Composting 218 07 Soil Texture 219 08 Soil Reaction 221 09 Salinity 229 10 Fertilizers 233 11 Fertigation 240 12 Fertilizer Conversion Factors 241 13 Nutrient Absorption 244 14 Plant Analysis 247 15 Soil Tests 276 16 Nutrient Deficiencies 292 17 Micronutrients 294 18 Fertilizer Spreaders 301 Part 7—Water and Irrigation 303 01 Suggestions for Supplying Water to Vegetables 307 02 Rooting of Vegetables 310 03 Soil Moisture and is Monitoring 311 04 Surface Irrigation 319 05 Overhead Irrigation 329 06 Drip or Trickle Irrigation 343 07 Irrigation Water Quality 360 Part 8—Vegetable Pests and Problems 365 01 Integrated Pest Management 367 02 Pest Management in Organic Production Systems 370 03 Soil Solarization 372 04 Pesticide-Use Precautions 375 05 Pesticide Application And Equipment 383 06 Vegetable Seed Treatments 399 07 Nematodes 402 08 Diseases 407 09 Insects 425 10 Abiotic Disorders 436 11 Air Pollution 446 12 Wildlife Control 450 Part 9—Weed Management 453 01 Weed Management Strategies 454 02 Weed Identification 457 03 Noxious Weeds 458 04 Weed Control an Organic Farming 459 05 Cover Crops and Rotation in Weed Management 461 06 Herbicides 462 07 Weed Control Recommendations 466 Part 10— Computer-Based Crop Management Technologies 467 Part 11— Harvesting, Handling, and Storage 475 01 Food Safety 478 02 General Postharvest Handling Procedures 484 03 Predicting Harvest Dates and Yields 489 04 Cooling Vegetables 496 05 Vegetable Storage 502 06 Chilling and Ethylene Injury 517 07 Postharvest Diseases 529 08 Vegetable Quality 535 09 U.S. Standards for Grade of Vegetables 538 10 Minimally Processed Vegetables 551 11 Packaging of Fresh Vegetables 554 12 Vegetable Marketing 560 Part 12—Appendix 565 01 Sources of Information on Vegetable Production 566 02 Some Periodicals for Vegetable Growers 567 03 U.S. Units of Measurement 569 04 Conversion Factors for U.S. Units 570 05 Metric Units of Measurement 573 06 Conversion Factors for Si and Non-Si Units 574 07 Conversions for Rates of Application 579 08 Water and Soil Solution Conversion Factors 580 09 Heat and Energy Equivalents and Definitions 584 10 Useful Websites for Units and Conversions 585 Index 587

Read more less

Book SynopsisPlant Breeding Reviews? presents state-of-the-art reviews on plant genetics and the breeding of all types of crops by both traditional means and molecular methods. Many of the crops widely grown today stem from a very narrow genetic base; understanding and preserving crop genetic resources is vital to the security of food systems worldwide. The emphasis of the series is on methodology, a fundamental understanding of crop genetics, and applications to major crops.Table of ContentsContributors ix 1 Antoine: Slave, Creole Gardener, and Expert Grafter of Pecan Trees 1 Lenny Wells I. Background 2 II. Work and Recognition of ‘Centennial’ Pecan 3 III. Significance 5 Literature Cited 8 2 Hazelnut Breeding 9 Shawn A. Mehlenbacher and Thomas J. Molnar I. Introduction 13 II. Economic Importance, Producing Countries, and Markets 14 III. Taxonomy of the Genus Corylus 15 IV. Genetic Resource Collection, Characterization and Preservation 23 V. Major Limitations, Needs, and Breeding Objectives 35 VI. History of Genetic Improvement 36 VII. Breeding Programs Since 1960 46 VIII. Floral Biology and Breeding Procedures 54 IX. Breeding for Specific Traits 81 X. Clonal Selection 110 XI. Rootstock Improvement 111 XII. Interspecific Hybridization 114 XIII. Molecular Markers, Genome Sequences, Transcriptome Sequences and Genetic Engineering 119 XIV. Conclusions and Prospects 125 Literature Cited 127 3 Rewiring Network Plasticity to Improve Crops 143 Madara Hetti-Arachchilage, Ghana Shyam Challa, andAmy Marshall-Colón I. Crop Ideotype Design Using Gene Networks 145 II. Leveraging Network Plasticity to Improve Crops 149 III. Multiscale Modeling to Scale Up Gene Network Predictions 167 IV. Concluding Remarks and Future Directions 170 Literature Cited 171 4 Accelerating Crop Domestication in the Era of Gene Editing 185Angel Del Valle-Echevarria, Nathan Fumia, Michael A. Gore, and Michael Kantar I. Introduction 187 II. Molecular Biology in Domesticating and Improving Novel Crops 189 III. Bringing in Genes from the Wild into Domesticated Crops 196 IV. Going into the Unknown: Can We Redomesticate in a More Specific Way to Create Better Crops? 199 V. Do Crop Models Offer Opportunities for Assisting in De Novo Domestication of Wild Species? 200 VI. Can We Revive Lost Domesticates and How Would We Breed These? 201 VII. Can Machine Learning Be Used to Detect Domestication Loci? 202 VIII. Conclusion and Future Directions 203 Literature Cited 204 5 Regional and Global Inter-Connectivity Among Common Bean Breeding Programs 213 Matthew W. Blair, Asrat Asfaw, Daniel Ambachew, andPaul Kimani I. Who Makes Bean Varieties? Breeding at Various Scales 214 II. Institutional Context of Bean Breeding 215 III. Agenda Setting 235 IV. Projects Versus Networks 238 V. New Concept of Genotype × Environment × Institution (G × E × I) 241 VI. Context-Mechanism-Outcome Framework 245 VII. Conclusion and Future Prospects 248 Literature Cited 250 6 The Plant Sciences Symposia Series: A Model for Private Sector Support for Graduate Education 255 Jason T. Rauscher and Tabare Abadie I. Introduction 256 II. Background and History 257 III. Objectives and Impact 258 IV. Conclusions 270 Literature Cited 271 7 Ideas in Genomic Selection with the Potential to Transform Plant Molecular Breeding: A Review 273 Matthew McGowan, Jiabo Wang, Haixiao Dong, Xiaolei Liu, Yi Jia, Xiangfeng Wang, Hiroyoshi Iwata, Yutao Li,Alexander E. Lipka, and Zhiwu Zhang I. Introduction 276 II. Blup Alphabet 277 III. Bayesian Alphabet 282 IV. Machine Learning 284 V. GWAS-Assisted Genomic Selection 288 VI. Hybrid Breeding 292 VII. Multiple Traits 295 VIII. Long-Term Selection 298 IX. Assessment of Prediction Accuracy 301 X. GS-Transformed Plant Breeding 304 XI. Future Prospects 306 Funding 307 Literature Cited 307 8 Genetic Revelations of a New Paradigm of Plant Domestication as a Landscape Level Process 321 Robin G. Allaby, Chris J. Stevens, Logan Kistler, and Dorian Q. Fuller I. Introduction 322 II. A Deep Pleistocene Onset of Selection 323 III. Modes and Limits of Selection in Domestication 326 IV. The Complex Emergence of Domesticates 333 V. Landscape Level Origins: A New Paradigm 335 Literature Cited 336 9 Breeding for Acylsugar-Mediated Control of Insects and Insect-Transmitted Virus in Tomato 345 Martha A. Mutschler I. Introduction 348 II. Potential for Plant-Based Pest Resistance 350 III. Work Completed Before the Start of the Acylsugar Breeding Program 353 IV. Phase 1: Acylsugar Breeding Program and Supporting Work 355 V. Phase 2: Acylsugar Breeding Program and Supporting Work 367 VI. Phase 3 Acylsugar Breeding Program and Supporting Work 373 VII. Ongoing Work: Breeding Lines to Support Creation of Commercial Tomatoes With Insect/Virus Control 394 VIII. Future Directions 398 Notes 401 Literature Cited 401 Cumulative Contributor Index 411 Cumulative Subject Index 421

Read more less

Book SynopsisWAVE AND CURRENT POWER GENERATION Written by two well-known and respected engineers, this exciting new volume is the most up-to-date and comprehensive text on power generation from waves and water currents available today to engineers, scientists, and students, also covering the latest advances in wind power generation. As the world turns further and further away from fossil fuel energy sources, unconventional and renewable sources of energy, such as power generation from water sources and wind energy, are becoming more and more important. Hydropower has been around for decades, but this book suggests new methods that are more cost-effective and less intrusive to the environment for creating power sources from rivers, the tides, and other sources of water. Written by two experts in the field, it also covers wind energy and how it can be more efficiently harnessed. This groundbreaking new volume deals with modern problems of using wind energy, namely, jet currents in the atmosphere aTable of ContentsPreface vii 1 Renewable Energy of the World 1 2 Conversion of the Energy of Currents 59 3 Collinear Units and Their Modifications 95 4 Orthogonal Power Units 159 4.1 High Speed Orthogonal Turbines in the Infinite Flow 159 4.2 Efficiency Turbine with Different Parameters 163 4.3 One and Two Blades Turbines 173 4.4 Double-Acting Turbine 184 4.5 Many Blades Turbines with Large Diameter and Control Position of Blades 187 4.6 General 192 References 193 5 Turbines with Transverse Turbulent Energy Transfer 195 5.1 Introduction 195 5.2 Efficiency of Ordinal VAWT – Brake of Flow Within the Aggregate 201 5.3 New Design with Turbulent Vertical Mixing of Streams 202 5.4 Conclusion 215 References 215 6 Damless Hydropower and Tidal Power Plants 217 7 Tidal Power as Basis for Hydrogen Energetic 231 Conclusion 254 References 255 8 High Jet Power Plant 257 References 281 9 Power Unit with a Controlled Thrust Vector – The Base for a Vehicle of Absolute Cross-Country Capability 283 Conclusion 290 References 290 Conclusion General 290 10 High Altitude Turbine (HAT): The Future of Wind Energy 293 Harnessing the Wind Energy 293 Basic Architecture of HAT 295 Air Borne Module (ABM) 296 Tether 298 The Conversion Unit 300 Ground-Based Power Generation 300 On-Board Power Generation 302 Dirigible-Based Rotors (DBR) 303 The Launcher and Landing System 304 Balance-of-Station 304 Comparison of HAT with Conventional Wind Turbine (CWT) 304 Multidimensional Scope of HAT 306 Probable Drawbacks 307 Commercial Endeavors 308 Case Study 309 References 315 Application 1 Development and Adaptation of a Mathematical Model for a Two-Dimensional Calculation of the Flow Around an NACA0021 Airfoil Moving Along a Circular Track 319 Index 355

Read more less

Book SynopsisEssential oils This exciting new volume, written and edited by some of the world's foremost experts in the field, provides up-to-date information about the chemical structure of essential oils, as well as their therapeutic and biological actions. It defines their functional uses while evaluating the advantages and disadvantages of their application in various sectors. Essential oils have been used by global communities for centuries, for different purposes such as medicinal, flavoring, preservatives, perfumery, aromatherapy, dentistry, cosmetics, insecticide, fungicide, and bactericide, among others. Essential oils are natural and biodegradable substances, usually non-toxic or with low toxicity to humans. Essential oils are botanical products that have volatile nature, known for their special odor, and found to be effective in the treatment of oxidative stress, cancer, epilepsy, skin allergies, indigestion, headache, insomnia, muscular pain, respiratory problems, etTable of ContentsPreface xxvii 1 A Methodological Approach of Plant Essential Oils and their Isolated Bioactive Components for Antiviral Activities 1 Kunal Sharma, Vivek Mishra, Kumar Rakesh Ranjan, Nisha Yadav and Mansi Sharma 2 Essential Oils Used to Inhibit Bacterial Growth in Food 31 Luiza Helena da Silva Martins, Sabrina Baleixo da Silva, Adilson Ferreira Filho, Andrea Komesu, Johnatt Allan Rocha de Oliveira and Debora Kono Taketa Moreira 3 Industrial Application of Essential Oils 49S. Kiruthika and S. Vishali 4 Influence of Biotic and Abiotic Factors on the Production and Composition of Essential Oils 69 Sandra Gonçalves, Inês Mansinhos and Anabela Romano 5 Investigation of Antiviral Effects of Essential Oils 99 Ahmad Mustafa, Dina H. El-Kashef, Miada F. Abdelwahab, Alshymaa Abdel-Rahman Gomaa, Muhamad Mustafa, Nada M. Abdel-Wahab and Alyaa H. Ibrahim 6 Mentha sp. Essential Oil and Its Applicability in Brazil 125 Daniele de Araujo Moysés, Hanna Patricia dos Santos Martins, Margoula Soares Ribeiro, Natasha Costa da Rocha Galucio, Raquel Ribeiro de Souza, Regianne Maciel dos Santos Correa, José de Arimateia Rodrigues do Rego, Maria Fani Dolabela and Valdicley Vieira Vale 7 Microbial Influence on Plants for Enhanced Production of Active Secondary Metabolites 157Naushin Bano, Mohammad Amir, S. Nabilah Jawed and Roohi 8 Valorization of Limonene Over Acid Solid Catalysts 173 José E. Castanheiro 9 Elucidating the Role of Essential Oils in Pharmaceutical and Industrial Applications 185 Sundaresan Bhavaniramya, Selvaraju Vishnupriya, Kumanan Vijayarani and Ramar Vanajothi 10 Uses of Essential Oils in Different Sectors 207 Sumeyra Gurkok and Selma Sezen 11 Chemical Composition and Pharmacological Activities of Essential Oils 229V. Chandrakala, Valmiki Aruna, Gangadhara Angajala and Pulikanti Guruprasad Reddy 12 Augmented Stability and Efficacy of Essential Oils Through Encapsulation Approach 269 Poonam Parashar and Kamla Pathak 13 Antimicrobial Effect of Essential Oils for Food Application 291 Larissa Morais Ribeiro da Silva, Jorge Alberto Sanchos-Burgos, Eveline de Alencar Costa, Maria Jaiana Gomes Ferreira, Cicero C. Pola, Carmen Luiza Gomes and Celli Rodrigues Muniz 14 Antioxidant or Antimicrobial Nature of Essential Oils to Minimize Food Waste 315 Dipak Subhash Sali, Vishal Gokul Beldar, Alok Kumar Panda and Manojkumar Jadhao 15 Application of Essential Oils to Biofilms 339 Sumeyra Gurkok and Selma Sezen 16 Biological Applications of Essential Oil 361 D. Jini 17 Current Status and Advancement of Biopesticides from Essential Oil for Agriculture, Food Storage, and Household Applications 381 Masrina Mohd Nadzir, Salfarina Ramli, Farhana Nazira Idris and Faiznur Mohd Fuad 18 Essential Oil Used as Larvicides and Ovicides 427 Gurleen Kaur, Rajinder Kaur and Sukhminderjit Kaur 19 Essential Oil-Based Biopesticides 443 Nishant Sharma, Kunal Sharma, Sachchidanand Soaham Gupta, Kumar Rakesh Ranjan, Vivek Mishra and Maumita Das Mukherjee 20 Essential Oils Obtained from Algae: Biodiversity and Ecological Importance 465 Deprá, M. C., Dias, R. R., Nascimento, T. C., Silva, P. A., Zepka, L. Q. and Jacob-Lopes, E. 21 Gas Chromatography-Olfactometry (GC‐O) of Essential Oils and Volatile Extracts 477 Eduardo Dellacassa and Manuel A. Minteguiaga 22 In Vitro and In Vivo Methods Used to Assess the Biological Potential of Essential Oils 501 Syed Ali Raza Naqvi, Sadaf Ul Hassan, Tauqir A. Sherazi, Amjad Hussain, Muhammad Rehan Hasan Shah Gilani and Tanvir Hussain 23 Biological Potential of Essential Oils: Evaluation Strategies 521 Santanu Chakraborty, Manami Dhibar, Aliviya Das, Kalpana Swain and Satyanarayan Pattnaik 24 Algal Essential Oils and Their Importance in the Ecosystem 551 S.Z.Z. Cobongela 25 Classical Methods for Obtaining Essential Oils 565 Syed Raza Ali Naqvi, Hiba Shahid, Ameer Fawad Zahoor, Muhammad Saeed, Muhammad Usman, Ali Abbas, Mamoon Ur Rasheed and Tanvir Hussain 26 A Comprehensive Guide to Essential Oil Determination Methods 583 Payel Dhar, Urbashi Neog, Biplab Roy, Nishithendu Bikash Nandi, Sankar Chandra Deka and Pinku Chandra Nath 27 Encapsulation of Essential Oils 603 Ádina L. Santana and M. Angela A. Meireles 28 Encapsulated Essential Oils: Main Techniques to Increase Shelf-Life 619 Fernanda Wariss Figueiredo Bezerra, Lucas Cantão Freitas, Vânia Maria Borges Cunha, Giselle Cristine Melo Aires, Rafael Henrique Holanda Pinto and Raul Nunes de Carvalho Junior 29 Encapsulation Technologies of Essential Oils for Various Industrial Applications 635 Tuyen C. Kha and Phuong H. Le 30 Extraction of Essential Oils with Supercritical Fluid 671 Ádina L. Santana and M. Angela A. Meireles 31 Advantages of Essential Oil Extraction Using Supercritical Fluid: Process Optimization and Effect of Different Processing Parameters on Extraction Efficiency 685 Shaziya Manzoor, Rubiya Rashid, Mudasir Ahmad, F.A. Masoodi, Pir Mohammad Junaid and Sadaf Parvez 32 Supercritical Fluid Extraction of Essential Oils from Natural Sources: Mathematical Modeling and Applications 707 Carina Contini Triques, Edson Antônio da Silva, Kátia Andressa Santos, Elissandro Jair Klein, Veronice Slusarski-Santana, Márcia Regina Fagundes-Klen and Mônica Lady Fiorese 33 Fundamentals, Mathematical Models, and Extraction Processes with Supercritical Fluids 741 Facundo Mattea, Nicolás Gañán and Marcelo Ricardo Romero 33.1 Introduction: Background 741 34 Supercritical CO2 Extraction as a Clean Technology Tool for Isolation of Essential Oils 767 T. P. Krishna Murthy, R. Hari Krishna, M. N. Chandra Prabha, Priyadarshini Dey, Blessy Baby Mathew and C. Manjunatha 35 Classical Techniques for Extracting Essential Oils from Plants 795 Yogesh Murti, Sonia Singh and Kamla Pathak 36 Acquisition of Essential Oils Through Traditional Techniques 859 Lucas Cantão Freitas, Vinicius Sidonio Vale Moraes, Sabrina Baleixo da Silva and Raul Nunes de Carvalho Junior 37 Essential Oils: Chemical Composition and Methods of Extraction 871 Arshi Gupta, Kumar Rakesh Ranjan, Nisha Yadav, Deeksha and Vivek Mishra 38 Dental Applications of Essential Oils 891 Aarati Panchbhai 39 Essential Oil-Based Therapies 903 Syed Ali Raza Naqvi, Vaneeza Javed, Naseem Abbas, Muhammad Rehan Hasan Shah Gilani, Sadaf Ul Hassan, Muhammad Rizwan Javed and Mazhar Hussain 40 Clinical Applications of Essential Oils 933 Laxmi Tripathi, Praveen Kumar, Kalpana Swain and Satyanarayan Pattnaik 41 Therapeutic Role of Essential Oils 953 S. Vishali, E. Kavitha and S. Selvalakshmi 42 Plant Essential Oils and Their Constituents for Therapeutic Benefits 977 Monika Rani, Simran Jindal, Ritesh Anand, Niharika Sharma, Kumar Rakesh Ranjan, Maumita Das Mukherjee and Vivek Mishra 43 Essential Oils Used in Packaging: Perspectives and Limitations 1009 Khadija El Bourakadi, Abou El Kacem Qaiss and Rachid Bouhfid Index 1025

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 Smart Microalgae Wastewater Treatment: IoT and Edge Computing Applications with LCA and Technoeconomic Analysis 1 Mohd. Zafar, Avnish Pareek, Taqi Ahmed Khan, Ramkumar Lakshminarayanan and Naveen Dwivedi 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Importance and Potential of Extremophilic Microalgae-Based Wastewater Treatment (WWT) Plant 4 1.3 Status of Microalgae-Based WWT Plants 5 1.3.1 Conditions and Requirements (Abiotic and Biotic Requirements, Nutrients Requirement) 5 1.3.2 Microalgae-Based WWT System – Photobioreactor System in Suspension and Immobilized Model 12 1.3.3 Evaluation of Treatment Performance 12 1.4 IoT and Edge Computing-Based Monitoring and Modeling of Integrated Microalgae-Based WWT Plant 21 1.4.1 Machine Learning Approaches for Data Acquisition, Monitoring and Analysis System 22 1.5 Techno-Economic Analysis of Integrated Microalgae-Based Wastewater Treatment (WWT) System 28 1.6 Brief Case Studies of Commercially Available Microalgae-Based Wastewater Treatment (WWT) Plants 34 1.7 Conclusion 35 References 36 2 The Use of Microalgae in Various Applications 49 Fulden Ulucan-Karnak, Mirac Sabankay and M. Ozgur Seydibeyoglu 2.1 Introduction 49 2.1.1 Algae Classification 50 2.1.2 Cultivation of Microalgae 51 2.2 End Uses of Microalgae 53 2.2.1 Biofuel Applications 53 2.2.1.1 Biodiesel 53 2.2.1.2 Bioethanol 55 2.2.1.3 Biomethane (Syngas) 56 2.2.1.4 Biohydrogen 57 2.2.1.5 Bioplastic 59 2.3 Microalgal High-Value Compounds 60 2.3.1 Polyunsaturated Fatty Acids 60 2.3.2 Carotenoids 62 2.3.3 Phycocyanin 65 2.3.4 Sterols 66 2.3.5 Polysaccharides 67 2.3.6 Polyketides 68 2.4 Biomass 68 2.4.1 Health Food Products 68 2.4.2 Animal Feed 70 2.5 Potential Future Applications 71 2.6 Conclusion 73 References 74 3 Arsenic Bioremoval Using Algae: A Sustainable Process 91 Sougata Ghosh, Jyoti Nayak, Md Ashraful Islam and Sirikanjana Thongmee 3.1 Introduction 92 3.2 Algae-Mediated Arsenic Removal 93 3.3 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 104 Acknowledgment 104 References 104 4 Plastics, Food and the Environment: Algal Intervention for Improvement and Minimization of Toxic Implications 109 Naveen Dwivedi, Pragya Sharma and V.P. Sharma 4.1 Introduction 110 4.2 Constituents of Chemicals in Plastics and Waste Generation 111 4.3 Packaging of Food and Minimization Through Concept of ® 112 4.4 Current World Production Rate of Plastics 112 4.4.1 Plastics, Food and Packaging to Distribution in Public and Strategic National Boundaries 113 4.4.2 Future Projection on Plastic Production 115 4.5 Toxic Implications of Microplastics from Food Packaging or Other Items 115 4.5.1 Biodegradable Polymers 116 4.5.2 Particulate Matter from Plastics and Implications 117 4.6 Conclusion 117 References 118 5 Role of Algae in Biodegradation of Plastics 125 Piyush Gupta, Namrata Gupta, Subhakanta Dash and Monika Singh 5.1 Introduction 126 5.2 What are Microalgae? 128 5.3 Some Biodegradable Pollutants 128 5.4 Overview of Plastics 129 5.5 Bioremediation of Plastics 130 5.6 Microalgae’s Effect on Microplastics 133 5.7 Microplastics’ Effect on Microalgae 134 5.8 Techniques Used for Analysis of Plastic Biodegradation 135 5.9 Factors Influencing the Deterioration of Plastics Using Microorganisms 138 5.9.1 Biological Factors 138 5.9.2 Moisture and pH 138 5.9.3 Environmental Factors 139 5.10 Future Prospects 139 5.11 Conclusion 140 References 141 6 Application of Algae and Bacteria in Aquaculture 147 Anne Bhambri, Santosh Kumar Karn and Arun Kumar 6.1 Introduction 148 6.2 The Major Problem of Nitrite and Ammonia in Aquaculture 150 6.3 Techniques for Nitrite, Nitrate and Ammonia Removal 151 6.4 Beneficial Application of Algae in Aquaculture 151 6.5 Algae and Bacteria for Nitrite, Nitrate and Ammonia Transformation 153 6.6 Conclusion 155 Acknowledgments 156 References 156 7 Heavy Metal Bioremediation and Toxicity Removal from Industrial Wastewater 163 Namrata Gupta, Monika Singh, Piyush Gupta, Preeti Mishra and Vijeta Gupta 7.1 Introduction 164 7.2 Environmental Heavy Metal Sources 165 7.3 Heavy Metal Sources of Water Treatment Plants 166 7.4 Heavy Metal Toxicity in Relation to Living Organisms 168 7.5 Remediation Technologies for Heavy Metal Decontamination 170 7.5.1 Conventional Methods 170 7.5.1.1 Chemical Precipitation 170 7.5.1.2 Ion Exchange 170 7.5.1.3 Membrane Filtration 170 7.5.1.4 Reverse Osmosis 171 7.5.2 Ultrafiltration 171 7.5.3 Microfiltration 171 7.5.4 Nanofiltration 171 7.5.5 Electrodialysis 171 7.6 Biological Approach in the Remediation of Heavy Metals 172 7.6.1 Bacteria as Heavy Metal Biosorbents 173 7.6.2 Algae as Heavy Metal Biosorbents 173 7.6.3 Fungi as Heavy Metal Biosorbents 174 7.6.4 Phytoremediation 174 7.7 Mechanism Involved in Biosorption 174 7.7.1 Intracellular Sequestration 179 7.7.2 Extracellular Sequestration 180 7.7.3 Extracellular Barrier of Metal Prevention in Microbial Cells 180 7.7.4 Metals Methylation 180 7.7.5 Heavy Metal Ions Remediation by Microbes 181 7.8 Alga-Mediated Mechanism 181 7.9 Application of Biosorption for Waste Treatment Technology 181 7.10 Microbial Heavy Metal Remediation Factors 183 7.11 Conclusion 185 7.12 Future Prospects 186 References 186 8 The Application of DNA Transfer Techniques That Have Been Used in Algae 195 Thilini Jayaprada and Jayani J. Wewalwela 8.1 Introduction 195 8.2 Conventional DNA Transfer Techniques in Algae 198 8.2.1 Electroporation 198 8.2.2 Agrobacterium-Mediated Transformation 200 8.2.3 Bacterial Conjugation 201 8.2.4 Biolistic Particle Bombardment 202 8.2.5 Agitation with Glass Beads 203 8.3 Novel Emerging DNA Transfer Techniques in Algae 204 8.3.1 Protoplast Fusion 204 8.3.2 Liposome-Mediated Transformation 205 8.3.3 Metal-Organic Frameworks 206 8.3.4 Cell-Penetrating Polymers 206 8.3.5 Cell-Penetrating Peptides 207 8.3.6 Nanoparticle-Mediated Transformation 208 8.4 Limitations to Genetic Transformation in Algae 208 8.4.1 Cell Wall as a Significant Barrier 208 8.4.2 Native Antibiotics Resistance 209 8.4.3 Low Genetic Stability of Transgenes 210 8.5 Future Prospects of Algae Transformation 210 References 214 9 Algae Utilization as Food and in Food Production: Ascorbic Acid, Health Food, Food Supplement and Food Surrogate 225 Abiola Folakemi Olaniran, Bolanle Adenike Akinsanola, Abiola Ezekiel Taiwo, Joshua Opeyemi Folorunsho, Yetunde Mary Iranloye, Clinton Emeka Okonkwo and Omorefosa Osarenkhoe Osemwegie 9.1 Introduction 226 9.2 The Utilization of Algae 227 9.2.1 Use of Algae in the Food Industry 227 9.2.2 Macroalgae with Application Prospects in Food 230 9.2.3 Microalgae Application Prospects in Foods 231 9.3 Pharmacological Potential of Algae in Foods 232 9.3.1 Algae Produced Vitamins 232 9.4 Future and Prospect of Edible Algae 233 9.5 Conclusion 235 References 235 10 Seasonal Variation of Phytoplanktonic Communities in Fishery Nurseries in the City of Inhumas (GO) and Its Surroundings 241 Renato Araújo Teixeira, Gustavo de Paula Sousa, Josué Nazário de Lima, Thaynara de Morais Maia, Marajá João Alves de Mendonça Filho, Joy Ruby Violet Stephen and Angel José Vieira Blanco 10.1 Introduction 242 10.2 Material and Methods 246 10.2.1 Materials 246 10.2.2 Methods 246 10.3 Results 246 10.4 Conclusion 259 References 260 11 Role of Genetical Conservation for the Production of Important Biological Molecules Derived from Beneficial Algae 263 Charles Oluwasun Adetunji, Muhammad Akram, Babatunde Oluwafemi Adetuyi, Umme Laila, Muhammad Muddasar Saeed, Olugbemi T. Olaniyan, Inobeme Abel, Ruth Ebunoluwa Bodunrinde, Nyejirime Young Wike, Phebean Ononsen Ozolua, Wadzani Dauda Palnam, Olorunsola Adeyomoye, Arshad Farid and Shakira Ghazanfar 11.1 Introduction 264 11.2 Application of Algae in Various Fuels 265 11.3 Algae and Their Pharmaceutical Application 266 11.4 Relevance of Some Algae Derivative Components as Well as Their Effects on Human Health 268 11.5 Genetic Resources and Algae 270 11.6 Conclusions 270 References 270 12 Relevance of Biostimulant Derived from Cyanobacteria and Its Role in Sustainable Agriculture 281 Charles Oluwaseun Adetunji, Muhammad Akram, Fahad Said, Olugbemi T. Olaniyan, Inobeme Abel, Ruth Ebunoluwa Bodunrinde, Nyejirime Young Wike, Phebean Ononsen Ozolua, Wadzani Dauda Palnam, Arshad Farid, Shakira Ghazanfar, Olorunsola Adeyomoye, Chibuzor Victory Chukwu and Mohammed Bello Yerima 12.1 Introduction 282 12.2 Biostimulants Derived from Cyanobacteria for Boosting Agriculture 283 12.3 Modes of Action Involved in the Application Microorganism as Biostimulant 285 12.4 Conclusion and Future Recommendations 287 References 287 13 Biofertilizer Derived from Cyanobacterial: Recent Advances 295 Charles Oluwaseun Adetunji, Muhammad Akram, Babatunde Oluwafemi Adetuyi, Fahad Said Khan, Abid Rashid, Hina Anwar, Rida Zainab, Mehwish Iqbal, Victoria Olaide Adenigba, Olugbemi T. Olaniyan, Inobeme Abel, Ruth Ebunoluwa Bodunrinde, Nyejirime Young Wike, Olorunsola Adeyomoye, Wadzani Dauda Palnam, Phebean Ononsen Ozolua, Arshad Farid, Shakira Ghazanfar, Chibuzor Victory Chukwu and Mohammed Bello Yerima 13.1 Introduction 296 13.2 Biological Fertilizers 298 13.3 Biofuel Production Technology 306 13.4 Significant of Biofertilizers 307 13.5 Relevance of Cyanobacteria 308 13.6 Cyanobacteria as Biofertilizer 308 13.7 Conclusion 311 References 311 14 Relevance of Algae in the Agriculture, Food and Environment Sectors 321 Olotu Titilayo and Charles Oluwasun Adetunji 14.1 Introduction 321 14.2 Fourth Generation Biofuel: Next Generation Algae 323 14.3 Next Generation Algae: Application in Agriculture 323 14.4 Next Generation Algae: Application in the Environment 324 14.5 Conclusion 325 References 325 15 Application of Biofuels for Bioenergy: Recent Advances 331 Charles Oluwaseun Adetunji, Muhammad Akram, Babatunde Oluwafemi Adetuyi, Fahad Said, Tehreem Riaz, Olugbemi T. Olaniyan, Inobeme Abel, Phebean Ononsen Ozolua, Ruth Ebunoluwa Bodunrinde, Nyejirime Young Wike, Wadzani Dauda Palnam, Arshad Farid, Shakira Ghazanfar, Olorunsola Adeyomoye, Chibuzor Victory Chukwu and Mohammed Bello Yerima 15.1 Introduction 332 15.2 General Overview 334 15.3 Algae Production and Cultivation 335 15.3.1 Harvesting 336 15.3.2 Genetically Modified Organisms 337 15.3.3 Growth Control 338 15.3.4 Production of Biofuels from Algae 338 15.3.5 Biochemical Conversion 338 15.3.6 Thermochemical Process 339 15.3.7 Transesterification 339 15.4 Algal Biofuels from Macroalgae 339 15.5 Algal Biofuels from Cyanobacteria and Microalgae 339 15.6 Types of Algal Biofuels 341 15.6.1 Hydrocarbons 341 15.6.2 Bioethanol 341 15.6.3 Isobutanol 341 15.6.4 Isoprene 342 15.6.5 Biodiesel 343 15.6.6 Biohydrogen 344 15.6.7 Biomethane 344 15.7 Biomass Supply 344 15.7.1 Biomass from Dedicated Energy Crops 345 15.7.2 Biomass Debris and Waste 345 15.8 Organic Material-Based Energy: CO2 Impartiality and Its Effects on Carbon Pools 346 15.9 Non-CO2 GHG Emissions in Bioenergy Systems 347 15.9.1 N2O Emissions 347 15.9.2 Ch4 Emanations 347 15.10 Microalgae for Biodiesel Production 348 15.10.1 Biodiesel Production 349 15.11 Futurity Progression in Bioenergy 349 15.11.1 Second Generation Biofuels 349 15.11.2 Biorefinery 350 15.12 Conclusion 351 References 351 Index 361

Read more less

Book SynopsisAgroecological Approaches for Sustainable Soil Management Enables readers to strengthen existing agricultural strategies to sustainably solve contemporary problems like food supply chain gaps and food scarcity Agroecological Approaches for Sustainable Soil Management explains strategies to check the deterioration of soil quality, irrigation water quality, reuse of wastewaters in agriculture after treatment, organic fertigation, and corporate fertigation, to transform current agriculture into sustainable agriculture, and demonstrates cost effective technologies for sustainable development of site-specific ecosystems. Techniques to eradicate malnutrition, such as enhanced biofortification, are also covered. Sample topics covered in Agroecological Approaches for Sustainable Soil Management include: Foremost developments in the restoration and utilization of degraded lands through organic farming, precision agriculture, climate-resilient fodder/forage cultivation, and livestock managementPTable of ContentsList of Contributors xv Preface xxi About the Editors xxv 1 Soil Degradation: A Major Challenge in the Twenty- First Century 1 Fábio Carvalho Nunes, Cláudia Cseko Nolasco de Carvalho, Lander de Jesus Alves, and Majeti Narasimha Vara Prasad 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Soil Degradation: Start and Consequences 4 1.3 Soil Protection, Conservation, and Recuperation Strategies 12 1.4 Challenges for the Twenty- First Century 14 1.5 Final Considerations 16 References 17 2 Degradation of Agriculture Systems by Invasive Alien Plants and Agroecological Approaches for Sustainable Restoration 23 Prabhat Kumar Rai 2.1 Introduction 23 2.1.1 Effects of IAPs on Soil Attributes and Microbial Diversity of Agroecosystems 25 2.2 Agroecological Solutions 29 2.2.1 Physical Weed Control Methods 29 2.2.2 Cultural Control Method 29 2.2.3 Stale Seed Bed 30 2.2.4 Cover Cropping 30 2.2.5 Intercropping 30 2.2.6 Crop Rotation 31 2.2.7 Crop Selection 31 2.2.8 Cover Cropping 31 2.3 Biological Control Methods 33 2.4 Classical or Inoculative Biological Control 33 2.4.1 Inundative or Augmentative Biological Control 34 2.5 Allelopathy in Agroecosystems 34 2.6 Restoration and Carbon Sequestration Approaches in Agro/Ecosystem/ Forestry Systems 35 2.7 Conclusions 37 2.7.1 Declaration of Competing Interest 38 Acknowledgment 38 References 38 3 Soil Management for Carbon Sequestration 49 Taoufik El Rasafi, Ahmed El Moukhtari, Ayoub Haouas, Anas Tallou, Wassila Bouta, Yassine Aallam, Soumia Amir, Hanane Hamdali, Mohamed Farissi, Abdelmajid Haddioui, and Abdallah Oukarroum 3.1 Introduction 49 3.2 Agronomic Management Practices 50 3.2.1 Tillage 50 3.2.2 Nutrient Management 51 3.2.3 Organic Amendments 51 3.2.3.1 Biochar 51 3.2.3.2 Organic Residues 52 3.2.4 Crop Rotation 53 3.2.5 Carbon Sequestration Potential of Agroforestry Systems 53 3.2.6 Effect of Water Quality and Irrigation Practices on Soil Sequestration 54 3.2.7 Contribution of Microorganisms to Soil Carbon Sequestration 55 3.3 Conclusion 57 References 57 4 Soil Degradation, Resilience, Restoration, and Sustainable Use 65 Diana Cota- Ungson, Yolanda González- García, and Antonio Juárez- Maldonado 4.1 Introduction 65 4.2 Impacts of Human Activity on Soil Degradation 66 4.2.1 Agriculture 66 4.2.2 Overgrazing 67 4.2.3 Mining 67 4.2.4 Negative Effects Derived from Human Activity 68 4.2.4.1 Organic Carbon Change 68 4.2.4.2 Nutrient Imbalance and Loss of Soil Biodiversity 68 4.2.4.3 Salinization, Pollution, and Soil Acidification 68 4.2.4.4 Sealing of the Soil and Occupation of the Territory 69 4.2.4.5 Soil Compaction and Waterlogging 69 4.3 Methods to Restore the Soil 69 4.3.1 Conservation Agriculture 69 4.3.2 Soil Amendments 70 4.3.3 Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria (PGPR) 71 4.3.4 Grazing Management 71 4.3.5 Phytoremediation 72 4.4 Sustainable Use of the Soil 72 4.4.1 Production Systems Based on Polycultures 73 4.4.2 Agroforestry Systems 74 4.4.3 Crop Rotation 74 4.4.4 Cover Crops 75 4.4.5 Conservation Tillage 75 4.5 Conclusions 76 References 77 5 Organic Farming – a Sustainable Option to Reduce Soil Degradation 83 Ana Paula Pinto, Jorge M.S. Faria, A. V. Dordio, and A. J. Palace Carvalho 5.1 Introduction 83 5.2 Land Degradation–What Are we Doing to our Soil? 85 5.3 Organic Farming–An Environmentally Sustainable Trend Expanding Worldwide 89 5.4 Organic Farming and Soil Fertility 93 5.4.1 Organic Matter 94 5.4.2 Nutrient Cycling 96 5.4.3 Microbial Biomass 103 5.4.4 Biostimulants 108 5.5 Conclusions 115 References 117 6 Ecological Restoration of Degraded Soils Through Protective Afforestation 145 Marcin Pietrzykowski, Bartłomiej Woś, and Marek Pająk 6.1 Introduction 145 6.2 The Importance of Reclamation for the Protection of Post- Mining Sites 146 6.3 Soil Reconstruction in Varied Post- Mine Site Conditions 148 6.4 Criteria for Assessing the Adaptation of Tree Species to the Conditions of Reclaimed Areas 150 6.5 The Impact of Tree Species on Soil Properties 155 6.6 Conclusion 158 Acknowledgments 159 References 159 7 Biochar Applications for Sustainable Agriculture and Environmental Management 165 Majeti Narasimha Vara Prasad 7.1 Introduction 165 7.2 Resume of Biochar for Sustainable Soil Management 166 7.3 Biochar Advantages for Sustainable Soil Management 169 7.4 Feedstock for Production of Biochar 170 7.5 Soil Carbon Storage/Sequestration 171 7.6 Biochar Influence on Detoxification of Potentially Toxic Elements in Soil 174 7.7 Biochar Mitigates Salinity in Different Crop Fields 177 7.8 Miscellaneous Benefits of Biochar for Soil Sustainability 179 References 185 8 Restoring Ecosystems: Guidance from Agroecology for Sustainability in Thailand 201 Woranan Nakbanpote, Pranee Srihaban, Wutthisat Chokkuea, Winya Dungkaew, Uraiwan Taya, Piyanutt Khanema, Ruttanakorn Munjit, Ponlakit Jitto, Piyapatr Busababodhin, Surasak Khankhum, Khanitta Somtrakoon, and Majeti Narasimha Vara Prasad 8.1 Introduction 201 8.2 Importance of Agricultural Strategy and Ecological Restoration in Thailand 202 8.3 Management of Thailand’s Restoration of Agricultural Areas 204 8.3.1 Large- Scale Agriculture and Modern Agricultural Technology 205 8.3.2 Small- Scale Agriculture and Sustainable Agricultural Systems 207 8.3.2.1 Integrated Farming 209 8.3.2.2 Organic Farming 209 8.3.2.3 Natural Farming 209 8.3.2.4 Agroforestry 209 8.3.2.5 New Theory Agriculture 210 8.4 Special Cases of Restoration and Sustainable Agriculture in Thailand 213 8.4.1 Rice Cultivation in Inland Saline Soil of Northeast Thailand 213 8.4.2 Restoring Arid Areas to Become a Floating Market in the Forest with the King’s Philosophy 218 8.4.3 Integrated Agricultural Learning Center for Sustainability 220 8.4.4 Large Community Organic Rice Fields 220 8.5 Conclusions 224 Acknowledgements 224 References 225 9 Emergy Approach to the Sustainable Use of Ecosystems toward Better Land Management 231 Joana Marinheiro, Ana Fonseca, João Serra, and Cláudia Marques- dos- Santos 9.1 Introduction 231 9.2 Emergy Methodology 232 9.3 Review Methodology 233 9.4 Mixed Farming 235 9.5 Emergy Applied to Mixed Farming 235 9.6 Emergy Indices and Scope Widening 236 9.7 Main Findings and Gaps in Literature 241 9.8 Future Advises 242 References 242 10 Agroecological Transformation for Sustainable Food Systems 247 Ayoub Haouas, Anas Tallou, Soumia Amir, Abdelmajid Haddioui, Abdallah Oukarroum, and Taoufik El Rasafi 10.1 Introduction 247 10.2 Agroecology 248 10.2.1 Agroecology and Food Systems 249 10.2.2 Principles of Agroecology 249 10.2.3 In Farm Practices 250 10.2.3.1 Intercropping 251 10.2.3.2 Biological Control of Pests 251 10.2.3.3 Recycling into Biofertilizers 251 10.2.3.4 Resilience 252 10.3 Agroecological Approaches 252 10.3.1 Conservation Agriculture 252 10.3.2 Organic Agriculture 253 10.3.3 Integrated Farming 254 10.3.4 Agroforestry 254 10.3.5 Permaculture 254 10.4 Limits 255 10.5 Prospects 255 10.6 Conclusion 256 References 256 11 Alternative Production Systems (“Roof- Top,” Vertical, Hydroponic, and Aeroponic Farming) 261 Ágnes Szepesi 11.1 Introduction 261 11.2 Rooftop Farming/Agriculture (RA) and Vertical Farming 262 11.3 Hydroponic Farming 268 11.4 Aeroponic Farming 270 11.5 Future Perspectives 270 Acknowledgments 272 References 272 12 Regaining the Essential Ecosystem Services in Degraded Lands 277 V. Girijaveni, K. Sammi Reddy, J.V.N.S. Prasad, V.K. Singh, and Chitranjan Kumar 12.1 Introduction 277 12.2 Soil and Water Conservation Techniques 279 12.3 Soil Management 280 12.3.1 Engineering Measures for Controlling Soil Erosion 280 12.3.1.1 Bunding 280 12.3.1.2 Contour Farming 281 12.3.1.3 Contour Trenching 281 12.3.1.4 Terracing 282 12.4 Loose Boulder/Stone/Masonry Check Dams/Brushwood Check Dams 283 12.5 Crop Management 284 12.5.1 Conservation Tillage 286 12.5.2 Objectives of Minimum Tillage 287 12.5.2.1 Listing 287 12.5.2.2 Crop Rotation 288 12.5.2.3 Grassed Waterways 288 12.5.2.4 Site Selection Criteria 289 12.6 Soil Erosion Models for Quantification 289 12.7 Integrated Nutrient Management to Address the Soil Degradation 290 12.8 Improving Soil Ecosystem Services Through Soil Microorganisms 292 References 294 13 Phytochemicals as an Eco- Friendly Source for Sustainable Management of Soil- Borne Plant Pathogens in Soil Ecosystem 303 Shikha Tiwari, Nawal K. Dubey, and Chitranjan Kumar 13.1 Introduction 303 13.2 Soil- Borne Pathogens: Major Threat to Agroecosystem 305 13.3 Green Chemicals as Better Alternatives to Synthetic Pesticides to Combat Soil- Borne Pests 306 13.4 Nanoencapsulation as a Booster to Green Pesticides 309 13.5 Conclusion 313 References 313 14 Restoration of Saline Soils for Sustainable Crop Production 319 Bülent OKUR, Nesrin ÖRÇEN, and Nur OKUR 14.1 Introduction 319 14.2 Characteristics of Saline Soils 320 14.3 Impact of Soil Salinization on Plant Growth 322 14.4 Restoration of Saline Soils 327 14.4.1 Leaching of Excess Salt along Soil Profile 327 14.4.2 Surface Flushing of Salts 328 14.4.3 Physical Remediation 328 14.4.4 Electro- Kinetic Remediation 329 14.4.5 Salt- Tolerant Plants, Halophytes, and Organic Matter Applications 329 14.4.6 Inoculation of Microorganisms 331 14.5 Conclusion 332 References 334 15 Conservation Agriculture as Sustainable and Smart Soil Management: When Food Systems Meet Sustainability 339 Rachid Mrabet, Akashdeep Singh, and Tarun Sharma 15.1 Introduction: Challenging A “Global Syndemic” 339 15.2 Conservation Agriculture: Exploring Concept, Objectives, and Ambitions 340 15.3 Harnessing Soil Functioning under Conservation Agriculture 341 15.4 Food Security Under Conservation Agriculture: From Farm to Fork 345 15.5 CA Systems as Drivers for Social Development and Economic Growth 346 15.6 Challenges and Socio- Economic Barriers for CA Adoption 347 15.7 Conclusion: Bridging and Bonding CA Science and Policy 348 References 349 16 The Ecology of Intercropping Systems, Tree- Cover Dynamics of Grazing Lands, and Cover Crops for Soil Management 357 Chitranjan Kumar, Anil K. Singh , Deepak R. Joshi, and David E. Clay 16.1 Introduction 357 16.2 Intercropping Systems 358 16.3 Sustainable Forest Management 360 16.4 Cover Crops for Sustainable Soil Management 362 16.5 Conclusion 365 References 367 17 Strategies for Restoration and Utilization of Degraded Lands for Sustainable Oil Palm Plantation and Industry 373 Ronny Purwadi, Sanggono Adisasmito, Daniel Pramudita, and Antonius Indarto 17.1 Introduction 373 17.2 Palm Oil Plantations: Characteristics and Issues 376 17.3 Degraded Land: Definition and Rehabilitation Efforts 380 17.4 Operation Strategies 387 17.4.1 Identification of Initial Constraints 387 17.4.2 Selecting Suitable Degraded Land 391 17.4.3 Species Selection (for Rotation Farming and Interrow Covering) 393 17.4.4 Nursery Practices 394 17.4.5 Cultivation and Maintenance 396 17.4.6 Harvesting and Marketing 399 17.5 Challenges and Opportunities 400 17.6 Conclusion 403 References 404 18 Reclaiming Urban Brownfields and Industrial Areas–Potentials for Agroecology 409 Petra Schneider, Tino Fauk, and Florin- Constantin Mihai 18.1 Introduction 409 18.2 Characterizing Urban Brownfields and Industrial Areas 410 18.2.1 Overview on Urban Brownfields and Industrial Areas and Respective Hazards 410 18.2.2 Development Potentials of Urban Brownfields and Industrial Areas 414 18.2.3 New Approaches to a Land Saving Management 415 18.3 After Use Options for Urban Brownfields and Industrial Areas 417 18.3.1 General Options and Restrictions 417 18.3.2 Restoration and Green Infrastructure 419 18.3.3 Revitalization Options 421 18.3.4 Market Demand, Barriers, and Requirements 421 18.3.5 Land Management 423 18.4 Role of Soil Management 424 18.5 Potentials for Agroecology 425 18.5.1 Dimensions of Potential Agroecological Applications 425 18.5.2 Small- Scale Applications 425 18.5.3 Large- Scale Applications 427 18.5.4 Forestry and Natural Succession 429 18.5.5 Agroecological Applications on Polluted Sites–Phytoremediation 431 18.6 Conclusions 431 18.7 Outlook 432 References 433 19 Plant Growth Promoting Rhizobacteria Sustaining Saline and Metal Contaminated Soils 437 Chitranjan Kumar, Ajay Tomar, Sangeeta Pandey, and Majeti Narasimha Vara Prasad 19.1 Introduction 437 19.2 PGPR: Modes of Action to Improve Plant Growth 438 19.3 Molecular Characterization of PGPRs 438 19.4 PGPR: A Competent, Facultative, and Intracellular Microorganism 439 19.5 Signal Exchange between PGPRs and Root Hairs 440 19.6 Ammonia Production 442 19.7 Production of IAA and HCN 442 19.8 Solubilization of Nutrients (P, K, Ca, Zn, and Mg) 443 19.9 Siderophore Production 443 19.10 The Phenomenon of Antagonism and Hyperparasitism 444 19.11 Alleviation of Metal Stress 445 19.12 Assessment of Plant Growth- Promoting Activities 446 19.13 Assessment of Bacterial Reactions to Heavy Metals 448 19.14 Conclusion 449 References 450 20 Internet of Things (IoT) in Soil Management for Achieving Smart Agriculture 457 Amir Parnian, Mehdi Mahbod, Chanchal K. Mitra, Hossein Beyrami, and Majeti Narasimha Vara Prasad 20.1 Introduction 457 20.1.1 What Is a Network? 459 20.1.2 How Does the IoT Work? 459 20.1.3 How Does the Network Work? 461 20.1.4 What Is Wi- Fi and How Does Wireless Communication Work? 462 20.2 Sensors and Data in IoT- Based Systems 464 20.2.1 The Sensors 464 20.2.2 Temperature Sensors 464 20.2.3 Humidity Sensors 465 20.2.4 Sensors for Soil Moisture 466 20.2.5 Sensors for pH and Dissolved Solids 466 20.3 The Data 467 20.4 IoT in Agriculture 467 20.5 IoT in Soil Science 469 20.6 IoT Parts: Soil Sensors and Parameter Monitoring with IoT- Linked Sensors 469 20.6.1 Soil Temperature 470 20.6.2 Soil Moisture 471 20.6.3 Solar Radiation 473 20.6.4 Weather 473 20.6.5 Fertilizer 473 20.7 A Better Understanding of Soil Conditions (Fertility, Degradation, Irrigation, Detection of Soil- Borne Diseases, etc.) 473 20.8 The Future Role of IoT in Smart Agriculture 475 20.9 Technology in Advanced Farming 476 20.10 Risks of IoT in Land Management and Food Security 479 20.11 Conclusion 480 References 480 Index 487

Read more less

Book SynopsisPolyphenols Understand polyphenols and their benefits with this comprehensive overview Polyphenols are a group of beneficial compoundsincluding phenolic acids, flavonoids, anthocyanins, and othersthat can be found in a vast range of plants and plant-based foods. Their health benefits and the variety of their applications in functional foods, dietary supplements, and similar areas have made polyphenols a $1 billion market, a figure that is expected to more than double in the next decade. This has placed increased emphasis on areas of cutting-edge research such as the use of bio-based nanodelivery systems to improve the oral bioavailability of polyphenols. Polyphenols constitutes a comprehensive introduction to these compounds, their health benefits, and their potential nutraceutical applications. It incorporates both the biochemical fundamentals of polyphenols and their precise potential to prevent numerous common diseases. The result is an essential refereTable of ContentsList of Contributors vii Preface xiii 1 Food Polyphenols: Antioxidant Properties and Health Benefits 1 Pruthvi G.R, Apoorva M.R., Anuthilakesh T., Bhargavi K., Nithish G.S., and Raghu Ram Achar 2 Plant Polyphenols as Nutraceuticals and Their Antioxidant Potentials 21 Neelesh Kumar Nema, Nayana Rajan, Merin Babu, Sachithra Sabu, Swapnil Devidas Khamborkar, Smitha Sarojam, Linson Cheruveettil Sajan, Aneena Peter, Baby Kumaranthara Chacko, and Viju Jacob 3 Polyphenols: Plant-based Nutraceuticals in Human Health 45 Monalisa Kesh and Sachin Goel 4 Nanotechnological Approach in Nutraceuticals 67 Manohar M.V., Amogha G. Paladhi, Sugumari Vallinayagam, and Mithun Rudrapal 5 Polyphenols: Nutraceutical and Nanotherapeutic Approaches 82 Mustansir Bhori, Ameyota De, Shreya Das, Aayushi Kadam, Jyotirmoi Aich, and Kanchanlata Tungare 6 Polyphenols in Food Products – Nutraceutical Applications 105 André M. Oliveira and Mithun Rudrapal Copyrighted Material 7 Functionalization of Food Polyphenols for Nanodeliveries 134 Koyel Kar 8 Nanodeliveries of Food Polyphenols as Nutraceuticals 155 Santwana Palai and Mithun Rudrapal 9 Polyphenol Rich Extracts from Spices and Nanodelivery Systems 176 Neelesh Kumar Nema, Baby Kumaranthara Chacko, and Viju Jacob 10 Nanodelivery of Polyphenols as Nutraceuticals in Anticancer Interventions 188 Kamoru A. Adedokun, Sikiru O. Imodoye, Zwanden S.Yahaya, Ifeoluwa T. Oyeyemi, Ibrahim O. Bello, Mujidat T. Adeyemo-Imodoye, Malik A. Sanusi, and Ramat T. Kamorudeen 11 Nanodelivery of Polyphenols as Nutraceuticals for CNS Disorders 225 Puneet K. Samaiya, Rakesh Sagar, Sharad P. Pandey, Gourav Jain, and Abhishek K. Sah 12 Nanodelivery of Polyphenols as Nutraceuticals for Neurological Disorders 248 Arpita Paul, Madhusmita Gogoi, and Kamaruz Zaman 13 Addressing Antimicrobial Resistance by Repurposing Polyphenolic Phytochemicals with Novel Antibacterial Potential 260 Mithun Rudrapal, Biswatrish Sarkar, Prashanta Kumar Deb, Atul R. Bendale, and Akhil Nagar 14 Toxicity of Polyphenols Consumed as Food and Nutraceuticals: Remedies through Nanotherapeutic Approaches 290 Anyanwu O. Gabriel and Ogah F. Chinenye 15 Nanodelivery of Food Polyphenols for Nutraceutical Applications 312 Aamena Yusuf, Tanisha Ambawat, Sneha Dokhale, Shine Devarajan, and Samiksha Garse 16 Polyphenols in Food Products and Nutraceuticals: Bioavailability and Pharmacokinetic Issues 343 Priaunsh Dutt, Yashika Shadija, Sneha Dokhale, Sweta Das, Shine Devarajan, and Samiksha Garse Index 361

Read more less

Book SynopsisDigital Agricultural Ecosystem The book comprehensively explores the dynamic synergy between modern technology and agriculture, showcasing how advancements such as artificial intelligence, data analytics, and smart farming practices are reshaping the landscape to ensure food security in the era of climate change, as well as bridging the gap between cutting-edge research and practical implementation. Agriculture has historically been the foundation of human civilization and benefits communities all around the world. Agriculture has a creative, adaptable, and innovative history, and as the digital age draws closer, agriculture is once again poised for change. Each of the 20 chapters explores the connection between agricultural and technological advancements, and are divided into four key areas. Part 1 covers knowledge sharing in the digital agricultural ecosystem. In the context of modern agriculture, the chapters underscore the importance of information flow. Through comprehensive revi

Read more less

Book Synopsis* A new textbook specially designed for use on rural and countryside courses * Sister book to the successful Agricultural Notebook * Edited by Richard Soffe, with contributions from a wide range of experts * International scope: also suitable for use in temperate countries outside the UK .Table of ContentsPart 1 Rural Development. 1 One thousand years of rural life. P Brassley. Part 2 Rural Society & Government. 2 An introduction to contemporary rural economies. M Winter and M Lobley. 3 More than picturesque: An introduction to contemporary rural society. M Reed and M Lobley. 4 Countryside law. T Felton. 5 Rural planning. P Tyler P Warner. Part 3 The Rural Environment. 6 Nature conservation. E Williams. 7 Landscape. S Blackburn and P Brassley. 8 Building conservation. PC Child. Part 4 The Rural Economy. 9 The common agricultural policy of the European Union. P Brassley and M Lobley. 10 Livestock production. RA Cooper. 11 Cropping in the UK. A Samuel. 12 Grassland. RJ Wilkins. 13 Organic farming. NH Lampkin. 14 Farm woodland management. AD Carter and I Willoughby. 15 Game bird management. S Tapper. 16 Equine. J Houghton Brown. 17 Amenity fisheries and aquaculture. P Haughton and D Horsely. 18 Tourism. PR Brunt. 19 Marketing management. R Soffe. 20 Managing people. MAH Stone

Read more less

Book SynopsisHerbicides continue to make a spectacular contribution to modern safe crop production. It is essential to understand how these compounds work in plants and their surroundings to properly facilitate the development of more effective and safer agrochemicals. This book provides that information in a succinct and user-friendly way.Trade Review"This revised edition of Herbicides and Plant Physiology is an excellent addition to the bookshelf of any advisers, researchers or agronomy students. This authoritative, yet readable resource (first published in 1992) delves beneath the surface of herbicide activity to examine a wide range of past and present weed control strategies and developments from the viewpoint of plant physiology, but also provides a far wider perspective." (Ecclesiastical History, 2011) Table of ContentsPreface. 1 An Introduction to Weed Biology. 1.1 Introduction. 1.2 Distribution. 1.3 The importance of weeds. 1.4 Problems caused by weeds. 1.5 Biology of weeds. 1.6 A few examples of problem weeds. 1.7 Positive attributes of weeds. 1.8 The ever-changing weed spectrum. 1.9 Weed control. References. 2 Herbicide Discovery and Development. 2.1 Introduction. 2.2 Markets. 2.3 Prospects. 2.4 Environmental impact and relative toxicology. 2.5 The search for novel active ingredients. 2.6 The search for novel target sites. 2.7 Mode of action studies. 2.8 A lower limit for rates of herbicide application? References. 3 Herbicide Uptake and Movement. 3.1 Introduction. 3.2 The cuticle as a barrier to foliar uptake. 3.3 Physicochemical aspects of foliar uptake. 3.4 Herbicide formulation. 3.5 Uptake by roots from soil. 3.6 Herbicide translocation from roots to shoots. 3.7 A case study: the formulation of acids. 3.8 Recent developments. References. 4 Herbicide Selectivity and Metabolism. 4.1 Introduction. 4.2 General principles. 4.3 Herbicide safeners and synergists. References. 5 Herbicides That Inhibit Photosynthesis. 5.1 Introduction. 5.2 Photosystems. 5.3 Inhibition at Photosystem II. 5.4 Photodamage and repair of Photosystem II. 5.5 Structures and uses of Photosystem II inhibitors. 5.6 Interference with electron flow at Photosystem I. 5.7 RuBisCo activase. 5.8 How treated plants die. References. 6 Inhibitors of Pigment Biosynthesis. 6.2 Inhibition of chlorophyll biosynthesis. 6.3 Inhibition of carotenoid biosynthesis. 6.4 Inhibition of plastoquinone biosynthesis. 6.5 How treated plants die. 6.6 Selectivity and metabolism. References. 7 Auxin-Type Herbicides. 7.1 Introduction. 7.2 Structures and uses of auxin-type herbicides. 7.3 Auxin, a natural plant growth regulator. 7.4 Auxin receptors, gene expression and herbicides. 7.5 Signal transduction. 7.6 Auxin transport. 7.7 An ‘auxin’ overdose. 7.8 How treated plants die. 7.9 Selectivity and metabolism. References. 8 Inhibitors of Lipid Biosynthesis. 8.1 Introduction. 8.2 Structures and uses of graminicides. 8.3 Inhibition of lipid biosynthesis. 8.4 Anti-auxin activity of graminicides. 8.5 How treated plants die. 8.6 Selectivity. References. 9 The Inhibition of Amino Acid Biosynthesis. 9.1 Introduction. 9.2 Overview of amino acid biosynthesis in plants. 9.3 Inhibition of glutamine synthase. 9.4 Inhibition of EPSP synthase. 9.5 Inhibition of acetolactate synthase. 9.6 Inhibition of histidine biosynthesis. References. 10 The Disruption of Cell Division. 10.1 Introduction. 10.2 The cell cycle. 10.3 Control of the cell cycle. 10.4 Microtubule structure and function. 10.5 Herbicidal interference with microtubules. 10.6 Selectivity and metabolism. References. 11 The Inhibition of Cellulose Biosynthesis. 11.1 Introduction. 11.2 Cellulose biosynthesis inhibitors. 11.3 Selectivity and metabolism. References. 12 Herbicide Resistance. 12.1 Introduction. 12.2 Mechanisms of herbicide resistance. 12.3 How resistance occurs. 12.4 Chronology of herbicide resistance. 12.5 Herbicide resistance case study – black-grass (Alopecurus myosuroides Huds.) 12.6 The future development of herbicide resistance. References. 13 Herbicide-Tolerant Crops. 13.1 Introduction. 13.2 History of genetically modified, herbicide-tolerant crops. 13.3 How genetically modified crops are produced. 13.4 Genetically engineered herbicide tolerance to glyphosate. 13.5 Genetically modified herbicide tolerance to glufosinate. 13.6 Genetically modified herbicide tolerance to bromoxynil. 13.7 Genetically modified herbicide tolerance to sulfonylureas. 13.8 Genetically modified herbicide tolerance to 2,4-D . 13.9 Genetically modified herbicide tolerance to fops and dims. 13.10 Genetically modified herbicide tolerance to phytoene desaturase. 13.11 Herbicide tolerance due to engineering of enhanced metabolism. 13.12 Herbicide tolerance through means other than genetic modification. 13.13 Genetically modified high-tolerance crops in practice: the UK Farm-Scale Evaluations, 2000–2. 13.14 Future developments. References. 14 Further Targets For Herbicide Development. 14.1 Introduction. 14.2 Protein turnover. 14.3 Biological control of weeds. 14.4 Natural products as leads for new herbicides. References. Glossary. Index.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis text incorporates new information and devotes more time and space to the issues of agricultural industrialization and market structure likely to be faced by applied economists.Table of ContentsPreface. Acknowledgments. Introduction. Part I: Models and Analysis of Perfectly Competitive Markets:. 1. Market Demand. 2. Market Supply. 3. The Market. 4. Marketing Margins. 5. Stocks and International Markets. 6. Price Variation Across Space. 7. Price Variation Through Time. 8. Product Quality. 9. Futures Markets. Part II: Imperfect Competition, Market Structure, and Market Analysis:. 10. Monopoly. 11. Strategic Interaction. 12. Imperfect Competition. 13. Vertical Coordination and Contracting in Agriculture. Part III: Advanced Techniques with Surveys and Experimental Economics:. 14. The Basics of Survey Design. 15. Individual Utility Estimation and Conjoint Analysis. 16. Experimental Methods. Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe control of diseases in crops is still largely dominated by the use of fungicides, but with the increasing incidence of fungicide resistance, plus mounting concern for the environment resulting from excessive agrochemical use, the search for alternative, reliable methods of disease control is gaining momentum. The purpose of this important book is to examine the development and exploitation (or potential for exploitation) of a range of non-chemical approaches to disease control, with a focus on the need for a greater understanding of crop ecology as the basis for effective disease control in the field. Chapters in the book, written by international experts in the subject area, include coverage of: biological control methods host-plant resistance the exploitation of tolerance and the use of bacteriophages Carefully edited by Professor Dale Walters, widely respected for his work in the area of crop protection, Disease ControTrade Review?Here, Walters, a crop protection specialist, offers readers a remarkable series of papers discussing greatly improved control methods.? (CHOICE, October 2009)Table of ContentsList of contributors Preface Chapter 1 Introduction Dale Walters 1.1 The importance of plant disease 1.2 Problems associated with controlling plant disease 1.3 Conclusions 1.4 Acknowledgements 1.5 References Chapter 2 Managing crop disease through cultural practices Dale Walters 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Reducing the amount of pathogen inoculum 2.3 Reducing pathogen spread within the crop 2.4 Soil amendments and mulching 2.5 Suppressive soils 2.6 Intercropping 2.7 Conclusions 2.8 Acknowledgements 2.9 References Chapter 3 Biological control agents in plant disease control John M. Whipps and Mark P. McQuilken 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Modes of action 3.3 Production, formulation and application 3.4 Commercial products available and uses 3.5 Factors affecting variable efficacy and constraints on commercial developments 3.6 Future research directions and conclusions 3.7 References Chapter 4 Induced resistance for plant disease control Tony Reglinski and Dale Walters 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Induced resistance in practice 4.3 Costs associated with induced resistance 4.4 Trade-offs associated with induced resistance 4.5 Future prospects 4.6 Acknowledgements 4.7 References Chapter 5 The use of composts and compost extracts in plant disease control Audrey Litterick and Martin Wood 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Definitions of composts, composting, compost extracts and compost teas 5.3 Production of composts and compost extracts/teas 5.4 History of the use of composts and compost extracts in crop production 5.5 Current use of composts and compost extracts/teas in crop production 5.6 Crop and soil health 5.7 Effects of composts on plant disease 5.8 Effects of compost extracts/teas on plant disease 5.9 Mechanisms involved in the suppression/control of plant disease using composts and compost extracts/teas 5.10 Conclusions and future work 5.11 References Chapter 6 The use of host plant resistance in disease control Hugh Wallwork 6.1 Introduction and benefits of resistance 6.2 Types of resistance 6.3 Sources of resistance 6.4 Breeding methodology and selection strategies for inbreeding crops 6.5 Deployment of resistance 6.6 Conclusion 6.7 References Chapter 7 Crop tolerance of foliar pathogens: possible mechanisms and potential for exploitation Ian Bingham and Adrian Newton 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Concepts and definitions – a historical perspective 7.3 Yield formation 7.4 How can tolerance be quantified? 7.5 Potential crop traits conferring tolerance 7.6 Is there a physiological or ecological cost to tolerance? 7.7 Role of modelling 7.8 Strategy for improving tolerance 7.9 Acknowledgements 7.10 References Chapter 8 Plant disease control through the use of variety mixtures Adrian Newton 8.1 Introduction 8.2 Trial demonstrations of mixtures 8.3 Mixtures used in practice 8.4 Conclusion 8.5 References Chapter 9 Biofumigation for plant disease control – from the fundamentals to the farming system John Kirkegaard 9.1 Introduction 9.2 The glucosinolate–myrosinase system 9.3 Modes of utilization 9.4 Separating GSL-related suppression from other effects of biofumigants 9.5 Maximizing biofumigation potential 9.6 Release efficiency, fate and activity of hydrolysis products in soil 9.7 Ecological considerations 9.8 Field implementation 9.9 Summary 9.10 References Chapter 10 Control of plant disease through soil solarization Abraham Gamliel and Jaacov Katan 10.1 Introduction 10.2 Principles of soil solarization 10.3 Pathogen and weed control 10.4 Mechanisms of control and plant-growth improvement 10.5 Integrated management 10.6 Modelling of soil solarization and decision-making tools 10.7 Improvements by intensifying soil heating 10.8 Implementation and application 10.9 Special uses of solarization 10.10 Solarization and the MB crisis 10.11 Concluding remarks 10.12 References Chapter 11 Plant disease control by nutrient management: sulphur Silvia Haneklaus, Elke Bloem and Ewald Schnug 11.1 Introduction 11.2 Sulphur-induced resistance – agronomic, physiological and molecular aspects 11.3 Perspectives in research 11.4 References Chapter 12 Control of plant disease by disguising the leaf surface Dale Walters 12.1 Introduction 12.2 Controlling disease using film-forming polymers 12.3 Particle films as agents for control of plant diseases 12.4 Disrupting spore adhesion to the leaf surface 12.5 Conclusions 12.6 Acknowledgements 12.7 References Chapter 13 Bacteriophages as agents for the control of plant pathogenic bacteria Botond Balogh, Timur Momol, Aleksa Obradovic and Jeffrey Jones 13.1 Introduction – disease control for bacterial diseases 13.2 Biological control 13.3 Early use of bacteriophages in agriculture 13.4 Recent approaches for using phages in plant pathology 13.5 Challenges in using phages for disease control 13.6 Phages as part of an integrated management strategy 13.7 Summary 13.8 References Chapter 14 Controlling plant disease using biological and environmentally friendly approaches: making it work in practice Dale Walters 14.1 Introduction 14.2 How might biologically based disease control be used in crop protection practice? 14.3 Biologically based disease control: barriers to implementation 14.4 Conclusions 14.5 Acknowledgements 14.6 References Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisTWO OXEN AHEAD This revealing study of farming practices in societies around the Mediterranean draws out the valuable contribution that knowledge of recent practices can make to our understanding of husbandry in prehistoric and Greco-Roman times. It reflects increased academic interest in the formative influence of farming regimes on the societies they were designed to feed. The author's intensive research took him to farming communities around the Mediterranean, where he recorded observational and interview data on differing farming strategies and practices, many of which can be traced back to classical antiquity or earlier. The book documents these variables, through the annual chaîne opératoire (from ploughing and sowing to harvesting and threshing), interannual schemes of crop rotation and husbandry, and the generational cycle of household development. It traces the interdependence of these successive stages and explores how cultural tradition, ecological condiTrade ReviewReview copy sent on 06.10.14 to Historia Agraria Review copy sent on 07.08.14 to Environmental ArchaeologyReview copy sent on 30.04.14 to Near Eastern ArchaeologyReview copy sent on 26.03.14 to Tijdschrift voor Mediterrane ArcheologieB = Standard Review ListNA review list: (COPIES SENT 23.10.14)1. American Journal of Archaeology2. Bryn Mawr Classical Review3. Classical Journal4. Classical Bulletin5. Classical World UK review list: (COPIES SENT 23.10.14)1. Antiquity2. Journal of Hellenic Studies 3. Journal of Roman Studies4. Environmental Archaeology 5. Rural History6. Agricultural History Review(NOT SENT, no unsolicted reviews)Journal of Anthropological ArchaeologyReference ReviewsTable of ContentsPreface viii Acknowledgments x 1 Introduction: Mediterranean Farming between Longue Durée and Contingency 1 1.1 Fieldwork 3 1.2 Scales of Analysis 8 2 Working the Earth: Tillage and Sowing 11 2.1 Two-Oxen Households in Paliambela 14 2.2 Scratching a Living in the Hills of Messenia 19 2.3 Tillage Time and Sowing Season from Assiros to Asturias 21 2.4 Juggling with Seedcorn 28 2.5 Flexible Farmers 31 2.6 Ard, Hoe, and Scale of Cultivation 33 2.6.1 Ard versus hoe: Benefits 33 2.6.2 Ard versus hoe: Costs 47 2.6.3 On balance: Hoe or ard, cows or oxen? 55 2.7 Tillage and Sowing in the Past 57 3 Harvest Time 67 3.1 Amorgos: From Field to Threshing Floor 68 3.2 When to Reap 71 3.3 What and How to Reap 77 3.4 After Reaping: Binding, Drying, and Transporting the Harvest 89 3.5 Who and How Many to Reap 102 3.6 Harvest Ceremonies 112 3.7 Reaping in the Past 113 4 Sorting the Wheat from the Chaff 127 4.1 Amorgos: On and After the Threshing Floor 127 4.2 Ways of Threshing 136 4.3 Ways of Winnowing and Coarse Sieving 151 4.4 Cleaning for Storage and Consumption 154 4.5 Storage 157 4.6 Consumption 163 4.7 Questions of Scale: Labor and Time Stress 166 4.8 Threshing Floor Customs 173 4.9 Crop Processing in the Past 174 5 Managing the Land: Coping with Failure and Planning for Success 191 5.1 Watching the Corn Grow 191 5.2 Planning for Success: Fallowing and Rotation 199 5.2.1 Fallowing 199 5.2.2 Crop rotation 201 5.2.3 Fallowing and rotation in space 206 5.2.4 Hedging bets: Mixed cropping 210 5.3 Planning for Success: Manuring 212 5.3.1 Stall manure 213 5.3.2 Manuring by folded livestock 226 5.3.3 Manuring by grazing livestock 229 5.4 Planning for Success, Mitigating Failure: Irrigation 230 5.5 Averting Failure: Weeding 233 5.6 Crop Husbandry and Crop Yields 238 5.7 Crop Husbandry and Yields in the Past 244 6 Family Planning: Land, Labor and Livestock 259 6.1 Clearance 260 6.1.1 Uprooting deciduous woodland in lowland northern Greece 260 6.1.2 Opening up the maquis in southern Greece 264 6.1.3 Shifting cultivation: From Crete to Asturias 267 6.1.4 Slashing, burning, and shifting 269 6.2 Long-Term Improvement: Deep Tillage, Terracing, and Enclosure 271 6.3 Extending and Improving Cultivable Land: Drainage and Irrigation 277 6.4 Counting the Cost of Extension and Improvement 281 6.5 Subsistence and Cash Crops 283 6.6 Mixed Farming: Livestock 289 6.7 Labor, Land, and Livestock: The Domestic Cycle 295 6.8 Household and Community 304 6.9 Land, Labor, and Livestock in the Past 311 7 Homo agronomicus? Mediterranean Farming, Present and Past 329 7.1 Analogies for the Past: “Matters of Fact” and “Matters of Interest” 330 7.2 Cultural Reason 332 7.3 Environmental and Technological Constraints 336 7.4 Practical Reason: Costs, Benefits, and Knowledgeable Farmers 338 7.5 Ancient Farmers: Knowledgeable and Rational? 346 7.6 Farming in the Mediterranean: Analogy and Change 347 Glossary 360 Index 362

Read more less

Book SynopsisBased on contemporary accounts, settlers' reminiscences, and the work of other historians, Sod Busting dives deeply into the practical realities of how things worked to make vivid one of the quintessentially American experiences, breaking new land.Trade ReviewA fine recommendation for any American history collection. Midwest Book Review Danbom provides the reader with more than a conventional understanding of the region, whether it be pointing out some of the myths about homesteading or the role of the independent woman homesteader. Thus, it is an excellent undergraduate resource. Highly recommended. Choice An excellent introduction to the challenges and opportunities of agricultural life in a difficult region for farming... Danbom's Sod Busting is an outstanding survey of farm making on the Great Plains. This elegantly written, well-researched volume will find an audience with students, historians, and general readers. Those with an interest in Iowa history will find much useful information here that helps to explain settlement in the western part of the state. Anyone teaching or studying the Great Plains will want to add this book to their library. -- Jeff Bremer Annals of Iowa In a short space, Danborn synthesizes the information that might be gained from a half dozen monographs. Undergraduates and upper-level high school students will find the work readable and useful. -- Alexandra Kindell Western Historical Quarterly Danbom presents a cogent and engaging portrait of the real lives of those who settled the Great Plains... If you want not only solid history, but economics, geography, ethnic and gender studies, psychology, and sociology this short book will serve you well. Nebraska History This outstanding work is a masterpiece of both conciseness and comprehensiveness. Great Plains QuarterlyTable of ContentsPrefacePrologue1. How They Acquired Land2. How They Built Farms3. How They Got Credit4. How They Built Communities5. How the Plains MaturedEpilogueNotesSelected Further ReadingIndex

Read more less

Book SynopsisBased on contemporary accounts, settlers' reminiscences, and the work of other historians, Sod Busting dives deeply into the practical realities of how things worked to make vivid one of the quintessentially American experiences, breaking new land.Trade ReviewA fine recommendation for any American history collection. Midwest Book Review Danbom provides the reader with more than a conventional understanding of the region, whether it be pointing out some of the myths about homesteading or the role of the independent woman homesteader. Thus, it is an excellent undergraduate resource. Highly recommended. Choice An excellent introduction to the challenges and opportunities of agricultural life in a difficult region for farming... Danbom's Sod Busting is an outstanding survey of farm making on the Great Plains. This elegantly written, well-researched volume will find an audience with students, historians, and general readers. Those with an interest in Iowa history will find much useful information here that helps to explain settlement in the western part of the state. Anyone teaching or studying the Great Plains will want to add this book to their library. -- Jeff Bremer Annals of Iowa In a short space, Danborn synthesizes the information that might be gained from a half dozen monographs. Undergraduates and upper-level high school students will find the work readable and useful. -- Alexandra Kindell Western Historical Quarterly Danbom presents a cogent and engaging portrait of the real lives of those who settled the Great Plains... If you want not only solid history, but economics, geography, ethnic and gender studies, psychology, and sociology this short book will serve you well. Nebraska History This outstanding work is a masterpiece of both conciseness and comprehensiveness. Great Plains QuarterlyTable of ContentsPrefacePrologue1. How They Acquired Land2. How They Built Farms3. How They Got Credit4. How They Built Communities5. How the Plains MaturedEpilogueNotesSelected Further ReadingIndex

Read more less

Book SynopsisHow did Bright Flue-Cured Tobacco come to dominate the industry?In her sweeping history of the American tobacco industry, Barbara Hahn traces the emergence of the tobacco plant's many varietal types, arguing that they are products not of nature but of economic relations and continued and intense market regulation. Hahn focuses her study on the most popular of these varieties, Bright Flue-Cured Tobacco. First grown in the inland Piedmont along the VirginiaNorth Carolina border, Bright Tobacco now grows all over the world, primarily because of its uniqueand easily replicatedcultivation and curing methods. Hahn traces the evolution of technologies in a variety of regulatory and cultural environments to reconstruct how Bright Tobacco became, and remains to this day, a leading commodity in the global tobacco industry. This study asks not what effect tobacco had on the world market, but how that market shaped tobacco into types that served specific purposes and became distinguishable from onTrade ReviewA discerning analysis of not only how a commodity—tobacco—was shaped and defined by technology, but also how technology can be influenced by a commodity . . . This interesting, thorough history will appeal to readers and researchers alike. Highly recommended.—ChoiceThoroughly researched, engaging, and enjoyable . . . An excellent first book.—Environmental HistoryStrongly argued and deeply researched.—Agricultural HistoryHahn has produced an important book, thoroughly researched and persuasively argued, that deserves a wide audience among American historians.—Journal of American HistoryHahn has written an ambitious book that examines how Americans created a commodity whose roots were densely—perhaps inextricably—tangled with those of the growing nation. Her work deserves a broad readership among students of southern agriculture, economic history, and the history of science and technology.—Journal of Southern HistoryAn impressive book, one that rewrites conventional understandings of tobacco as a crop, a commodity, and a symbol. From Jamestown to contemporary southern fields, Hahn tells an old story in an entirely fresh way.—Technology and CultureTable of ContentsAcknowledgmentsIntroductionProloguePart I1. Making Tobacco Virginian2. Growing the Business3. Death and TaxesPart II4. Ripeness Is All5. Inventing Tradition6. StabilizationAppendixNotesEssay on SourcesIndex

Read more less

Book SynopsisSoft drinks and fruit juices are produced in almost every country in the world and their availability is remarkable. From the largest cities to some of the remotest villages, soft drinks are available in a variety of flavours and packaging. Over the last decade, soft drinks and fruit juices have been the subject of criticism by the health community and there is considerable pressure on beverage manufacturers to reduce, or even remove, the sugar content of these products. Chemistry and Technology of Soft Drinks and Fruit Juices, Third Edition provides an overview of the chemistry and technology of soft drinks and fruit juices, covering ingredients, processing, microbiology, traceability and packaging as well as global market trends. This fully revised edition now includes chapters on topics that have become prominent in the industry since publication of the previous edition namely: water use and treatment, and microbiology technologies. The book is directed at graduatesTable of ContentsContributors xv Preface xvi 1 Introduction 1 P.R. Ashurst 1.1 Overview 1 1.2 Soft drinks 1 1.2.1 Ready‐to‐drink products 2 1.2.2 Concentrated soft drinks 2 1.2.3 Legislation 3 1.2.4 Product types 4 1.2.5 Development trends 6 1.2.6 Nutrition 7 1.2.7 New product trends 8 1.3 Fruit juices 8 1.3.1 Processing technology 9 1.3.2 Adulteration 10 1.3.3 Other processes 12 1.3.4 Nutrition 12 1.4 Packaging 13 1.5 Summary 14 References and further reading 14 2 Trends in beverage markets 15 E.C. Renfrew 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 Definitions 15 2.3 Beverage consumption trends 16 2.3.1 Bottled water 17 2.3.2 Carbonated soft drinks 17 2.3.3 100% juices nectars and fruit drinks 19 2.3.4 Energy drinks 19 2.3.5 Ready‐to‐drink (RTD) tea and ready‐to‐drink coffee 20 2.3.6 Coffee 20 2.3.7 Tea 21 2.3.8 Beer 21 2.3.9 Wine 22 2.3.10 Milk and flavoured milks 22 2.4 Consumption charts 23 2.5 Regions and markets 25 2.6 Market share charts 26 2.7 Main drivers in consumption 28 2.7.1 The search for ‘natural’ 28 2.7.2 Adult soft drinks 29 2.7.3 Protein drinks 29 2.8 Conclusion 29 3 Fruit and juice processing 31 B. Taylor 3.1 Introduction 31 3.2 Fruit types 32 3.2.1 Botanical aspects and classification of fruit types 32 3.2.2 Harvesting considerations for berry citrus pome stone and exotic fruits 35 3.3 Fruit types for processing 36 3.3.1 Pome fruits 36 3.3.2 Citrus fruits 38 3.4 General comments on fruit juice processing 39 3.4.1 Processing of ‘fleshy’ fruits 40 3.4.2 The use of enzymes in fruit juice processing 43 3.4.3 Extraction of citrus juices 46 3.5 Juice processing following extraction ‘cleaning’ and clarification 48 3.5.1 Juice concentration by evaporation 49 3.5.2 Freeze concentration 50 3.5.3 Hyper‐ and ultrafiltration 50 3.6 Volatile components 51 3.6.1 Spinning cone column 52 3.6.2 Composition of fruit juice volatiles 53 3.7 Legislative concerns 54 3.7.1 European fruit juice and nectars directive and associated regulations 54 3.7.2 AIJN Guidelines 56 3.7.3 Labelling regulations and authenticity 57 3.7.4 Juice in the diet – ‘five‐a‐day’ 58 3.8 Quality issues 58 3.8.1 Absolute requirements 58 3.9 In conclusion 62 References and further reading 64 4 Water and the soft drinks industry 65 T. Griffiths 4.1 Usage of water in the industry 65 4.2 Sources of water 66 4.2.1 Water cycle 66 4.2.2 Surface water 67 4.2.3 Ground water 67 4.3 Quality standards relating to water 68 4.3.1 UK legislative standards 68 4.3.2 Internal and customer standards 68 4.4 Processing water 69 4.4.1 Required quality 69 4.4.2 Starting quality 72 4.4.3 Processing options 75 4.5 Analytical and microbiological testing of water 83 4.5.1 Chemical tests 83 4.5.2 Microbiological tests 84 4.6 Effluents 84 4.6.1 Potential contaminants of water waste 84 4.6.2 Use of ‘grey’ water 85 4.6.3 Clean‐up and reuse of effluents 85 Further reading 87 References 87 5 Other beverage ingredients 88 B. Taylor 5.1 Introduction 88 5.2 Factors influencing development of the industry 88 5.3 The move towards standardisation 91 5.4 The constituents of a soft drink 94 5.5 Water 94 5.5.1 Requirements 94 5.5.2 Quality of fresh water 96 5.5.3 Water hardness 96 5.5.4 Water treatment 96 5.5.5 Water impurities and their effect 97 5.6 Acidulents 98 5.6.1 Citric acid 98 5.6.2 Tartaric acid 99 5.6.3 Phosphoric acid 100 5.6.4 Lactic acid 101 5.6.5 Acetic acid 101 5.6.6 Malic acid 101 5.6.7 Fumaric acid 101 5.6.8 Ascorbic acid 102 5.7 Flavourings 102 5.7.1 Flavourings and legislation 104 5.7.2 Flavourings in beverage application 106 5.7.3 Water‐miscible flavourings 106 5.7.4 Water‐dispersible flavourings 107 5.8 Colours 112 5.9 Preservatives 115 5.9.1 Microorganisms and beverages 116 5.9.2 Sulphur dioxide 117 5.9.3 Benzoic acid and benzoates 119 5.9.4 Sorbic acid and sorbates 119 5.10 Other functional ingredients 120 5.10.1 Stabilisers 120 5.10.2 Saponins 120 5.10.3 Antioxidants 121 5.10.4 Calcium disodium EDTA 121 5.11 Food safety 122 5.12 Future trends 123 Further reading and references 125 6 Non‐carbonated beverages 126 P.R. Ashurst 6.1 Introduction 126 6.2 Dilutable beverages 127 6.2.1 Overview 127 6.2.2 Nomenclature 127 6.2.3 Ingredients 128 6.2.4 Manufacturing operations 137 6.2.5 Filling and packaging 139 6.2.6 Product range 140 6.3 Ready‐to‐drink non‐carbonated products 140 6.3.1 Overview 140 6.3.2 Formulations 140 6.3.3 Special problems 140 6.3.4 Manufacturing and packing 141 6.3.5 Packaging types 142 6.4 Fruit juices and nectars 142 6.4.1 Processing 142 6.4.2 Packaging 144 Further reading 145 7 Carbonated beverages 146 D. Steen 7.1 Introduction 146 7.2 Carbon dioxide 147 7.3 Carbon dioxide production 148 7.3.1 Fermentation 148 7.3.2 Direct combustion 148 7.3.3 Quality standards 149 7.3.4 Delivery to the customer 149 7.3.5 Precautions 150 7.4 Carbonation 152 7.4.1 Basic considerations 152 7.4.2 Carbonation measurement 154 7.5 Syrup preparation 156 7.6 De‐aeration 157 7.7 Carbonators 158 7.8 Filling principles 160 7.8.1 Gravity filler 161 7.8.2 Counter‐pressure filler 163 7.8.3 Other filler types 167 7.8.4 Clean‐in‐place systems 169 7.9 Process control 171 7.10 Future trends 172 Further reading 173 8 Processing and packaging 174 R.A.W. Lea 8.1 Introduction 174 8.2 Juice extraction 174 8.3 Blending 175 8.3.1 Batch blending 176 8.3.2 Flip‐flop blending 176 8.3.3 Continuous blending 176 8.4 Processing 177 8.4.1 Flash pasteurisation 177 8.4.2 Hot filling 178 8.4.3 In‐pack pasteurisation 179 8.4.4 Aseptic filling 179 8.4.5 Chilled distribution 181 8.4.6 Summary 181 8.5 Control of process plant 181 8.6 Factory layout and operation 182 8.7 Hazard Analysis Critical Control Points 186 8.8 Good manufacturing practice 186 8.9 Cleaning in place 187 8.10 Packaging 188 8.11 Conclusion 191 9 Packaging materials 192 D. Rose 9.1 Introduction 192 9.2 Commercial and technical considerations 193 9.2.1 General considerations 193 9.2.2 Packaging materials 195 9.3 Processing 197 9.3.1 Cold‐filling 197 9.3.2 In‐pack pasteurising 197 9.3.3 Hot‐filling 198 9.3.4 Aseptic filling of bottles 198 9.3.5 Liquid nitrogen injection 202 9.4 Bottles 202 9.4.1 Glass 202 9.4.2 Polyethylene terephthalate 203 9.4.3 High‐density polyethylene 207 9.4.4 Polypropylene 207 9.4.5 Polyvinyl chloride 207 9.4.6 Plastic properties 208 9.5 Closures 209 9.5.1 Metal roll‐on or roll‐on pilfer‐proof closures 209 9.5.2 Vacuum seal closures 210 9.5.3 Plastic closures 211 9.5.4 Crown corks 213 9.6 Cans 213 9.6.1 Metal bottles 218 9.6.2 Plastic cans 218 9.7 Cartons 218 9.8 Flexible pouches 221 9.9 Multipacks 222 9.10 Secondary packaging 223 9.11 Pack decoration 224 9.12 Environmental considerations 225 9.13 Conclusions 228 Acknowledgements 230 10 Analysis of soft drinks and fruit juices 231 D.A. Hammond 10.1 Introduction 231 10.2 Laboratory accreditation 234 10.3 Sensory evaluation 236 10.4 Water 237 10.5 Sweeteners 239 10.5.1 Analysis of natural sweeteners 240 10.5.2 Analysis of high‐intensity sweeteners 245 10.6 Preservatives 249 10.6.1 Benzoic and sorbic acids 249 10.6.2 Sulphur dioxide 251 10.6.3 Dimethyldicarbonate 252 10.7 Acidulants 252 10.8 Carbonation 256 10.9 Miscellaneous additives 257 10.9.1 Caffeine 257 10.9.2 Quinine 258 10.9.3 Other additives 258 10.9.4 Fibre analysis 259 10.9.5 Herbal drinks 260 10.9.6 Osmolality 261 10.10 Analysis of colours used in soft drinks 261 10.10.1 Assessment of colour 263 10.10.2 Synthetic colours 265 10.10.3 Natural pigments 267 10.11 Vitamin analysis in soft drinks systems 272 10.11.1 Fat‐soluble vitamins 274 10.11.2 Vitamin B class 274 10.11.3 Vitamin C 275 10.11.4 Vitamin analysis using immunological procedures 275 10.12 Methods used to detect juice adulteration 276 10.13 Methods used to assess the juice or fruit content of soft drinks 280 10.14 Conclusions 282 References 283 11 Microbiology of soft drinks and fruit juices 290 P. Wareing 11.1 Introduction 290 11.2 Composition of soft drinks and fruit juices in relation to spoilage 291 11.3 Background microbiology – spoilage 293 11.3.1 Sources 293 11.3.2 Yeasts 294 11.3.3 Bacteria 295 11.3.4 Moulds 297 11.4 Microbiological safety problems 299 11.4.1 Escherichia coli 299 11.4.2 Salmonella 299 11.5 Preservation and control measures 299 11.6 Sampling for microbial problems 301 11.7 Identification schemes and interpretation 301 11.7.1 Sample isolation 301 11.7.2 Non‐molecular methods 302 11.7.3 Molecular identification 302 11.8 Brief spoilage case studies 303 11.9 Conclusions 304 References 306 Further reading 309 12 Functional drinks containing herbal extracts 310 E.F. Shaw and S. Charters 12.1 History 310 12.2 The extraction process 313 12.2.1 Extraction heritage 314 12.3 An extraction operation 320 12.3.1 Raw materials 321 12.3.2 Extraction 323 12.3.3 Organic extracts 329 12.3.4 Extract costs 329 12.4 Extract characteristics and their problems 331 12.4.1 Specifications 331 12.4.2 Stability 331 12.4.3 Hazing 332 12.4.4 Availability 333 12.5 Incorporation of extracts in beverages 333 12.5.1 Fruit juice‐based and fruit‐flavoured drinks 333 12.5.2 Mineral‐water based and flavoured water drinks 334 12.5.3 Carbonated and dilutable drinks 334 12.5.4 Energy and sports drinks 334 12.5.5 Regulatory issues 335 12.6 Some commonly used herbs 337 References 354 13 Miscellaneous topics 356 P.R. Ashurst and Q. Palmer 13.1 Introduction 356 13.2 Nutrition 356 13.2.1 Nutritional components 357 13.2.2 Calculation and declaration of nutrition information 360 13.3 Sports drinks 363 13.3.1 Definition and purpose 363 13.3.2 Physiological needs 363 13.3.3 The absorption of drinks 365 13.3.4 Formulation 366 13.4 Niche drinks 369 13.4.1 Alcoholic‐type drinks 369 13.4.2 Energy drinks 370 13.4.3 Functional drinks or nutraceuticals 371 13.4.4 Powder drinks 372 13.5 Dispensed soft drinks and juices 372 13.5.1 Introduction 372 13.5.2 Pre‐mix and post‐mix compared 373 13.5.3 Equipment 373 13.5.4 Outlets 375 13.5.5 Hygiene 375 13.5.6 Post‐mix syrup formulation 376 13.5.7 Post‐mix syrup packaging 377 13.6 Ingredient specifications 378 13.6.1 Why have specifications? 378 13.6.2 What a specification should include 378 13.6.3 Preparation of a specification 378 13.6.4 Supplier performance 379 13.7 Complaints and enquiries 380 13.7.1 Complaints 380 13.7.2 Enquiries 382 13.8 Health issues 383 13.8.1 Soft drinks and dental damage 383 13.8.2 Effect of colourings and preservatives 386 13.8.3 Obesity 387 13.9 Alternative processing methods 388 13.9.1 Microwave pasteurisation technology 388 13.9.2 High‐pressure processing 393 13.9.3 Irradiation 395 References 396 Index 398

Read more less

Book SynopsisFish and Fisheries in Estuaries: A Global Perspective brings together the current state of knowledge of estuarine fish in one inclusive work. Featuring contributions by more than fifty internationally-recognized researchers and estuarine ichthyological specialists, this landmark resource covers fish assemblages and functional groups, recruitment and production in estuaries, feeding ecology and trophic dynamics, fisheries and the conservation of estuarine fish, and much more. Thirteen in-depth chapters and two method appendices examine major aspects of fish and fisheries in estuaries throughout the world. The text describes the biology of estuarine fish and their connections with estuarine and adjacent marine and freshwater ecosystems, as well as examining the ways human industrialization and global events such as climate change are impacting both native and non-native species. Topics include habitat diversity, fish foraging behavior, ecological engineering tools and moTable of ContentsDedication Preface Author Details Acknowledgements Chapter 1: Introduction 1.1 Scope of the book 1.2 Reasons why this synthesis is important 1.3 Estuary definition and types 1.4 Chapter descriptions 1.5 Conclusions 1.6 References Chapter 2: Fish Assemblages and Functional Groups 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Zoogeography and estuarine fish assemblages 2.3 Estuarine typology and fish assemblages 2.4 Fish guilds and functional groups 2.4.1 Estuarine Use Functional Group (EUFG) 2.4.2 Feeding Mode Functional Group (FMFG) 2.4.3 Reproductive Mode Functional Group (RMFG) 2.5 Do functional groups drive fish assemblage structure? 2.6 Fish functional groups and guild analyses 2.7 Acknowledgements 2.8 References Chapter 3: Reproduction, Ontogeny and Recruitment 3.1 Introduction Scope of the Chapter 3.2 Estuarine support of reproduction and recruitment 3.2.1 Replenishment: modes and patterns 3.2.1.1 Modes of reproduction 3.2.1.2 Early life stages and nurseries 3.2.2 Sources of variability in reproductive success and recruitment 3.2.2.1 Habitat and water quality 3.2.2.2 Hydrography and physics 3.2.2.3 Foods of early life stages 3.2.2.4 Predators 3.2.2.5 Weather, climate and estuarine change 3.3 Early-life stages and recruitment dynamics 3.3.1 Dispersal, transport and retention 3.3.1.1 Offshore to estuary transport processes 3.3.1.2 Swimming as a transport mechanism 3.3.1.3 Near- and within-estuary transport processes 3.3.1.4 Retention: estuarine features and processes 3.3.2 Settlement 3.3.3 Larval and juvenile production processes 3.3.3.1 Larval feeding Ontogenetic shifts and feeding success Nutritional considerations 3.3.4 Larval and juvenile production: growth and mortality 3.3.4.1 Rates and variability Stage durations 3.3.4.2 Predation 3.3.4.3 Environmental factors 3.4 Adults and recruitment 3.4.1 Adult stock 3.4.1.1 Stock structure, contingents and cohorts 3.4.1.2 Maternal effects 3.4.2 Scales and patterns of variability in reproductive success 3.4.2.1 Recruitment levels and variability 3.4.2.2 Adult stock and recruitment 3.4.2.3 Predicting and forecasting recruitment 3.4.3 Recruitment: an integrated, evolved process 3.5 Threats to reproduction and recruitment in estuaries 3.5.1 Excessive fishing: depletion of adults and bycatch of juveniles 3.5.2 Habitat destruction and degradation 3.5.3 Impoundments and flow regulation 3.5.4 Power plants 3.5.5 Estuary contaminants, water quality degradation 3.5.6 Eutrophication 3.5.7 Climate change 3.5.8 Catastrophic events 3.6 Case Studies 3.6.1 Pleuronectiformes 3.6.2 Sciaenidae 3.6.3 Anchoa mitchilli (Engraulidae) 3.6.4 Brevoortia tyrannus and Brevoortia spp. (Clupeidae) 3.6.5 Morone saxatilis (Moronidae) 3.6.6 Gadidae and Clupeidae (Baltic Sea) 3.6.7 Lateolabrax japonicus (Lateolabracidae) 3.6.8 Fundulus heteroclitus (Fundulidae) 3.7 Summary and conclusions 3.8 Acknowledgements 3.9 References Chapter 4: Habitat Use and Connectivity 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Habitat diversity 4.2.1 Water column habitat 4.2.2 Unstructured shallow habitats 4.2.3 Structured benthic habitats 4.2.3.1 Salt marshes 4.2.3.2 Submerged aquatic vegetation 4.2.3.3 Mangroves 4.2.3.4 Shellfish beds 4.2.3.5 Woody debris 4.2.3.6 Rocky and gravel bottoms 4.3 Geomorphological and hydrological variables 4.4. Physico-chemical variables 4.5 Dynamics of juvenile habitat use 4.5.1 Temperature effects 4.5.2 Salinity effects 4.5.3 Diadromy 4.5.4 Settlement habitats 4.5.5 Connectivity among habitats 4.5.6 Alien species 4.6 Adult habitat 4.7 Habitat fidelity and juvenile and adult fishes 4.8 Ecological context 4.9 Connectivity between estuarine, freshwater and marine ecosystems 4.9.1 Migrations into estuaries 4.9.2 Migrations out of estuaries 4.9.3 Migrations between estuaries 4.10 Conclusions 4.11 Acknowledgements 4.12 References *Chapter 5: Feeding Ecology and Trophic Dynamics 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Fish foraging behaviour and food intake 5.2.1 Prey detection 5.2.2 Feeding periodicity 5.2.3 Food intake 5.2.4 Feeding movements and migrations 5.3 Factors influencing feeding ecology 5.3.1 Environmental factors 5.3.1.1 Water temperature, salinity and dissolved oxygen 5.3.1.2 Tidal regime and substratum composition 5.3.2 Biological factors 5.3.2.1 Body size 5.3.2.2 Ontogenetic changes in fish diets 5.3.3 Foraging specializations 5.3.4 Opportunistic versus specialised feeding 5.4 Ecotrophomorphology 5.5 Trophic categorization 5.5.1 Herbivorous species 5.5.2 Detritivorous species 5.5.3 Zoobenthivorous species 5.5.4 Zooplanktivorous species 5.5.5 Piscivorous species 5.5.5.1 Cannabilism 5.6 Competition, resource partitioning, energy flow and connectivity 5.6.1 Intraspecific and interspecific competition 5.6.2 Resource portioning 5.6.3 Energy flow and connectivity 5.7 Fishbase approach to Functional Feeding Groups 5.7.1 Example of a FFG analysis 5.8 Fish food sources in estuaries 5.8.1 Submerged macrophyte habitats 5.8.2 Emergent macrophyte habitats 5.9 Food web complexity 5.9.1 Vertical and horizontal feeding patterns by fishes 5.10 Predators of fish in estuaries 5.10.1 Invertebrates 5.10.2 Birds 5.10.3 Reptiles 5.10.4 Mammals 5.11 Effects of natural and anthropogenic perturbations on food webs 5.12 Acknowledgements 5.13 References Chapter 6: Fishes and Estuarine Environmental Health 6.1 Estuarine environmental health: concepts, definitions and assessment 6.2 Anthropogenic pressures impacting estuarine fish assemblages 6.2.1 Habitat loss and physical degradation 6.2.2 Pollution 6.2.3 River flow regulation 6.2.4 Fisheries and aquaculture 6.2.5 Non-indigenous species 6.2.6 Climate change 6.2.7 Integration of human pressures: the global change context 6.3 Fishes biomarkers responding to human pressures 6.3.1 Fish biomarkers and biomagnification 6.3.2 Biomarkers of exposure 6.4 Fishes as biological indicators 6.5 Main methodological approaches to assess estuarine health using fish as indicators 6.5.1 Historical data and reference conditions 6.5.2 Experimental approaches 6.5.3 Environmental impact assessment and other risk assessment methods 6.5.4 Qualitative methods 6.5.5 Quantitative indicators 6.5.6 Models 6.6 Environmental health fish-based indices 6.7 Disentangling fish responses in the multi-stress context of global changes 6.7.1 Univariate approaches 6.7.2 Multivariate approaches 6.8 Future research directions 6.9 References Chapter 7: Climate Change and Fishes in Estuaries 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Global, regional and local patterns 7.2.1 Predictors of fish taxonomic diversity at global and regional scales 7.2.2 Predictors of fish taxonomic diversity at local scales 7.2.3 Predictors of fish functional diversity at global, regional and local scales 7.3 Potential impacts of environmental/climate stressors on estuarine fish 7.3.1 Salinity and freshwater flow impacts 7.3.2 Temperature impacts 7.3.3 Dissolved oxygen impacts 7.3.4 Impacts of elevated CO2 7.3.5 Sea level rise 7.3.6 Estuary entrance channel openings and fish access 7.3.7 Disease 7.4 Climate change and fisheries in estuaries 7.4.1 Links to fisheries catches 7.4.2 Socio-economic effects and management implications 7.5 Case studies 7.5.1 Arctic 7.5.2 Temperate northern Atlantic 7.5.3 Temperate northern Pacific 7.5.4 Tropical Atlantic 7.5.5 Indo-Pacific 7.5.6 Temperate South America 7.5.7 Temperate southern Africa 7.5.8 Temperate Australia 7.6 Gaps in knowledge and future research directions 7.7 Acknowledgements 7.8 References Chapter 8: Estuarine Degradation and Rehabilitation 8.1 Introduction 8.1.1 Hazards and risks to estuarine fish and fisheries and their habitats 8.1.2 Effects of climate change on estuarine fish and fisheries 8.1.3 Effects of estuarine degradation on ecosystem services 8.1.4 Effects of estuarine degradation on water quality and impacts on fish 8.1.5 Heavy metals 8.1.6 Organic pollutants 8.1.7 Pharmaceutical and personal care products 8.1.8 Nutrients 8.1.9 Effects on water quantity, hydropeak and flow alteration on fish 8.1.10 Effects on fishing 8.2 Estuarine restoration and habitat creation 8.3 Current practices 8.4 Ecological engineering 8.5 Contribution of modelling tools to more process-based restoration objectives 8.5.1 Introduction 8..5.2 Framework 8.5.2.1 Towards a more process-orientated approach 8.5.2.2 Towards integrated objectives 8.6 Why modelling processes? 8.6.1 Physical phenomena 8.6.2 Species use of the estuarine environment and compartmental interactions 8.6.3 Overview 8.7 Modelling tools 8.7.1 Biogeochemical modelling 8.7.2 Hydromorphological-sedimentary modelling 8.8 Life cycle modelling 8.8.1 ‘Static’ approaches: statistical habitat suitability 8.8.2 Dynamic approach: the probability to attaining suitable habitats 8.9 Food web modelling 8.10 The way forward 8.11 From theory to practice 8.11.1 A case study of restoration in the Schelde Estuary 8.11.2 Ecological restoration by opportunity: an example from the Gironde Estuary 8.11.2.1 Gironde restoration summary 8.11.3 Case study – restoration of former salt hay farms 8.11.4 Case study – habitat alteration and restoration linked to a common reed invasion 8.11.5 Restoration of whole estuaries and wetland systems 8.12 Concluding comments 8.13 Acknowledgements 8.14 References Chapter 9: Estuarine Fisheries 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Estuarine fishery sectors 9.3 Problems and issues in fisheries 9.4 Fishery yields 9.5 Estuarine fisheries: a selection of case studies 9.5.1 Asian fisheries 9.5.1.1 The Hilsa Fishery, South Asia 9.5.1.2 The Lake Chilika Fishery, India 9.5.1.3 The Pichavaram Fishery, India 9.5.1.4 The Larut-Matang Fishery, Indonesia 9.5.2 African fisheries 9.5.2.1 The Kosi Bay Lakes Fishery, South Africa 9.5.2.2 The Sundays Estuary Fishery, South Africa 9.5.2.3 The Ébrié Lagoon Fishery, Ivory Coast 9.5.3 South and Central American fisheries 9.5.3.1 The Gulf of Nicoya Fishery, Costa Rica 9.5.3.2 The Cienaga Grande de Santa Marta Fishery, Columbia 9.5.3.3 The fisheries of Lake Maracaibo, Venezuela 9.5.3.4 The Valenca Delta Fishery, Brazil 9.5.4 Australasian fisheries 9.5.4.1 Lates calcarifer fisheries of Australia and Papua New Guinea 9.5.5 European and North American fisheries 9.6 The main fishery species in Europe and North America 9.6.1 Diadromous species 9.6.2 Marine seasonal migrants as adults 9.6.3 Marine migrants as juveniles 9.6.4 Estuarine-resident species 9.7 Connectivity 9.8 Concluding remarks 9.9 Acknowledgements 9.10 References Chapter 10: Conservation of Estuarine Fishes 10.1 Introduction 10.2 Analysis of threats to estuarine fish conservation 10.2.1 Fisheries 10.2.2 Habitat alteration/loss 10.2.3 Water quality and quantity alterations 10.2.4 Climate change 10.2.5 Non-native species 10.3 Conservation interventions and instruments 10.3.1 Legislative frameworks 10.3.1.1 International initiatives 10.3.1.2 Regional initiatives 10.3.1.3 National initiatives 10.3.1.4 Environmental non-governmental organisations 10.3.2 Role of protected areas 10.3.3 Rehabilitation and habitat restoration 10.3.4 Catchment conservation 10.3.5 Captive breeding and stocking 10.4 Threatened species and extinction risk: some case studies 10.4.1 Estuarine pipefish Syngnathus watermeyeri 10.4.2 Ganges shark Glyphis gangeticus 10.4.3 Totoaba Totoaba macdonaldi 10.4.4 European eel Anguilla anguilla 10.4.5 Cape stumpnose Rhabdosargus holubi 10.5 Current and future challenges 10.6 Conclusions 10.7 Acknowledgements and dedication 10.8 References Chapter 11: Non-native Species in Estuaries 11.1 Introduction 11.2 What conditions favor non-native species in estuaries? 11.2.1 Overview 11.2.2 San Francisco Estuary 11.2.3 Baltic Sea 11.2.4 Chesapeake Bay 11.2.5 Tagus Estuary 11.2.6 South African estuaries 11.2.7 Overview 11.3 What are the characteristics of successful non-native estuarine fishes? 11.3.1 General characteristics 11.3.2 Taxonomy 11.3.3 Mode of introduction 11.4 Do non-native species become integrated into the biota of estuaries? 11.4.1 Alternatives to species invasions 11.4.2 Novel species, novel ecosystems 11.4.3 Overview 11.5 How should non-native species in estuaries be managed? 11.6 How do non-native fishes fit into estuarine ecosystems? 11.7 Conclusions 11.8 Acknowledgements 11.9 References Chapter 12: Management of Fishes and Fisheries in Estuaries 12.1 Introduction 12.2 Management background, aims and philosophies 12.2.1 Background and basis for management 12.2.2 Environmental Quality Objectives and sustainable management 12.2.2.1 Indicators and monitoring as tools in management 12.2.3 Information for estuarine management 12.2.3.1 Information needs and communicating management issues 12.2.3.2 Information and data production, use and dissemination 12.2.4 Case studies of priority issues for management 12.2.4.1 Australia 12.2.4.2 Humber (UK) 12.2.4.3 United States of America 12.3 Management of activities and habitats, monitoring and surveillance 12.3.1 Estuarine environmental management 12.3.2 Monitoring of activities for management 12.3.3 Licencing of plans and projects 12.3.4 Cumulative effects assessment 12.3.5 Management of recreational fishing 12.3.6 Management of habitats 12.3.6.1 Management of loss and gain in estuarine habitats 12.4 Management approaches at whole catchment and estuary level 12.4.1 Management of catchments 12.4.2 Whole estuary management approaches 12.4.3 Determining if estuarine management is successful 12.4.4 Estuarine management: holistic case studies 12.4.4.1 New Zealand 12.4.4.2 Japan 12.4.4.3 South Africa 12.4.4.4 Eastern United States of America 12.4.4.5 Western United States of America 12.5 Management of species and stocks/fisheries 12.5.1 Background 12.5.2 Management of species and stocks case studies 12.5.2.1 United Kingdom 12.5.2.2 Baltic Sea 12.5.2.3 Australia 12.5.2.4 United States of America 12.6 Administrative and legal aspects of managing estuarine fish ecology and fisheries 12.6.1 Governance background 12.6.2 European legislation 12.6.2.1 The Water Framework Directive 12.6.2.2 Habitat and Species Directive 12.6.3 Administrative bodies 12.6.3.1 Management authorities: the Humber Estuary, UK example 12.6.3.2 Laws and administration: the USA example 12.7 Main messages and recommendations for management 12.8 Future research into management methods 12.9 Acknowledgements 12.10 References Chapter 13: Fish and Fisheries in Estuaries: Global Synthesis and Future Research Directions 13.1 Introduction – Changing estuarine landscapes: habitats, research and society 13.2 What fishes are in estuaries and why? 13.3 Estuarine fish recruitment and habitats – connectivity across space and time 13.3.1 Gaps in knowledge and future research directions 13.4 How much do we really understand about the role of fish in an estuarine food web? 13.4.1 Background 13.4.2 Fish food resources in estuaries 13.4.3 Factors influencing feeding movements, foraging ecology and migrations 13.4.4 Trophic categorization 13.4.5 Resource partitioning, energy flow and food web complexity 13.4.6 Gaps in knowledge and future research directions 13.5 Fishes – good indicators of environmental change? 13.5.1 Background to the integration of human pressures 13.5.2 Fishes as biological indicators 13.5.3 Environmental health fish-based indices 13.5.4 Disentangling fish responses in the multi-stress context of global changes 13.5.5 Gaps in knowledge and future research directions 13.6 Climate change and habitat degradation – a double whammy for fish in estuaries? 13.6.1 Background 13.6.2 Climate change 13.6.3 Habitat degradation 13.6.4 Gaps in knowledge and future research directions 13.7 Estuarine species are invading and shifting their distributions 13.7.1 Invasions of non-native species 13.7.2 The ebb and flow: geographical expansion and contraction of species 13.7.3 Gaps in knowledge and future research directions 13.8 The importance and future of fisheries in estuaries – societal goods and benefits? 13.8.1 Fisheries management in the future 13.9 Estuarine fish conservation for the future 13.9.1 Gaps in knowledge and future research directions 13.10 Restoring and managing estuaries for fish, fisheries and habitats 13.10.1 Management actions for restoring and rehabilitating estuaries 13.10.2 Gaps in knowledge and future research directions 13.11 Science-for-policy and policy-for-science – role of estuarine ichthyologists? 13.12 Fish and fisheries research in estuaries – the way forward 13.13 Acknowledgements 13.14 References Appendix 1: Study Methods I - Field Equipment, Sampling and Methods A1.1 Introduction A1.2 Sampling methods A1.2.1 ‘Traditional’ sampling (nets and traps) A1.2.1.1 Trawl nets Beam trawl Otter trawl Pelagic trawl Other trawls A1.2.1.2 Seine nets Beach seine Other seine nets A1.2.1.3 Fixed nets and traps Fyke net Fixed net/trap (e.g. salmon and eel traps) Stow net Entangling nets (gill and trammel nets) Drop net and drop traps Pop net and pull-up traps Other fixed nets and traps A1.2.1.4 Fishing lines Long lines Hand line A1.2.1.5 Ichthyoplankton samplers Vertical and horizontal plankton nets Bongo net Gulf sampler Larval light traps A1.2.1.6 Power station screens A1.2.1.7 Hand gathering methods Glass eel tow net and elver dip net Push net Kick sampling A1.2.2 Visual and acoustic methods A1.2.2.1 Visual detection Diving Underwater video A1.2.2.2 Acoustic detection Hydroacoustics Acoustic cameras Acoustic telemetry A1.2.2.3 Other observation techniques A1.2.3 Environmental DNA methods A1.2.3.1 DNA analysis DNA and eDNA methods Targeted PCR methods High-throughput sequencing A1.2.3.2 Strengths and disadvantages of DNA-based methods Feasibility and costs eDNA and the possible presence of an organism in that environment Can eDNA provide quantitative information? DNA techniques for environmental monitoring A1.3 Factors influencing the design of fish monitoring programmes A1.3.1 Monitoring techniques A1.3.2 Spatial considerations A1.3.3 Temporal considerations A1.3.4 A decision tree for monitoring, surveillance and survey design A1.3.4.1 Decision level 1: definition of main questions and hypotheses A1.3.4.2 Decision level 2: monitoring definition A1.3.4.3 Decision level 3: types of survey required/desired A1.3.4.4 Decision level 4: associated parameters/integrated monitoring A1.3.4.5 Decision level 5: methods to be used in monitoring A1.4 Acknowledgements A1.5 References Appendix 2: Study Methods II - Data Processing, Analysis and Interpretation A2.1 Introduction A2.2 Individual level A2.2.1 Size A2.2.2 Age/growth determination (otoliths/scales) A2.2.3 Diet and stomach analyses A2.2.3.1 Prey selectivity and prey importance A2.2.4 Sex/gonad development (Gonadosomatic Index) A2.2.5 External bodies abnormalities and fish health A2.2.6 Toxins and bioaccumulation A2.3 Population level A2.3.1 Abundance A2.3.2 Biomass A2.3.3 Condition, disease, parasitism, and liver somatic index A2.3.4 Genetic structure A2.3.5 Cohort analysis A2.3.6 Growth, mortality rates and models A2.3.7 Production A2.3.7.1 Biological production A2.3.7.2 Fisheries production A2.3.8 Yield models A2.3.9 Use of fishery statistics A2.4 Community level A2.4.1 Community structure A2.4.2 Multi-metric fish-based indices A2.5 General analysis methods and the role of models A2.5.1 The types and roles of numerical models A2.6 Precision versus accuracy – Analytical Quality Control/Quality Assurance A2.7 Concluding comments A2.8 Acknowledgements A2.9 References Fish Species Index Geographical Index General Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book looks at how to integrate iOS devices into distributed sensors network, both to make use of its own on-board sensors in such networks, but also as a hub.

Read more less

Book SynopsisDemonstrates just how much bioscience reproduces and changes our ideas about the meaning of life itself.Trade ReviewCarrie Frieses Cloning Wild Life: Zoos, Captivity and the Future of Endangered Animals is a terrific book. Friese begins with the observation that efforts to clone endangered animals have in general been well received by the public, in contrast to the outcry and suspicion that has greeted cloning animals raised for food, and cloning of humans. Controversy, instead, has been internal to zoo and conservation science. In a subtle delineation of the contours and stakes of these insider controversies, Friese goes far beyond the usual pro- and con-discourses about novel biotechnologies. She shows us nuclear transfer cloning as a flexible, powerful technology that connects many possible views of nature found and made and what it might be to conserve it. Excitingly, she also argues that cloning in relation to the conservation of endangered species is playing an important role in the current expansion of our understanding of genetics beyond the nucleus. -- Charis Thompson,author of Making Parents: The Ontological Choreography of Reproductive TechnologiesIn this brilliant study of cloned wild life, Carrie Friese adds a whole new dimension to the study of reproduction, illustrating vividly and persuasively how social and biological reproduction are inextricably bound together, and why this matters. -- Sarah Franklin,author of Dolly Mixtures: the Remaking of GenealogyWhat a strange and useful book this is! -- Stewart Brand * Issues in Science and Technology *[T]his book raises important questions and issues regarding conservation cloning. Thebook offers unique insights both through the thorough unearthing of relevant theory andthe analysis of scientists views on their endangered animal cloning practices. * New Genetics and Society *AsCloning Wild Lifeis, ultimately, a work of sociology, Frieses main interest here is in how cloning reorients questions about our human relationship with the natural world. Her analysis is timely given the robust interest in investigating the Anthropocenea proposed new geologic period marked by our collective human ability to remake the earthand the ways in which the human impact on the environment blurs the boundaries of traditional designations like nature and culture. * MAKE Literary Magazine *Table of ContentsAcknowledgments Introduction 1 Debating Cloning 2 Making Animals 3 Transpositions 4 Reproducing Populations 5 Genetic Values 6 Knowing Endangered Species 7 Biodiversities Conclusion Notes Bibliography Index About the Author

Read more less

Book SynopsisFocusing on the period from 1929 to 1962, this study examines how the catastrophe of the Dust Bowl and its complex consequences transformed the southeastern Colorado agricultural economy.Trade Review"The discussion of the environment and migrant labor in the decades after the Dust Bowl distinguishes this volume from others on the subject and broadens its importance beyond the regional."—C. K. Piehl, Choice"Sheflin has written a perceptive, smart, and solidly researched history that informs us about the Colorado Dust Bowl. . . . It is a transformative story of the federal government’s influence on the agriculture, demography, politics, and labor of the region."—R. Douglas Hurt, Journal of Arizona History"A highly informative study for students of agricultural history."—Lynn Bueling, Roundup Magazine“Legacies of Dust offers a significant new interpretation of the Dust Bowl. Douglas Sheflin’s long-term analysis of the Dust Bowl’s impact is this book’s most distinctive and important contribution. And his investigation of the direct and indirect impacts of the Dust Bowl and the New Deal on the agricultural labor force in the 1930s, 1940s, and 1950s is especially pathbreaking.”—Brian Q. Cannon, professor of history and director of the Charles Redd Center for Western Studies at Brigham Young University“While both popular and scholarly accounts of the Dust Bowl confine it to the 1930s, this careful and authoritative reconstruction of southeastern Colorado provides a much longer time frame for assessing two pivotal processes of the 1940s and 1950s: how farmers adopted a new and largely effective set of soil and water conservation practices and how the region came to depend on a labor regime of migratory workers. Sheflin deftly threads an analysis of the Dirty Thirties together with the broadest questions of postwar agricultural history.”—Sarah T. Phillips, associate professor of history and director of graduate studies at Boston University“This is a serious and thoughtful history of Colorado agriculture. The way it mixes environmental, political, and labor history is always interesting and sometimes downright poetic. The material on migrant children is important and absolutely fascinating.”—Jonathan Rees, professor of history at Colorado State University at Pueblo“Douglas Sheflin’s new, exceptionally well-researched study of the legacy of New Deal, Dust Bowl policies in southeast Colorado, convincingly reveals how the combined work of the Colorado Extension Service, the Social Conservation Service, the Production Management Administration, and Soil Conservation Districts rectified the unsustainable production-first mentality of farmers in the 1920s. As a result, Sheflin clearly illustrates how these policies produced for farmers a federal safety net well beyond the 1930s, especially for those who practiced soil conservation.”—James E. Sherow, University Distinguished Professor at Kansas State University Table of ContentsList of IllustrationsAcknowledgmentsIntroduction: The Dust and Everything After1. Early Lessons from the Land of Opportunity2. The County Agents Take Root3. Dirt 4. Claiming the Arkansas5. On the Move6. Food for Victory7. An Unquenchable Thirst8. Back to WorkConclusion: There and Back Again?NotesBibliographyIndex

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis is a guide to the practical study of the sources in wild nature of our living. It contains a series of study outlines for the entire year, and deals with both the plants and animals of the farm-the things that men have chosen to deal with as a means of livelihood and of personal satisfaction in all ages.

Read more less